diff options
Diffstat (limited to '10908-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-0.txt | 14951 |
1 files changed, 14951 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/10908-0.txt b/10908-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fecaa76 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14951 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 10908 *** + +MANUAL FOR NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND PRIVATES OF INFANTRY OF +THE ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES + +1917 + +To be used by Engineer companies (dismounted) and Coast Artillery +companies for Infantry instruction and training. + + +WAR DEPARTMENT Document No. 574 OFFICE OF THE ADJUTANT GENERAL + + + + + WAR DEPARTMENT, + WASHINGTON, _April_14,_1917._ + +The following Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates +of Infantry of the Army of the United States is approved and +herewith published for the information and government of all +concerned. + +This manual will also be used by Engineer companies (dismounted) +and Coast Artillery companies in connection with Infantry instruction +and training prescribed by the War Department. + +By ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR: + + H. L. SCOTT, + _Major_General,_Chief_of_Staff._ + + OFFICIAL: + H. P. McCAIN. + _The_Adjutant_General._ + + + + +TABLE OF CONTENTS. + +CHAPTER I. MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY + Section 1. Oath of enlistment + Section 2. Obedience + Section 3. Loyalty + Section 4. Discipline + Section 5. Military courtesy + Section 6. Saluting + Section 7. Rules governing saluting + Section 8. Courtesies in conversation +CHAPTER II. ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT + Section 1. The rifle + Section 2. Care of the rifle + Section 3. Cleaning the rifle + Section 4. Uniforms + Section 5. The service kit + Section 6. The surplus kit + Section 7. Assembling Infantry equipment +CHAPTER III. RATIONS AND FORAGE + Section 1. The ration + Section 2. Individual cooking + Section 3. The forage ration +CHAPTER IV. PERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET +CHAPTER V. EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, 1911 + Section l. Definitions + Section 2. Introduction + Section 3. Orders, commands, and signals + Section 4. School of the soldier + Section 5. School of the squad + Section 6. School of the company + Section 7. Company inspection + Section 8. Manual of tent pitching + Section 9. Manual of the bayonet +CHAPTER VI. FIELD SERVICE + Section 1. Principles of Infantry training + Section 2. Combat + Section 3. Patrolling + Section 4. Advance guards + Section 5. Rear guards + Section 6. Flank guards + Section 7. Outposts + Section 8. Rifle trenches +CHAPTER VII. MARCHING AND CAMPING + Section 1. Breaking camp and preparation for a march + Section 2. Marching + Section 3. Making camp + Section 4. Camp services and duties +CHAPTER VIII. TARGET PRACTICE + Section 1. Preliminary training in marksmanship + Section 2. Sight adjustment + Section 3. Table of sight corrections + Section 4. Aiming + Section 5. Battle sight + Section 6. Trigger squeeze + Section 7. Firing positions + Section 8. Calling the shot + Section 9. Coordination + Section 10. Advice to riflemen + Section 11. The course in small-arms firing + Section 12. Targets + Section 13. Pistol and revolver practice +CHAPTER IX. EXTRACTS PROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY + Section 1. Introduction + Section 2. Classification of interior guilds + Section 3. Details and rosters + Section 4. Commander of the guard + Section 5. Sergeant of the guard + Section 6. Corporal of the guard + Section 7. Musicians of the guard + Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels + Section 9. Privates of the guard + Section 10. Orders for sentinels + Section 11. Countersigns and paroles + Section 12. Guard patrols + Section 13. Watchmen + Section 14. Compliments from guards + Section 15. Prisoners + Section 16. Guarding prisoners + Section 17. Flags + Section 18. Reveille and retreat gun + Section 19. Guard mounting + Section 20. Formal guard mounting for Infantry + Section 21. Informal guard mounting for Infantry + Section 22. Relieving the old guard +CHAPTER X. MAP READING AND SKETCHING + Section 1. Military map reading + Section 2. Sketching +CHAPTER XI. MESSAGE BLANKS +CHAPTER XII. SIGNALS AND CODES +CHAPTER XIII. FIRST-AID RULES +CHAPTER XIV. LAWS AND REGULATIONS + Section 1. General provisions + Section 2. The Army of the United States + Section 3. Rank and precedence of officers and noncommissioned + officers + Section 4. Insignia of officers and noncommissioned officers + Section 5. Extracts from the Articles of War +CHAPTER XV. ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY +APPENDIX. FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY. + + +SECTION 1. OATH OF ENLISTMENT. + +Every soldier on enlisting in the Army takes upon himself the +following obligation: + +"I,--------, do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will bear true +faith and allegiance to the United States of America; that I will +serve them honestly and faithfully against all their enemies +whomsoever; and that I will obey the orders of the President of +the United States, and the orders of the officers appointed over +me according to the Rules and Articles of War." (109th Article +of War.) + + +SECTION 2. OBEDIENCE. + +The very first paragraph in the Army Regulations reads: + +"All persons in the military service are required to obey strictly +and to EXECUTE PROMPTLY the lawful orders of their superiors." + +Obedience is the first and last duty of a soldier. It is the +foundation upon which all military efficiency is built. Without +it an army becomes a mob, while with it a mob ceases to be a +mob and becomes possessed of much of the power of an organized +force. It is a quality that is demanded of every person in the +Army, from the highest to the lowest. Each enlisted man binds +himself, by his enlistment oath, to obedience. Each officer, in +accepting his commission, must take upon himself the same solemn +obligation. + +Obey strictly and execute promptly the lawful orders of your +superiors. It is enough to know that the person giving the order, +whether he be an officer, a noncommissioned officer, or a private +acting as such, is your lawful superior. You may not like him, +you may not respect him, but you must respect his position and +authority, and reflect honor and credit upon yourself and your +profession by yielding to all superiors that complete and +unhesitating obedience which is the pleasure as well as the duty +of every true soldier. + +Orders must be STRICTLY carried out. It is not sufficient to +comply with only that part which suits you or which involves no +work or danger or hardship. Nor is it proper or permissible, when +you are ordered to do a thing in a certain way or to accomplish a +work in a definitely prescribed manner, for you to obtain the +same results by other methods. + +Obedience must be PROMPT AND UNQUESTIONING. When any soldier (and +this word includes officers as well as enlisted men) receives +an order, it is not for him to consider whether the order is +a good one or not, whether it would have been better had such +an order never been given, or whether the duty might be better +performed by some one else, or at some other time, or in some +other manner. His duty is, first, to understand just what the +order requires, and, second, to proceed at once to carry out +the order to the best of his ability. + +"Officers and men of all ranks and grades are given a certain +independence in the execution of the tasks to which they are +assigned and are expected to show initiative in meeting the different +situations as they arise. Every individual, from the highest +commander to the lowest private, must always remember that inaction +and neglect of opportunities will warrant more severe censure +than an error in the choice of the means." (_Preface,_Field_ +_Service_Regulations._) + + +SECTION 3. LOYALTY. + +But even with implicit obedience you may yet fail to measure +up to that high standard of duty which is at once the pride and +glory of every true soldier. Not until you carry out the desires +and wishes of your superiors in a hearty, willing, and cheerful +manner are you meeting all the requirements of your profession. +For an order is but the will of your superior, however it may be +expressed. Loyalty means that you are for your organization and +its officers and noncommissioned officers--not against them; that +you always extend your most earnest and hearty support to those in +authority. No soldier is a loyal soldier who is a knocker or a +grumbler or a shirker. Just one man of this class in a company +breeds discontent and dissatisfaction among many others. You should, +therefore, not only guard against doing such things yourself but +should discourage such actions among any of your comrades. + + +SECTION 4. DISCIPLINE. + +"1. All persons in the military service are required to obey +strictly and to execute promptly the lawful orders of their +superiors. + +"2. Military authority will be exercised with firmness, kindness, +and justice. Punishments must conform to law and follow offenses +as promptly as circumstances will permit. + +"3. Superiors are forbidden to injure those under their authority +by tyrannical or capricious conduct or by abusive language. While +maintaining discipline and the thorough and prompt performance +of military duty, all officers, in dealing with enlisted men, +will bear in mind the absolute necessity of so treating them as +to preserve their self-respect. Officers will keep in as close +touch as possible with the men under their command and will strive +to build up such relations of confidence and sympathy as will +insure the free approach of their men to them for counsel and +assistance. This relationship may be gained and maintained without +relaxation of the bonds of discipline and with great benefit to +the service as a whole. + +"4. Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; +respect to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, +but will be extended on all occasions. + +"5. Deliberations or discussions among military men conveying +praise or censure, or any mark of approbation, toward others in +the military service, and all publications relating to private +or personal transactions between officers are prohibited. Efforts +to influence legislation affecting the Army or to procure personal +favor or consideration should never be made except through regular +military channels; the adoption of any other method by any officer +or enlisted man will be noted in the military record of those +concerned," (_Army_Regulations_.) + +"The discipline which makes the soldier of a free country reliable +in battle is not to be gained by harsh or tyrannical treatment. +On the contrary, such treatment is far more likely to destroy +than to make an army. It is possible to import instruction and +give commands in such manner and in such tone of voice as to +inspire in the soldier no feeling but an intense desire to obey, +while the opposite manner and tone of voice can not fall to excite +strong resentment and a desire to disobey. The one mode or the +other of dealing with subordinates springs from a corresponding +spirit in the breast of the commander. He who feels the respect +which is due to others can not fail to inspire in them regard +for himself, while he who feels, and hence manifests, disrespect +toward others, especially his inferiors, can not fail to inspire +hatred against himself," (_Address_of_Maj._Gen._John_M._Schofield_ +_to_the_United_States_Corps_of_Cadets,_Aug,_11,_1879._) + +When, by long-continued drill and subordination, you have learned +your duties, and obedience becomes second nature, you have acquired +discipline. It call not be acquired in a day or a month. It is +a growth. It is the habit of obedience. To teach this habit of +obedience is the main object of the close-order drill, and, if +good results are to be expected, the greatest attention must be +paid to even the smallest details. The company or squad must +be formed promptly at the prescribed time--not a minute or even +a second late. All must wear the exact uniform prescribed and +in the exact manner prescribed. When at attention there must +be no gazing about, no raising of hands, no chewing or spitting +in ranks. The manual of arms and all movements must be executed +absolutely as prescribed. A drill of this kind teaches discipline. +A careless, sloppy drill breeds disobedience and insubordination. +In other words, discipline simply means efficiency. + + +SECTION 5. MILITARY COURTESY. + +In all walks of life men who are gentlemanly and of good breeding +are always respectful and courteous to those about them. It helps +to make life move along more smoothly. In civil life this courtesy +is shown by the custom of tipping the hat to ladies, shaking +hands with friends. and greeting persons with a nod or a friendly +"Good morning," etc. + +In the Army courtesy is just us necessary, and for the same reasons. +It helps to keep the great machine moving without friction. + +"Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; +respect to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but +will be extended on all occasions." (_Par._4,_Army_Regulations,_ +_1913._) + +One method of extending this courtesy is by saluting. When in +ranks the question of what a private should do is simple--he +obeys any command that is given. It is when out of ranks that +a private must know how and when to salute. + + +SECTION 6. SALUTING. + +In the old days the free men of Europe were all allowed to carry +weapons, and when they met each would hold up his right hand to +show that he had no weapon in it and that they met as friends. +Slaves or serfs, however, were not allowed to carry weapons, +and slunk past the free men without making any sign. In this +way the salute came to be the symbol or sign by which soldiers +(free men) might recognize each other. The lower classes began +to imitate the soldiers in this respect, although in a clumsy, +apologetic way, and thence crept into civil life the custom of +raising the hand or nodding as one passed an acquaintance. The +soldiers, however, kept their individual salute, and purposely +made it intricate and difficult to learn in order that it could be +acquired only by the constant training all real soldiers received. +To this day armies have preserved their salute, and when correctly +done it is at once recognized and never mistaken for that of the +civilian. All soldiers should be careful to execute the salute +exactly as prescribed. The civilian or the imitation soldier +who tries to imitate the military salute invariably makes some +mistake which shows that he is not a real soldier; he gives it +in an apologetic manner, he fails to stand or march at attention, +his coat is unbuttoned or hat on awry, or he falls to look the +person saluted in the eye. There is a wide difference in the +method of rendering and meaning between the civilian salute as +used by friends in passing, or by servants to their employers, +and the MILITARY SALUTE, the symbol and sign of the military +profession. + +TO SALUTE WITH THE HAND, first assume the position of a soldier +or march at attention. Look the officer you are to salute straight +in the eye. Then, when the proper distance separates you, raise +the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches +the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the right eye, +thumb and fingers extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm +inclined at about 45°, hand and wrist straight. Continue to look +the officer you are saluting straight in the Eye and keep your +hand in the position of salute until the officer acknowledges +the salute or until he has passed. Then drop the hand smartly +to the side. The salute is given with the right hand only. + +TO SALUTE WITH THE RIFLE, bring the rifle to right shoulder arms +if not already there. Carry the left hand smartly to the small +of the stock, forearm horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb +and fingers extended and joined, forefinger touching the end of +the cocking piece. Look the officer saluted in the eye. When +the officer has acknowledged the salute or has passed, drop the +left hand smartly to the side and turn the head and eyes to the +front. The rifle salute may also be executed from the order or +trail. See paragraph 94, Infantry Drill Regulations, and paragraph +111, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916. + +TO SALUTE WITH THE SABER, bring the saber to order saber if not +already there, raise and carry the saber to the front, base of +the hilt as high as the chin and 6 inches in front of the neck, +edge to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than the +hilt, thumb extended on the left of the grip, all fingers grasping +the grip. Look the officer saluted in the eye. When the officer +has acknowledged the salute or has passed, lower the saber, point +in prolongation of the right foot and near the ground, edge to +the left, hand by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm extended, +and return to the order saber. If mounted, the hand is held behind +the thigh, point a little to the right and front of the stirrup. + +(For Cavalry.) TO SALUTE WITH THE SABER, bring the saber to carry +saber if not already there, carry the saber to the front with +arm half extended until the thumb is about 6 inches in front +of the chin, the blade vertical, guard to the left, all four +fingers grasping the grip, the thumb extending along the back +in the groove, the fingers pressing the back of the grip against +the heel of the hand. Look the officer saluted in the eye. When +the officer has acknowledged the salute or has passed, bring +the saber down with the blade against the hollow of the right +shoulder, guard to the front, right hand at the hip, the third +and fourth finger on the back of the grip and the elbow back. + +The pistol is not carried in the hand but in the holster, therefore +when armed with the pistol salute with the hand. + +Always stand or march at attention before and during the salute. +The hat should be on straight, coat completely buttoned up, and +hands out of the pockets. + + +SECTION 7. RULES GOVERNING SALUTING. + +759. (1) Salutes shall be exchanged between officers and enlisted +men not in a military formation, nor at drill, work, games, or +mess, on every occasion of their meeting, passing near or being +addressed, the officer junior in rank or the enlisted man saluting +first. + +(2) When an officer enters a room where there are several enlisted +men the word "attention" is given by some one who perceives him, +when all rise, uncover, and remain standing at attention until +the officer leaves the room or directs otherwise. Enlisted men +at meals stop eating and remain seated at attention. + +(3) An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an officer, +faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes. Standing, he +faces an officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain +in the same place or on the same ground, such compliments need +not be repeated. Soldiers actually at work do not cease work +to salute an officer unless addressed by him. + +(4) Before addressing an officer an enlisted man makes the prescribed +salute with the weapon with which he is armed, or, if unarmed, with +the right hand. He also makes the same salute after receiving a +reply. + +(5) In uniform, covered or uncovered, but not in formation, officers +and enlisted men salute military persons as follows: With arms in +hand, the salute prescribed for that arm (sentinels on interior +guard duty excepted); without arms, the right-hand salute. + +(6) In civilian dress, covered or uncovered, officers and enlisted +men salute military persons with the right-hand salute. + +(7) Officers and enlisted men will render the prescribed salutes +in a military manner, the officer junior in rank or the enlisted +men saluting first. When several officers in company are saluted +all entitled to the salute shall return it. + +(8) Except in the field under campaign or simulated campaign +conditions, a mounted officer (or soldier) dismounts before +addressing a superior officer not mounted. + +(9) A man in formation shall not salute when directly addressed, +but shall come to attention if at rest or at ease. + +(10) Saluting distance is that within which recognition is easy. +In general, it does not exceed 30 paces. + +(11) When an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of a +body of troops, it is brought to attention while he is opposite +the post of the commander. + +(12) In public conveyances, such as railway trains and street +cars, and in public places, such as theaters, honors and personal +salutes may be omitted when palpably inappropriate or apt to +disturb or annoy civilians present. + +(13) Soldiers at all times and in all situations pay the same +compliments to officers of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and +Volunteers, and to officers of the National Guard as to officers +of their own regiment, corps, or arm of service. + +(14) Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform to the +foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms when armed +with the rifle. They will not salute if it interferes with the +proper performance of their duties. Troops under arms will salute +us prescribed in drill regulations. + +760. (1) Commanders of detachments or other commands will salute +officers of grades higher than the person commanding the unit, +by first bringing the unit to attention and then saluting as +required by subparagraph (5). paragraph 759. If the person saluted +is of a junior or equal grade, the unit need not be at attention +in the exchange of salutes. + +(2) If two detachments or other commands meet, their commanders +will exchange salutes, both commands being at attention. + +761. Salutes and honors, as a rule, are not paid by troops actually +engaged in drill, on the march, or in the field under campaign or +simulated campaign condition. Troops on the service of security +pay no compliments whatever. + +762. If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) and +armed with the rifle, or with sabers drawn, it shall be brought +to PRESENT ARMS or PRESENT SABERS before its commander salutes in +the following cases: When the National Anthem is played, or when +TO THE COLOR or TO THE STANDARD is sounded during ceremonies, or +when a person is saluted who is its immediate or higher commander +or a general officer, or when the national or regimental color +is saluted. + +763. At parades and other ceremonies, under arms, the command +shall render the prescribed salute and shall remain in the position +of salute while the National Anthem is being played; also at +retreat and during ceremonies when TO THE COLOR is played, if +no band is present. If not under arms, the organizations shall +be brought to attention at the first note of the National Anthem, +TO THE COLOR or TO THE STANDARD, and the salute rendered by the +officer or noncommissioned officer in command as prescribed in +regulations, as amended herein. + +764. Whenever the National Anthem is played at any place when +persons belonging to the military service are present, all officers +and enlisted men not in formation shall stand at attention facing +toward the music (except at retreat, when they shall face toward +the flag). If in uniform, covered or uncovered, or in civilian +clothes, uncovered, they shall, salute at the first note of the +anthem, retaining the position of salute until the last note of +the anthem. If not in uniform and covered, they shall uncover +at the first note of the anthem, holding the headdress opposite +the left shoulder and so remain until its close, except that +in inclement weather the headdress may be slightly raised. + +The same rules apply when TO THE COLOR or TO THE STANDARD is sounded +as when the National Anthem is played. + +When played by an army band, the National Anthem shall be played +through without repetition of any part not required to be repeated +to make it complete. + +The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during the +playing of the National Anthem of the United States shall be +shown toward the national anthem of any other country when played +upon official occasions. + +765. Officers and enlisted men passing the uncased color will +render honors as follows: If in uniform, they will salute as +required by subparagraph (5), paragraph 759; if in civilian dress +and covered, they will uncover, holding the headdress opposite +the left shoulder with the right hand; if uncovered, they will +salute with the right-hand salute." (_Infantry_Drill_Regulations,_ +_1911._) + +The national flag belonging to dismounted organizations is called +a color; to mounted organizations, a standard. An uncased color +is one that is not in its waterproof cover. + +Privates do not salute noncommissioned officers. Prisoners are +not permitted to salute; they merely come to attention if not +actually at work. The playing of the National Anthem as a part +of a medley is prohibited in the military service. + + +SECTION 8. COURTESIES IN CONVERSATION. + +In speaking to an officer, always stand at attention and use the +word "Sir." Examples: + +"Sir, Private Brown, Company B, reports as orderly." + +"Sir, the first sergeant directed me to report to the captain." + +(Question by an officer:) "To what company do you belong?" + +(Answer:) "Company H, sir." + +(Question by an officer:) "Has first call for drill sounded?" + +(Answer:) "No, sir;" or "Yes; sir.; it sounded about five minutes +ago." + +(Question by an officer:) "Can you tell me, please, where Major +Smith's tent is?" + +(Answer:) "Yes; sir; I'll take you to it." + +Use the third person in speaking to an officer. Examples: + +"Does the Lieutenant wish," etc. + +"Did the Captain send for me?" + +In delivering a message from one officer to another, always use +the form similar to the following: "Lieutenant A presents his +compliments to Captain B and states," etc. This form is not used +when the person sending or receiving the message is an enlisted +man. + +In all official conversation refer to other soldiers by their +titles, thus: Sergeant B, Private C. + + + + +[Illustration] + +CHAPTER II. + +ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT. + + +SECTION 1. THE RIFLE. + +The rifle now used by the Army of the United States is the United +States magazine rifle, model of 1903, caliber .30. + +It is 43.212 inches long and weighs 8.69 pounds. + +The bayonet weighs 1 pound and the blade is 16 inches long. + +The rifle is sighted for ranges up to 2,850 yards. + +The maximum range, when elevated at an angle of 45 degrees, is +4,891 yards (389 yards less than 3 miles). + +The smooth bore of the rifle is 0.30 inch in diameter. It is +then rifled 0.004 inch deep, making the diameter from the bottom +of one groove to the bottom of the opposite groove 0.308 inch. +The rifling makes one complete turn in each 10 inches of the +barrel. + +The accompanying plate shows the names of the principal parts +of the rifle. + +The only parts of a rifle that an enlisted man is permitted to +take apart are the bolt mechanism and the magazine mechanism. +Learn how to do this from your squad leader, for you must know +how in order to keep your rifle clean. Never remove the hand +guard or the trigger guard, nor take the sights apart unless you +have special permission from a commissioned officer. + +The cartridge used for the rifle is called the .30-caliber model +1906 cartridge. There are four types of cartridges. + +The BALL CARTRIDGE consists of the brass case or shell, the primer, +the charge of smokeless powder, and the bullet. The bullet has +a sharp point, is composed of a lead core and a jacket of cupro +nickel, and weighs 150 grains. The bullet of this cartridge, +when fired from the rifle, starts with an initial velocity at +the muzzle of 2,700 feet per second. + +The BLANK CARTRIDGE contains a paper cup instead of a bullet. +It is dangerous up to 100 feet. Firing with blank cartridges at +a represented enemy at ranges less than 100 yards is prohibited. + +The GUARD CARTRIDGE has a smaller charge of powder than the ball +cartridge, and five cannelures encircle the body of the shell +at about the middle to distinguish it from the ball cartridge. +It is intended for use on guard or in riot duty, and gives good +results up to 200 yards. The range of 100 yards requires a sight +elevation of 450 yards, and the range of 200 yards requires all +elevation of 650 yards. + +The DUMMY CARTRIDGE is tin plated and the shell is provided with +six longitudinal corrugations and three circular holes. The primer +contains no percussion composition. It is intended for drill +purposes to accustom the soldier to the operation of loading the +rifle. + +All cartridges are secured five in a clip to enable five cartridges +to be inserted into the magazine at one motion. Sixty ball cartridges +in 12 clips are packed in a cloth bandoleer to facilitate issue +and carrying. When full the bandoleer weighs about 3.88 pounds. +Bandoleers are packed 20 in a box, or 1,200 rounds in all. The +full box weighs 99 pounds. + + +SECTION 2. CARE OF THE RIFLE. + +Every part of the rifle must be kept free from rust, dust, and +dirt, A dirty or rusty rifle is a sure sign that the soldier +does not realize the value of his weapon, and that his training +is incomplete. The rifle you are armed with is the most accurate +in the world. If it gets dirty or rusty it will deteriorate in +its accuracy and working efficiency, and no subsequent care will +restore it to its original condition. The most important part +of the rifle to keep clean is the bore. If, after firing, the +bore is left dirty over night, it will be badly rusted in the +morning, therefore your rifle must be cleaned not later than +the evening of the day on which it was fired. The fouling of +the blank cartridge is as dangerous to the bore as the fouling +of the ball cartridge. + +Never attempt to polish any part that is blued. If rust appears, +remove, by rubbing with oil. Never use emery paper, pomade, or +any preparation that cuts or scratches, to clean any part of +the rifle. + +To beautify and preserve the stock rub with raw linseed oil. The +use of any other preparation on the stock is strictly forbidden. + +Always handle your rifle with care. Don't throw it around as +though it were a club. Don't stand it up against anything so +that it rests against the front sight. Don't leave a stopper +or a rag in the bore: it will cause rust to form at that point. +It may also cause the gun barrel to burst if a shot is fired +before removing it. + +Guard the sights and muzzle carefully from any blow that might +injure them. The front sight cover should always be on the rifle +except when rifle is being fired. This is especially necessary to +protect the front sight while rifle is being carried in scabbard +by a mounted man. + +In coming to the "order arms," lower the piece gently to the ground. + +When there is a cartridge in the chamber the piece is always +carried locked. In this position the safety lock should be kept +turned fully to the right, since if it be turned to the left +nearly to the "ready" position and the trigger be pulled, the +rifle will be discharged when the safety lock is turned to the +"ready" position at any time later on. + +Cartridges can not be loaded from the magazine unless the bolt +is drawn fully to the rear. When the bolt is closed, or only +partly open, the cut-off may be turned up or down as desired, +but if the bolt is drawn fully to the rear, the magazine can not +be cut off unless the top cartridge or the follower be pressed +down slightly and the bolt be pushed forward so that the cut-off +may be turned "off." + +In the case of a misfire, don't open the bolt immediately, as +it may be a hangfire. Misfires are often due to the fact that +the bolt handle was not fully pressed down. Sometimes in pulling +the trigger the soldier raises the bolt handle without knowing +it. + +Unless otherwise ordered, arms will be unloaded before being +taken to quarters or tents, or as soon as the men using them are +relieved from duty. + +Keep the working parts oiled. + +In every company there should be at least one copy of the Manual +of the Ordnance Department entitled "Description and Rules for +the Management of the U. S, Magazine Rifle." This manual gives +the name and a cut of every part of the rifle, explains its use, +shows how to take the rifle apart and care for the same, and +also gives much other valuable and interesting information. + + +SECTION 3. CLEANING THE RIFLE. + +"Cleaning the rifle,--(a) The proper care of the bore requires +conscientious, careful work, but it pays well in the attainment +of reduced labor of cleaning, prolonged accuracy life of the +barrel, and better results in target practice. Briefly stated, +the care of the bore consists in removing the fouling, resulting +from firing, to obtain a chemically clean surface, and in coating +this surface with a film of oil to prevent rusting. The fouling +which results from firing is of two kinds--one, the products +of combustion of the powder; the other, cupro-nickel scraped +off (under the abrading action of irregularities or grit in the +bore). Powder fouling, because of its acid reaction, is highly +corrosive; that is, it will induce rust and must be removed. +Metal fouling of itself is inactive, but may cover powder fouling +and prevent the action of cleaning agents until removed, and when +accumulated in noticeable quantities it reduces the accuracy of +the rifle. + +(b) Powder fouling may be readily removed by scrubbing with hot +soda solution, but this solution has no effect on the metal fouling +of cupro-nickel. It is necessary, therefore, to remove all metal +fouling before assurance can be had that all powder fouling, has +been removed and that the bore may be safely oiled. Normally, +after firing a barrel in good condition the metal fouling is +so slight as to be hardly perceptible. It is merely a smear of +infinitesimal thickness, easily removed by solvents of cupro-nickel. +However, due to pitting, the presence of dust, other abrasives, +or to accumulation, metal fouling may occur in clearly visible +flakes or patches of much greater thickness, much more difficult +to remove. + +(c) In cleaning the bore after firing it is well to proceed as +follows: Swab out the bore with soda solution (subparagraph j) +to remove powder fouling. A convenient method is to insert the +muzzle of the rifle into the can containing the soda solution +and, with the cleaning rod inserted from the breech, pump the +barrel full a few times. Remove and dry with a couple of patches. +Examine the bore to see that there are in evidence no patches of +metal fouling which, if present, can be readily detected by the +naked eye, then swab out with the swabbing solution--a dilute +metal-fouling solution (subparagraph j). The amount of swabbing +required with the swabbing solution can be determined only by +experience, assisted by the color of the patches. Swabbing should +be continued, however, as long as the wiping patch is discolored +by a bluish-green stain. Normally a couple of minutes' work is +sufficient. Dry thoroughly and oil. + +(d) The proper method of oiling a barrel is as follows: Wipe the +cleaning roll dry; select a clean patch and thoroughly saturate +it with sperm oil or warmed cosmic, being sure that the cosmic +has penetrated the patch; scrub the bore with the patch, finally +drawing the patch smoothly from the muzzle to the breech, allowing +the cleaning rod to turn with the rifling. The bore will be found +now to be smooth and bright so that any subsequent rust and sweating +can be easily detected by inspection. + +(e) If patches of metal fouling are seen upon visual inspection +of the bore the standard metal fouling solution prepared as +hereinafter prescribed must be used. After scrubbing out with +the soda solution, plug the bore from the breech with a cork +at the front end of the chamber or where the rifling begins. +Slip a 2-inch section of rubber hose over the muzzle down to the +sight and fill with the standard solution to at least one-half +inch above the muzzle of the barrel. Let it stand for 30 minutes, +pour out the standard solution, remove hose and breech plug, +and swab out thoroughly with soda solution to neutralize and +remove all trace of ammonia and powder fouling. Wipe the barrel +clean, dry, and oil. With few exceptions, one application is +sufficient, but if all fouling is not removed, as determined by +careful visual inspection of the bore and of the wiping patches, +repeat as described above. + +(f) After properly cleaning with either the swabbing solution +or the standard solution, as has just been described, the bore +should be clean and safe to oil and put away, but as a measure +of safety a patch should always be run through the bore on the +next day and the bore and wiping patch examined to insure that +cleaning has been properly accomplished. The bore should then +be oiled, as described above. + +(g) If the swabbing solution or the standard metal-fouling solution +is not available, the barrel should be scrubbed, as already +described, with the soda solution, dried, and oiled with a light +oil. At the end of 24 hours it should again be cleaned, when it +will usually be found to have "sweated"; that is, rust having +formed under the smear of metal fouling where powder fouling was +present, the surface is puffed up. Usually a second cleaning is +sufficient, but to insure safety it should be again examined at +the end of a few days, before final oiling. The swabbing solution +should always be used, if available, for it must be remembered +that each puff when the bore "sweats" is an incipient rust pit. + +(h) A clean dry surface having been obtained, to prevent rust +it is necessary to coat every portion of this surface with a +film of neutral oil. If the protection required is but temporary +and the arm is to be cleaned or fired in a few days, sperm oil +may be used. This is easily applied and easily removed, but has +not sufficient body to hold its surface for more than a few days. +If rifles are to be prepared for storage or shipment, a heavier +oil, such as cosmic, must be used. + +(i) In preparing arms for storage or shipment they should be +cleaned with particular care, using the metal-fouling solution +as described above. Care should be taken, insured by careful +inspection on succeeding day or days, that the cleaning is properly +done and all traces of ammonia solution removed. The bore is then +ready to be coated with cosmic. At ordinary temperatures cosmic +is not fluid. In order, therefore, to insure that every part of +the surface is coated with a film of oil the cosmic should be +warmed. Apply the cosmic first with a brush; then, with the breech +plugged, fill the barrel to the muzzle, pour out the surplus, +remove the breechblock, and allow to drain. It is believed that +more rifles are ruined by improper preparation for storage than +from any other cause. If the bore is not clean when oiled--that +is, if powder fouling is present or rust has started--a half +inch of cosmic on the outside will not stop its action, and the +barrel will be ruined. Remember that the surface must be perfectly +cleaned before the heavy oil is applied. If the instructions +as given above are carefully followed, arms may be stored for +years without harm. + +(j) Preparation of solutions: + +_Soda_solution_--This should be a saturated solution or sal +soda (bicarbonate of soda). A strength of at least 20 per cent +is necessary. The spoon referred to in the following directions +is the model 1910 spoon issued in the mess outfit. + +Sal soda, one-fourth pound, or four (4) heaping spoonfuls. + +Water, 1 pint or cup, model of 1910, to upper rivets. + +The sal soda will dissolve more readily in hot water. + +_Swabbing_solution_.--Ammonium persulphate, 60 grains, one-half +spoonful smoothed off. + +Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths of a pint, or +12 spoonfuls. + +Water, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls. + +Dissolve the ammonium persulphate in the water and add the ammonia. +Keep in tightly corked bottle; pour out only what is necessary +at the time, and keep the bottle corked. + +_Standard_metal_fouling_solution_.--Ammonium persulphate, +1 ounce, or 2 medium heaping spoonfuls. + +Ammonium carbonate, 200 grains, or 1 heaping spoonful. + +Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths pint, or 12 +spoonfuls. + +Water, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls. + +Powder the persulphate and carbonate together, dissolve in the +water and add the ammonia; mix thoroughly and allow to stand +for one hour before using. It should be kept in a strong bottle, +tightly corked. The solution should not be used more than twice, +and used solution should not be mixed with unused solution, but +should be bottled separately, The solution, when mixed, should +be used within 30 days! Care should be exercised in mixing and +using this solution to prevent injury to the rifle. An experienced +noncommissioned officer should mix the solution and superintend +its use. + +Neither of these ammonia solutions have any appreciable action +on steel when not exposed to the air, but if allowed to evaporate +on steel they attack it rapidly. Care should, therefore, be taken +that none spills on the mechanism and that the barrel is washed out +promptly with soda solution. The first application of soda solution +removes the greater portion of the powder fouling and permits a +more effective and economical use of the ammonia solution. These +ammonia solutions are expensive and should be used economically. + +(k) It is a fact recognized by all that a highly polished steel +surface rusts much less easily than one which is roughened: also +that a barrel which is pitted fouls much more rapidly than one +which is smooth. Every effort, therefore, should be made to prevent +the formation of pits, which are merely enlarged rust spots, and +which not only affect the accuracy of the arm but increase the +labor of cleaning. + +(l) The chambers of rifles are frequently neglected because they +are not readily inspected. Care should be taken to see that they +are cleaned as thoroughly as the bore. A roughened chamber delays +greatly the rapidity of fire, and not infrequently causes shells +to stick. + +(m) A cleaning rack should be provided for every barrack. Rifles +should always be cleaned from the breach, thus avoiding possible +injury to the rifling at the muzzle, which would affect the shooting +adversely. If the bore for a length of 6 inches at the muzzle +is perfect, a minor injury near the chamber will have little +effect on the accuracy of the rifle. The rifle should be cleaned +as soon as the firing for the day is completed. The fouling is +easier to remove then, and if left longer it will corrode the +barrel. + +(n) The principles as outlined above apply equally well for the +care of the barrel of the automatic pistol. Special attention +should be paid to cleaning the chamber of the pistol, using the +soda solution. It has been found that the chamber pits readily if +it is not carefully cleaned, with the result that the operation +of the pistol is made less certain." (_Par._134,_Small_Arms_ +_Firing_Manual,_1913._) + + +SECTION 4. UNIFORMS. + +Uniforms and clothing issued to enlisted men must not be sold, +pawned, loaned, given away, lost or damaged through neglect or +carelessness. Any soldier who violates this rule may be tried +by a military court and punished. + +All uniforms and articles of clothing issued to enlisted men, +whether or not charged on their clothing allowance, remain the +property of the United States and do not become the property of +the soldier either before or after discharge from the service. +Under the law a soldier honorably discharged from the Army of +the United States is authorized to wear his uniform from the +place of his discharge to his home within three months after the +date of such discharge. To wear the uniform after three months +from the date of such discharge renders such person liable to +fine or imprisonment, or both. + +The dress uniform (the blue uniform) consists of the dress cap, +dress coat, dress trousers, and russet-leather shoes. The straight, +standing, military, white linen collar, showing no opening in front, +is always worn with this uniform, with not to exceed one-half +inch showing above the collar of the coat. Turndown, piccadilly, +or roll collars are not authorized. + +When under arms, white gloves and the garrison belt (or +russet-leather belt and cartridge box) are worn. + +The full-dress uniform is the same as the dress uniform, with +the breast cord added. + +The service uniform is either cotton (summer) or woolen (winter) +olive drab. + +For duty in the field it consists of the service hat, with cord +sewed on, service coat or sweater, service breeches, olive-drab +flannel shirt, leggings, russet-leather shoes, and identification +tag. In cold weather olive-drab woolen gloves are worn; at other +times, no gloves. + +When not in the field, the service cap is worn instead of the +campaign hat. Under arms, white gloves and the garrison belt +(or russet-leather belt and cartridge box) are worn. + +Wear the exact uniform prescribed by your commanding officer, +whether you are on duty or off duty. + +Never wear a mixed uniform, as, for instance, a part of the service +uniform with the blue uniform. + +Never wear any part of the uniform with civilian clothes. It +is very unsoldierly, for example, to wear a civilian overcoat +over the uniform or to wear the uniform overcoat over a civilian +suit. + +Keep the uniform clean and neat and in good repair. + +Grease spots and dust and dirt should be removed as soon as possible. + +Rips and tears should be promptly mended. + +Missing buttons and cap and collar ornaments should be promptly +replaced. + +There is but one correct and soldierly way to wear the cap. Never +wear it on the back or side of the head. + +The service hat should be worn in the regulation shape, peaked, +with four indentations, and with hat cord sewed on. Do not cover +it with pen or pencil mark. + +Never appear outside your room or tent with your coat or olive-drab +shirt unbuttoned or collar of coat unhooked. Chevrons, service +stripes, and campaign medals and badges are a part of the uniform +and must be worn as prescribed. + +When coats are not worn with the service uniform olive-drab shirts +are prescribed. + +Suspenders must never be worn exposed to view. + +Never appear in breeches without leggings. + +Leather leggings should be kept polished. Canvas leggings should +be scrubbed when dirty. + +Russet-leather (tan) shoes should be kept clean and polished. +The overcoat when worn must be buttoned throughout and the collar +hooked. When the belt is worn it will be worn outside the overcoat. + + +SECTION 5. THE SERVICE KIT. + +The service kit is composed of two parts--(a) the field kit, +which includes everything the soldier wears or carries with him +in the field, and (b) the surplus kit. + +The field kit consists of-- + + (a) The clothing worn on the person. + (b) Arms and equipment, consisting of-- + +FOR EACH ENLISTED MAN.[1] + + 1 first-aid packet. + 1 pouch for first-aid packet. + 1 canteen. + 1 canteen cover. + 1 can, bacon. + 1 can, condiment. + 1 pack carrier (except individually mounted men). + 1 haversack (except individually mounted men). + 1 meat can. + 1 cup. + 1 knife. + 1 fork. + 1 spoon. + 1 shelter tent half. + 1 shelter tent pole (when issued). + 5 shelter tent pins. + 1 identification tag with tape. + +[Footnote 1: New model equipment, 1910. The old model equipment +is the same except omit canteen cover, bacon and condiment cans, +and pack carrier, and add 1 cartridge-belt suspenders, 1 canteen +strap, and 1 blanket-roll straps, set.] + +FOR EACH ENLISTED MAN ARMED WITH THE RIFLE. + + 1 United States magazine rifle, caliber .30. + 1 bayonet. + 1 bayonet scabbard. + 1 gun sling. + 1 rifle cartridge belt. + +FOR EACH EACH ENLISTED MAN ARMED WITH THE PISTOL. + + 1 pistol, caliber .45. + 1 pistol holster. + 1 magazine pocket, double, web. + 2 extra magazines. + 1 pistol belt (except for men armed _also_ with the rifle). + +FOR EACH ENLISTED MAN, INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED, IN ADDITION TO THE +ABOVE. + + 1 rifle scabbard (if armed with rifle). + 1 spurs, pair. + 1 spur straps, pair. + 1 set of horse equipment. + +(c) Extra clothing and articles to be carried on the soldier or +on the packed saddle. + + 1 blanket. + 1 comb. + 1 drawers, pair, + 1 poncho (dismounted men), + 1 slicker (mounted men). + 1 soak, cake. + 2 stockings, pair. + 1 toothbrush. + 1 towel. + 1 undershirt. + 1 housewife (for one man of each squad). + +(d) Ammunition, consisting of-- + + 90 rounds ball cartridges, caliber .30 (old model belt). + 100 rounds ball cartridges, caliber .30 (new model belt). + +(e) Rations, consisting of-- + + 1 or 2 reserve rations (bacon, hard bread, coffee, sugar, and + salt). + +(f) Intrenching tools, consisting of-- + + 2 pick mattocks, per squad. + 1 bolo or hand axe, per squad. + 4 shovels, intrenching, per squad. + 1 wire cutter, per squad. + + +SECTION 6. THE SURPLUS KIT. + +The surplus kit for each man consists of-- + + 1 breeches, pair. + 1 drawers, pair. + 1 shirt, olive drab. + 1 shoes, russet leather, pair. + 2 stockings, pair. + 1 undershirt. + 1 shoe laces, extra, pair. + +Each surplus kit bag contains 1 jointed cleaning rod and case. + +Squad leaders are responsible that surplus kit bags are kept in +order and fully packed in the field.[2] Men are allowed access +to them for the purpose of making substitutions. + +[Footnote 2: In campaign or simulated campaign, when an organization +is restricted to its prescribed field-train transportation, surplus +kits, overcoats, and sweaters are stored on the line of +communications or other designated place with the permanent camp +equipment of the organization.] + +The surplus kits are packed in surplus kit bags, one for each +squad, one for sergeants, and one for cooks and buglers. + +The kit of each man will be packed as follows: + +Stockings to be rolled tightly, one pair in the toe of each shoe; +shoes placed together, heels at opposite ends, soles outward, +wrapped tightly in underwear, and bundle securely tied around +the middle by the extra pair of the shoe laces, each bundle to +be tagged with the company number of the owner. These individual +kits will be packed in the surplus kit bag in two layers of four +kits each, the breeches and olive drab shirts to be neatly folded +find packed on the top and sides of the layers, the jointed cleaning +rod and case, provided for each squad, being attached by the +thongs on the inside of the bag. + +When overcoats or sweaters are not prescribed to be worn on the +person they will be collected into bundles of convenient size +and secured by burlap or other suitable material, or will be +boxed. They will be marked ready for equipment to be forwarded +when required. + + +SECTION 7. ASSEMBLING INFANTRY EQUIPMENT.[3] + +[Footnote 3: Since these instructions were written 1 drawers +and 1 undershirt have been added to the field kit. Place them +in pack when carried, otherwise in haversack.] + +TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT. + +WITH RATIONS. + +Place the assembled equipment on the ground, suspender side of +haversack down, pockets of cartridge belt up, haversack spread +put, inside flap and pack carrier extended their full length +to the rear. + +Place three cartons of hard bread in the center of the haversack +body, the lower one on the line of attachment of the inside flap; +lay the remaining carton of hard bread, the condiment can and +the bacon can on the top of these, the condiment can and the +bacon can at the bottom, top of the bacon can to the front; the +socks and toilet articles are rolled, towel on the outside, into +a bundle of the same approximate dimensions as a carton of hard +bread, and are placed in front of the two rows thus formed. + +The inside flap of the haversack is folded over these articles, the +end of the flap being turned in so that the flap, thus shortened, +extends about 2 inches beyond the top of the upper row; the sides +of the haversack are folded over the sides of the rows; the upper +binding straps are passed through the loops on the outside of the +inside flap, each strap through the loop opposite the point of +its attachment to the haversack body, and fastened by means of +the buckle on the opposite side, the strap being passed through +the opening in the buckle next to its attachment, over the center +bar, and back through the opening of the buckle away from its +attachment; the strap is pulled tight to make the fastening secure; +the outer flap of the haversack is folded over and fastened by +means of the lower haversack binding strap and the buckle on +the inside of the outer flap; the strap is pulled tight, drawing +the outer flap snugly over the filled haversack. + +The haversack is now packed and the carrier is ready for the +reception of the pack. + +If one reserve ration and one emergency ration are carried in +lieu of two reserve rations, the haversack is packed in the manner +described above, except that two cartons of hard bread and the +bacon can form the bottom layer, the bacon can on the bottom; +the condiment can, the emergency ration, and the toilet articles +form the top layer. + +If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two reserve +rations, it is packed on top of the top layer. + +TO MAKE THE PACK: Spread the shelter half on the ground and fold +in the triangular ends, forming an approximate square from the +half, the guy on the inside; fold the poncho once across its +shortest dimension, then twice across its longest dimension, +and lay it in the center of the shelter half; fold the blanket +as described for the poncho and place it on the latter; place +the shelter tent pins in the folds of the blanket, in the center +and across the shortest dimension; fold the edges of the shelter +half snugly over the blanket and poncho and, beginning on either +of the short sides, roll tightly and compactly. This forms the +pack. + +TO ASSEMBLE THE PACK: Place the pack in the pack carrier and +grasp the lower suspension rings, one in each hand; place the +right knee against the bottom of the roll; pull the carrier down +and force the pack up close against the bottom of the packed +haversack; without removing the knee, pass the lower carrier +binding strap over the pack and secure it by means of the opposite +buckle; in a similar manner secure the lower haversack binding +strap and then the upper carrier binding strap. + +Engage the snap hook on the pack suspenders in the lower suspension +rings. + +The equipment is now assembled and packed as prescribed for the +full equipment. + +TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT. + +WITHOUT RATIONS. + +Place the assembled equipment on the ground as heretofore described; +fold up the inside flap of the haversack so that its end will +be on a line with the top of the haversack body; fold up the +lower haversack strap in the same manner. + +TO MAKE UP THE PACK: Fold the poncho, blanket, and shelter half, +and make up the pack as heretofore prescribed, except that the +condiment and bacon can (the former inside the latter) and the +toilet articles and socks are rolled in the pack. In this case +the pack is rolled, beginning on either of the long sides instead +of the short sides, as heretofore described. + +TO ASSEMBLE THE PACK: Place the pack on the haversack and pack +carrier, its upper end on a line with the upper edge of the haversack +body: bind it to the haversack and carrier by means of the haversack +and pack binding straps; fold down the outer flap on the haversack +and secure it by means of the free end of the middle haversack +binding strap and the buckle provided on the underside of the +flap; engage the snap hooks of the park suspenders in the lower +suspension rings. + +The equipment is now packed and assembled. + +TO ADJUST THE EQUIPMENT TO THE SOLDIER: Put on the equipment, +slipping the arms one at a time through the pack suspenders as +through the sleeves of a coat; by means of the adjusting buckles +on the belt suspenders raise or lower the belt until it rests well +down over the hip bones on the sides and below the pit of the +abdomen in front; raise or lower it in rear until the adjusting +strap lies smoothly across the small of the back; by means of +the adjusting buckles on the pack suspenders, raise or lower the +load on the back until the top of the haversack is on a level +with the top of the shoulders, the pack suspenders, from their +point of attachment to the haversack to the line of tangency +with the shoulder, being horizontal. _The_latter_is_absolutely_ +_essential_to_the_proper_adjustment_of_the_load._ + +The position of the belt is the same whether filled or empty. + +TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK. + +WITH RATIONS. + +Detach the carrier from the haversack; place the rest of the +equipment on the ground as heretofore described; place the four +cartons of hard bread, the bacon can, the condiment can, and the +toilet articles in one row in the middle of the haversack body, +the toilet articles at the top, the bacon can at the bottom, +top to the front, the row extending from top to bottom of the +haversack; fold the inside flap over the row thus formed; fold +the sides of the haversack up and over; pass the three haversack +binding straps through the loops on the inside flap and secure by +means of the buckles on the opposite side of the haversack; pass +the lower haversack binding strap through the small buttonhole +in the lower edge of the haversack, fold the outer flap of the +haversack over the whole, and secure by means of the buckle on +its underside and the lower haversack binding strap. + +Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous +buttonholes in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the +snap hooks on the ends of the pack suspenders. + +If one reserve ration and one emergency ration are carried in +lieu of two reserve rations, the haversack is packed in the manner +described above, except that one emergency ration is substituted +for two of the cartons of hard bread. + +If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two reserve +rations, it is packed on top of the layer. + +TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK. + +WITHOUT RATIONS. + +Detach the carrier from the haversack; place the rest of the +equipment on the ground, as heretofore described; fold up the +inside flap of the haversack until its upper end is on a line with +the top of the haversack body; fold the sides of the haversack +over, pass the three haversack binding straps through the loops +on the inside flap and secure by means of the buckles on the +opposite side of the haversack; pass the lower haversack binding +strap through the small buttonhole in the lower edge of the +haversack; place the condiment and bacon can (the former inside +the latter) and the toilet articles and socks in the bottom of +the pouch thus formed; fold the outer flap of the haversack over +the whole and secure by means of the buckle on its underside +and the lower haversack binding strap. + +Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous +buttonholes in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the +snap hooks on the ends of the pack suspenders. + +TO ADJUST THE EQUIPMENT TO THE SOLDIER: Put on the equipment +as prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the cartridge belt +as prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the pack suspenders +so that the top of the haversack is on a level with the top of +the shoulders. + +TO DISCARD THE PACK WITHOUT REMOVING THE EQUIPMENT FROM THE BODY. + +Unsnap the pack suspenders from the suspension rings and snap +them into the eyelets on top of the belt and in rear of the real +pockets of the right and left pocket sections; support the bottom +of the pack with the left hand and with the right hand grasp +the coupling strap at its middle and withdraw first one end, +then the other; press down gently on the pack with both hands +and remove it. When the pack has been removed, lace the coupling +strap into the buttonholes along the upper edge of the carrier. +Adjust the pack suspenders. + +OLD MODEL EQUIPMENT. + +To roll the blanket roll.--_See_ chapter V, section 8, paragraph +747. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +RATIONS AND FORAGE. + + +SECTION 1. THE RATION. + +A ration is the allowance of food for one man for one day. + +In the field there are three kinds of rations issued, as follows: + +The _garrison_ration_ is intended to be issued in kind whenever +possible. The approximate net weight of this ration is 4.5 pounds. + +The _reserve_ration_ is the simplest efficient ration, and +constitutes the reserve carried for field service. It consists +of-- + + Ounces. + Bacon 12 + Hard bread 16 + Coffee, roasted and ground 1.12 + Sugar 2.4 + Salt .16 + ----- + Approximate net weight pounds 2 + +The _field_ration_ is the ration prescribed in orders by +the commander of the field forces. It consists of the reserve +ration, in whole or in part, supplemented by articles requisitioned +or purchased locally or shipped from the rear. + +In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equipment +the following rations: + + (a) On each man: At least two days' reserve rations. + (b) In the ration section of the field train, for each man: + Two days' field and one day's reserve rations. + (c) In the supply train: Two days' field rations. + +In addition to the foregoing, commanders will require each man +on the march to carry the unconsumed portion of the day's ration +issued the night before for the noonday meal. Reserve rations are +consumed only in case of extreme necessity, when other supplies +are not available. They are not to be consumed or renewed without +an express order from the officer in command of the troops who is +responsible for the provision of supplies, namely, the division +commander or other independent-detachment commander. Every officer +within the limits of his command is held responsible for the +enforcement of this regulation. Reserve rations consumed must +he replaced at the first Opportunity. + + +SECTION 2. INDIVIDUAL COOKING. + +Sometimes rations for several days are issued to the soldier +at one time, and in such cases you should be very careful to +so use the rations that they will last you the entire period. +If you stuff yourself one day, or waste your rations, you will +have to starve later on. + +Generally the cooking for the company will be done by the company +cook, but sometimes every soldier will have to prepare his own +meals, using only his field mess kit for the purpose. + +The best fire for individual cooking is a small, clear one, or, +better yet, a few brisk coals. To make such a fire, first gather +a number of sticks about 1 inch in diameter. These should be +dry. Dead limbs adhering to a tree are dryer than those picked +up from the ground. Split some of these and shave them up into +kindling. Dig a trench in the ground, laid with the wind, about +a foot long, 4 inches wide, and 6 inches deep. Start the fire in +this trench gradually, piling on the heavier wood as the fire +grows. When the trench is full of burning wood, allow it a few +minutes to burn down to the coals and stop blazing high. Then +rest the meat can and cup over the trench and start cooking. +Either may be supported, if necessary, with green sticks. If you +can not scrape a trench in the soil, build one up out of rocks +or with two parallel logs. + +The following recipes have been furnished from the office of the +Quartermaster General, United States Army: + +_Coffee_.--Fill the cup two-thirds full of water and bring +to a boil. Add one heaping spoonful of coffee and stir well, +adding one spoonful of sugar if desired. Boil five minutes and +then set it to the side of the fire to simmer for about 10 minutes. +Then, to clear the coffee, throw in a spoonful or two of cold +water. This coffee is of medium strength and is within the limit +of the ration if made but twice a day. + +_Cocoa_.--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a +boil, add one heaping spoonful of cocoa, and stir until dissolved. +Add one spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for five minutes. + +_Chocolate_.--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring +to a boil, add a piece of chocolate about the size of a hickory +nut, breaking or cutting it into small pieces and stirring until +dissolved. Add one spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for +five minutes. + +_Tea_.--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a +boll, add one-half of a level spoonful of tea, and then let it +stand or "draw" for three minutes. If allowed to stand longer +the tea will get bitter, unless separated from the ten leaves. + +MEATS. + +_Bacon_.--Cut slices about five to the inch, three of which +should generally be sufficient for one man for one meal. Place +in a meat can with about one-half inch of cold water. Let come +to a boll and then pour the water off. Fry over a brisk fire, +turning the bacon once and quickly browning it. Remove the bacon +to lid of meat can, leaving the grease for frying potatoes, onions, +rice, flapjacks, etc., according to recipe. + +_Fresh_meat_ (to fry).--To fry, a small amount of grease +(one to two spoonfuls) is necessary. Put grease in the meat can +and let come to a smoking temperature, then drop in the steak +and, if about one-half inch thick, let fry for about one minute +before turning, depending upon whether it is desired it shall be +rare, medium, or well done. Then turn and fry briskly as before. +Salt and pepper to taste. + +Applies to beef, veal, pork, mutton, venison, etc. + +_Fresh_meat_ (to broil).--Cut in slices about one inch thick, +from half as large as the hand to four times that size. Sharpen +a stick or branch of convenient length--say, from two to four +feet long--and weave the point of the stick through the steak +several times, so that it may be readily turned over a few brisk +coals or on the windward side of a small fire. Allow to brown +nicely, turning frequently. Salt and pepper to taste. Meat with +considerable fat is preferred, though any meat may be broiled +in this manner. + +_Fresh_meat_ (to stew).--Cut into chunks from one-half inch +to one inch cubes. Fill cup about one-third full of meat and cover +with about one inch of water. Let boil or simmer about one hour, +or until tender. Add such fibrous vegetables as carrots, turnips, +or cabbage, cut into small chunks, soon after the meat is put +on to boil, and potatoes, onions, or other tender vegetables +when the meat is about half done. Amount of vegetables to be +added, about the same as meat, depending upon supply and taste. +Salt and pepper to taste. Applies to ail fresh meats and fowls. +The proportion of meat and vegetables used varies with their +abundance, and fixed quantities can not be adhered to. Fresh fish +can be handled as above, except that it is cooked much quicker, +and potatoes and onions and canned corn are the only vegetables +generally used with it, thus making a chowder. A slice of bacon +would greatly improve the flavor. May be conveniently cooked +in meat can or cup. + +VEGETABLES. + +_Potatoes_ (fried).--Take two medium-sized potatoes or one +large one (about one-half pound), peel and cut into slices about +one-fourth inch thick and scatter well in the meat can in which +the grease remains after trying the bacon. Add sufficient water to +half cover the potatoes, cover with the lid to keep the moisture +in, and let come to a boil for about 15 to 20 minutes. Remove +the cover and dry as desired. Salt and pepper to taste. During +the cooking the bacon already prepared may be kept on the cover, +which is most conveniently placed bottom side up over the cooking +vegetables. + +_Onions_ (fried).--Same as potatoes. + +_Potatoes_ (boiled).--Peel two medium-sized potatoes (about +one-half pound) or one large one, and cut in coarse chunks of +about the same size--say 1-1/2 inch cubes. Place in meat can and +three-fourths fill with water. Cover with lid and let boil or +simmer for 15 or 20 minutes. They are done when easily penetrated +with a sharp stick. Pour off the water and let dry out for one +or two minutes over hot ashes or light coals. + +_Potatoes_ (baked).--Take two medium-sized potatoes (about, +one-half pound) or one large one cut in half. Lay in a bed of +light coals and cover with same and smother with ashes. Do not +disturb for 30 or 40 minutes, when they should be done. + +_Canned_tomatoes_.--One 2-pound can is generally sufficient +for five men. + +_Stew_.--Pour into the meat can one man's allowance of tomatoes +and add about two large hardtacks broken into small pieces and +let come to a boil. Add salt and pepper to taste, or add a pinch +of salt and one-fourth spoonful of sugar. + +_Or_, having tried the bacon, pour the tomatoes into the +meat can, the grease remaining, and add, if desired, two broken +hardtacks. Set over a brisk fire and let come to a boil. + +_Or_, heat the tomatoes just as they come from the can, +adding two pinches of salt and one-half spoonful of sugar, if +desired. + +_Or_, especially in hot weather, eaten cold with hard bread, +they are very palatable. + +_Rice_.--Take about two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring +to a boll, add four heaping spoonfuls of rice, and boil until the +grains are soft enough to be easily mashed between the fingers +(about 20 minutes). Add two pinches of salt and, after stirring, +pour off the water and empty rice out on meat can. Bacon grease +or sugar may be added. + +_Corn_meal,_fine_hominy,_oatmeal_.--Take about one-third +of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, add 4 heaping spoonfuls +of the meal or hominy, and boil about 20 minutes. Then add about +two pinches of salt and stir well. + +_Dried_beans_and_peas_.--Put 4 heaping spoonfuls in about +two-thirds of a cupful of water and boil until soft. This generally +takes from three to four hours. Add one pinch of salt. About half +an hour before the beans are done add one slice of bacon. + +HOT BREADS. + +_Flapjacks_.--Take 6 spoonfuls of flour and one-third spoonful +of baking powder and mix thoroughly (or dry mix in a large pan +before issue, at the rate of 25 pounds of flour and 3 half cans +of baking powder for 100 men). Add sufficient cold water to make +a batter that will drip freely from the spoon, adding a pinch of +salt. Pour into the meat can, which should contain the grease +from fried bacon or a spoonful of butter or fat, and place over +medium hot coals sufficient to bake, so that in from 5 to 7 minutes +the flapjack may be turned by a quick toss of the pan. Fry from +5 to 7 minutes longer, or until by examination it is found to +be done. + +_Hoecake_.--Hoecake is made exactly the same as flapjacks +by substituting _corn_meal_ for _flour_. + +_Emergency_rations_.--Detailed instructions as to the manner +of preparing the emergency ration are found on the label of each +can. Remember that even a very limited amount of bacon or hard +bread, or both, consumed with the emergency ration makes it far +more palatable, and generally extends the period during which it +can be consumed with relish. For this reason it would be better +to husband the supply of hard bread and bacon for use with the +emergency ration when it becomes evident that the latter must +be consumed rather than to retain the emergency ration to the +last extremity and force its exclusive use for a longer period +than two or three days. + + +SECTION 3. THE FORAGE RATION. + +"_1077,_Army_Regulations_.--The forage ration for a horse +is 14 pounds of hay and 12 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and +3-1/3 pounds of straw (or hay) for bedding; for a Field Artillery +horse of the heavy-draft type, weighing 1,300 pounds or over, +17 pounds of hay and 14 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and +3-1/3 pounds of straw (or hay) for bedding; for a mule, 14 pounds +of hay and 9 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and 3-1/3 pounds +of straw (or hay) for bedding. To each animal 3 pounds of bran +may be issued in lieu of that quantity of grain. + +"The commanding officer may, in his discretion, vary the proportions +of the components of the ration (1 pound of grain, 1-1/2 pounds +of hay, and 2 pounds of straw being taken as equivalents), and +in the field may substitute other recognized articles of forage +obtained locally, the variation or the substitution not to exceed +the money value of the components of the ration at the contract +rates in effect at the time of change. + +"_1078,_Army_Regulations_.--Where grazing is practicable, or +when little work is required of the animals, commanding officers +will reduce the forage ration. When, on the other hand, conditions +demand it, they are authorized to increase the ration, not in +excess, however, of savings made." + +In the field the authorized allowances must often be reduced +and supplemented by grazing and other kinds of food, such as +green forage, beans, peas, rice, palay, wheat, and rye. Wheat +and rye should be crushed and fed sparingly (about one-fourth +of the allowance). For unshelled corn, add about one-quarter +weight. + +On the march the grain ration is the only forage carried. It +consists of 12 pounds of grain for each horse and 9 pounds of +grain for each mule. Recourse must be had to grazing if it is +not possible to procure long forage in the country traversed. + +In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equipment +the following forage: + +(a) For each draft animal: On each vehicle a _reserve_ of +one day's grain ration for its draft animals. + +(b) On animals and vehicles: A portion of their grain ration issued +the night before, for a noonday feed. + +(c) In the ration section of the field train, for each animal, +two day's grain rations. + +(d) In supply train of an Infantry division two days' grain rations, +and of a Cavalry division one days' grain ration. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +PERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET. + + +PERSONAL HYGIENE. + +History shows that in almost every war many more men die of disease +than from wounds received in battle. Much of this disease is +preventable and is due either to the ignorance or carelessness +of the person who has the disease or of other persons about him. +It is a terrible truth that one man who violates any of the great +rules of health may be the means of killing many more of his +comrades than are killed by the bullets of the enemy. + +It is therefore most important that every soldier should learn +how to take care of his health when in the field and that he +should also insist that his comrades do not violate any of the +rules prescribed for this purpose. + +A great many diseases are due to germs, which are either little +animals or little plants so very small that they can only be +seen by aid of the microscope. All diseases caused by germs are +"catching." All other diseases are not "catching." + +There are only five ways of catching disease: + +(a) Getting certain germs on the body by touching some one or +something which has them on it. Thus, one may catch venereal +diseases, smallpox, measles, scarlet fever, chicken pox, mumps, +bolls, body lice, ringworm, barber's itch, dhopie itch, and some +other diseases. Wounds are infected in this manner. + +(b) Breathing in certain germs which float in the air. In this +way one may catch pneumonia, consumption, influenza, diphtheria, +whooping cough, tonsilitis, spinal meningitis, measles, and certain +other diseases. + +(c) Taking certain germs in through the mouth in eating or drinking. +Dysentery, cholera, typhoid fever, diarrhea, and intestinal worms +may be caught in this manner, + +(d) Having certain germs injected into the body by the bites +of insects, such as mosquitoes, fleas, and bedbugs. Malaria, +yellow fever, dengue fever, and bubonic plague may be caught in +this way. + +(e) Inheriting the germ from one's parents. + +Persons may have these germs sometimes without apparently being +sick with any disease. Such persons and persons who are sick +with the diseases are a great source of danger to others about +them. Germs which multiply in such persons are found in their +urine and excretions from the bowels; in discharges from ulcers +and abscesses; in the spit or particles coughed or sneezed into +the air; in the perspiration or scales from the skin; and in +the blood sucked up by biting insects. + +Those who have taken care of their health and who have not become +weakened by bad habits, exposure, and fatigue are not only less +liable to catch disease, but are more apt to recover when taken +sick. + +Knowing all these things, the soldier can understand the reasons +for the following rules and how important it is that they should +be carried out by each and every person: + +Stay away from persons having "catching" diseases. + +It you have any disease, don't try to cure it yourself, but go +to the surgeon. Insist that other soldiers do likewise. + +Typhoid fever is one of the most dangerous and common camp diseases. +Modern medicine has, however, discovered an effective preventative +for this disease in the typhoid prophylactic, which renders the +person immune from typhoid fever. The treatment consists in injecting +into the arm a preventative serum. The injection is given three +times at 10-day intervals. + +Association with lewd women is dangerous. It may result in disabling +you for life. It is the cause of a disease (syphilis) which may be +transmitted by a parent to his children. Soldiers with venereal +diseases should not use basins or toilet articles used by others, +as the germs of these diseases if gotten into the eye very often +cause blindness. Likewise, if they use the same drinking cup used +by others they may give others the disease. They should promptly +report their trouble to the surgeon, that they may receive the +best medical advice and attention. + +Should a soldier expose himself to infection by having intercourse +with an unknown woman, he should report as soon as possible +afterwards to the regimental infirmary for prophylactic treatment, +which, if taken within a few hours after intercourse, will prevent +to a large degree the liability of contracting any disease. + +Cooked germs are dead and therefore harmless. Water, even when +clear, may be alive with deadly germs. Therefore, when the conditions +are such that the commanding officer orders all drinking water +to be boiled, be careful to live up to this order. + +Use the latrines and don't go elsewhere to relieve yourself. In +open latrines cover your deposit with dirt, as it breeds files +and may also be full of germs. + +Flies carry germs from one place to another. Therefore see that +your food and mess kit are protected from them. + +All slops find scraps of food scattered about camp soon produce +bad odors and draw flies. Therefore do your part toward keeping +the camp free from disease by carefully depositing such refuse +in the pits or cans used for this purpose. + +Urinate only in the latrines, or in the cans set out for this +purpose, never on the ground around camp, because it not only +causes bad smells but urine sometimes contains the germs of +"catching" diseases. + +Soapy water thrown on the ground soon produces bad odors. Therefore +in camps of several days' duration this water should be thrown +in covered pits or in cans used for this purpose. + +As certain mosquitoes can transmit malaria and yellow fever, +use your mosquito bar for this reason as well as for personal +comfort. + +Keep your mouth clean by brushing your teeth once or twice a day. +It helps to prevent the teeth from decaying. Decayed teeth cause +toothache. They also lead one to swallow food without properly +chewing it, and this leads to stomach troubles of various kinds. +Food left around and between the teeth is bad for the teeth and +forms good breeding places for germs. + +Keep the skin clean. Through the pores of the skin the body gets +rid of much waste and poisonous matter. Therefore remove this +and keep the pores open by bathing once every day, if possible. +If water is scarce, rub the body over with a wet towel. If no +water is at hand, take a dry rub. Wash carefully the armpits, +between the legs, and under the foreskin, as this will prevent +chafing. + +The skin protects the sensitive parts underneath from injury +and helps to keep out germs. Therefore when blisters are formed +don't tear off the skin. Insert a needle under the skin a little +distance back from the blister and push it through to the opposite +side. Press out the liquid through the holes thus formed. Heat +the needle red hot first, with a match or candle, to kill the +germs. + +When the skin is broken (in cuts and wounds) keep the opening +covered with a bandage to keep out germs and dirt; otherwise +the sore may fester. Pus is always caused by germs. + +Keep your hair short. Long hair and a long beard in the field +generally means a dirty head and a dirty face and favors skin +diseases, lice, and dandruff. + +Don't let any part of the body become chilled, as this very often +is the direct cause of diarrhea, dysentery, pneumonia, rheumatism, +and other diseases. + +Wet clothes may be worn while marching or exercising without bad +results; but there is great danger if one rests in wet clothing, +as the body may become chilled. + +Don't sit or lie or sleep directly on damp ground, as this is +sure to chill the body. + +When hot or perspiring or when wearing damp clothes, don't remain +where a breeze can strike you. You are sure to become chilled. + +Every day, if possible, hang your blanket and clothing out to +air in the sun; shake or beat them with a small stick. Germs +and vermin don't like this treatment, but damp, musty clothing +suits them very well. Wash your shirts, underwear, and socks +frequently. The danger of blood poisoning from a wound is greatly +increased if the bullet passes through dirty clothes. + +Ditch your tent as soon as you can, particularly a shelter tent, +even if you camp for one night only. Otherwise a little rain +may ruin a whole night's rest. + +Always prepare your bed before dark. Level off the ground and +scrape out a little hollow for your hips. Get some straw or dry +grass if possible. Green grass or branches from trees are better +than nothing. Sleep on your poncho. This keeps the dampness from +coming up from the ground and chilling the body. Every minute +spent in making a good bed means about an hour's good rest later +on. + +Avoid the food and drink found for sale in the cheap stands about +camp. The quality is generally bad, and it is often prepared in +filthy places by very dirty persons. + +The use of intoxicating liquor is particularly dangerous in the +field. Its excessive use, even at long intervals, breaks down +one's system. Drinking men are more apt to get sick and less +liable to get well than are their more sober comrades. If alcohol +is taken at all, it is best after the work of the day is over. It +should never be taken when the body is exposed to severe cold, +as it diminishes the resistance of the body. Hot tea or coffee +is much preferable under these circumstances. + + +CARE OF THE FEET. + +A soldier can not march with sore feet, and marching is the main +part of an infantryman's daily duty in the field. All soldiers +should be familiar with the proper methods of caring for the +feet. Sore feet are generally due to carelessness, neglect, or +ignorance on the part of the soldier. + +The most important factor in the care of the feet and the marching +ability of the soldier is the shoe. Civilian shoes, particularly +light, patent leather, or low shoes, are sure to cause injury and +in time will ruin a man's foot. Only the marching shoe issued by +the Quartermaster Corps should be worn, and they must be properly +fitted to the individual. It will not suffice to order a marching +shoe of the same size as one's ordinary civilian shoes, for it +must be remembered that a soldier may have to march many miles +daily over rough roads and carrying a heavy pack. The pack itself +causes the foot to spread out to a larger size, and the rough +roads give so much exercise to the muscles of the feet that they +swell greatly through the increased blood supply. (For directions +as to measuring the foot for the marching shoe see General Order +No. 26, War Department, 1912, a copy of which should be on hand +in each company.) + +Do not start out on a march wearing new shoes. This is a frequent +cause of sore feet. New shoes should be properly broken in before +beginning a march by wearing them for several hours daily for a +week before the march, and they should be adapted to the contours +of the feet by stretching them with shoe stretchers with adjustable +knobs to take the pressure off painful corns and bunions. Such +stretchers are issued by the Quartermaster Corps, and there should +be one or more pair in every company of infantry. Should this +be impracticable, then the following is suggested: + +The soldier stands in his new shoes in about 2-1/2 inches of +water for about five minutes until the leather is thoroughly +pliable and moist; he should then walk for about an hour on a +level surface, letting the shoes dry on his feet, to the +irregularities of which the leather is thus molded in the same +way as it was previously molded over the shoe last. On taking +the shoes off a very little neat's-foot oil should be rubbed +into the leather to prevent its hardening and cracking. + +If it is desired to waterproof shoes at any time, a considerable +amount of neat's-foot oil should be rubbed into the leather. +Waterproof leather causes the feet of some men to perspire unduly +and keeps them constantly soft. + +Light woolen or heavy woolen socks will habitually be worn for +marching. Cotton socks will not be worn unless specifically ordered +by the surgeon. The socks will be large enough to permit free +movement of the toes, but not so loose as to permit of wrinkling. +Darned socks, or socks with holes in them, will not be worn in +marching. + +Until the feet have hardened they should be dusted with foot +powder, which can be obtained at the regimental infirmary, before +each day's march. Clean socks should be worn daily. + +As soon as possible after reaching camp after a day of marching +the feet should be washed with soap and water, and the soldier +should put on a dry pair of socks and his extra pair of shoes +from his surplus kit. If the skin is tender, or the feet perspire, +wash with warm salt water or alum water, but do not soak the feet +a long time, as this, although very comforting at the time, tends +to keep them soft. Should blister's appear on the feet, prick +and evacuate them by pricking at the lower edge with a pin which +has been passed through the flame of a match and cover them with +zinc oxide plaster applied hot. This plaster can be obtained +on request at the regimental infirmary. If serious abrasions +appear on the feet, or corns, bunions, and ingrowing nails cause +trouble, have your name placed on sick report and apply to the +surgeon for treatment. Cut the toe nails square (fairly close +in the middle, but leaving the sides somewhat longer), as this +prevents ingrowing nails. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. + +UNITED STATES ARMY, 1911. + +[Corrected to April 15, 1917.] + + +SECTION 1. DEFINITIONS. + +ALIGNMENT: A straight line upon which several elements are formed, +or are to be formed; or the dressing of several elements upon +a straight line. + +BASE: The element on which a movement is regulated. + +BATTLE SIGHT: The position of the rear sight when the leaf is +laid down. + +CENTER: The middle point or element of a command. + +COLUMN: A formation in which the elements are placed one behind +another. + +DEPLOY: To extend the front. In general to change from column +to line, or from close order to extended order. + +DEPTH: The space from head to rear of any formation, including +the leading and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed +to be 12 inches. + +DISTANCE: Space between elements in the direction of depth. Distance +is measured from the bark of the man in front to the breast of +the man in rear. The distance between ranks is 40 inches in both +line and column. + +ELEMENT: A file, squad, platoon, company, or larger body, forming +part of a still larger body. + +FILE: Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of +the rear rank. The front-rank man is the FILE LEADER. A file +which has no rear-rank man is a BLANK file. The term FILE applies +also to a single man in a single-rank formation. + +FILE CLOSERS: Such officers and noncommissioned officers of a +company as are posted in rear of the line. For convenience, all +men posted in the line of file closers. + +FLANK: The right or left of a command in line or in column: also +the element on the right or left of the line. + +FORMATION: Arrangement of the elements of a command. The placing +of all fractions in their order in line, in column, or for battle. + +FRONT: The space, in width, occupied by an element, either in +line or in column. The front of a man is assumed to be 22 inches. +Front also denotes the direction of the enemy. + +GUIDE: An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon whom +the command or elements thereof regulates its march. + +HEAD: The leading element of a column. + +INTERVAL: Space between elements of the same line. The interval +between men in ranks is 4 inches, and is measured from elbow to +elbow. Between companies, squads, etc., it is measured from the +left elbow of the left man or guide of the group on the right +to the right elbow of the right man or guide of the group on +the left. + +LEFT: The left extremity or element of a body of troops. + +LINE: A formation in which the different elements are abreast +of each other. + +ORDER, CLOSE: The formation in which the units, in double rank, +are arranged in line or in column with normal intervals and +distances. + +ORDER, EXTENDED: The formation in which the units are separated +by intervals greater than in close order. + +PACE: Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time. + +POINT OF REST: The point at which a formation begins. Specifically, +the point toward which units are aligned in successive movements. + +RANK: A line of men placed side by side. + +RIGHT: The right extremity or element of a body of troops. + + +PART I.--DRILL. + + +SECTION 2.--INTRODUCTION. + +1.[4] Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military +training; success may be looked for only when the training is +intelligent and thorough. + +[Footnote 4: The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Infantry Drill +Regulations, 1911.] + +2. Commanding officers are accountable for the proper training +of their respective organizations within the limits prescribed +by regulations and orders. + +The excellence of an organization is judged by its field efficiency. +The field efficiency of an organization depends primarily upon +its effectiveness as a whole. Thoroughness and uniformity in +the training of the units of an organization are indispensable +to the efficiency of the whole; it is by such means alone that +the requisite teamwork may be developed. + +3. Simple movements and elastic formations are essential to correct +training for battle. + +4. The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide +the principles for training and for increasing the probability +of success in battle. + +In the interpretation of the regulations, the spirit must be +sought. Quibbling over the minutiæ of form is indicative of failure +to grasp the spirit. + +5. The principles of combat are considered in Part II of these +regulations. They are treated in the various schools included in +Part I only to the extent necessary to indicate the functions of +the various commanders and the division of responsibility between +them. The amplification necessary to a proper understanding of +their application is to be sought in Part II. + +6. The following important distinctions must be observed: + +(a) Drills executed AT ATTENTION and the ceremonies are DISCIPLINARY +EXERCISES designed to teach precise and soldierly movement, and +to inculcate that prompt and subconscious obedience which is +essential to proper military control. To this end smartness and +precision should be exacted in the execution of every detail. +Such drills should be frequent, but short. + +(b) The purpose of EXTENDED ORDER DRILL is to teach the mechanism +of deployment, of the firings, and, in general, of the employment +of troops in combat. Such drills are in the nature of disciplinary +exercises and should be frequent, thorough, and exact in order +to habituate men to the firm control of their leaders. Extended +order drill is executed at ease. The company is the largest unit +which executes extended order drill. + +(c) FIELD EXERCISES are for instruction in the duties incident to +campaign. Assumed situations are employed. Each exercise should +conclude with a discussion, on the ground, of the exercise and +principles involved. + +(d) The COMBAT EXERCISE, a form of field exercise of the company, +battalion, and larger units, consists of the APPLICATION OF TACTICAL +PRINCIPLES to assumed situations, employing in the execution +the appropriate formations and movements of close and extended +order. + +Combat exercises must simulate, as far as possible, the battle +conditions assumed. In order to familiarize both officers and men +with such conditions, companies and battalions will frequently +be consolidated to provide war-strength organizations. Officers +and noncommissioned officers not required to complete the full +quota of the units participating are assigned as observers or +umpires. + +The firing line can rarely be controlled by the voice alone; +thorough training to insure the proper use of prescribed signals +is necessary. + +The exercise should be followed by a brief drill at attention +in order to restore smartness and control. + +7. In field exercises the enemy is said to be IMAGINARY when +his position and force are merely assumed; OUTLINED when his +position and force are indicated by a few men; REPRESENTED when +a body of troop acts as such. + + +General Rules for Drills and Formations. + +8. When the PREPARATORY commands consists of more than one part +its elements are arranged as follows: + +(1) For movements to be executed successively by the subdivisions +or elements of an organization: (a) Description of the movement; +(b) how executed, or on what element executed. + +(2) For movements to be executed simultaneously by the subdivisions +of an organization: (a) The designation of the subdivisions; (b) +the movement to be executed. + +9. Movements that may be executed toward either flank are explained +as toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute the word +"left" for "right," and the reverse, to have the explanation of +the corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands +are given for the execution of the movements toward either flank. +The substitute word of the command is placed within parentheses. + +10. Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when +marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If at a halt, the command +for movements involving marching need not be prefaced by forward, +as 1. _Column_right_(left)_, 2. MARCH. + +11. Any movement not specially excepted may be executed in double +time. + +If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command double +time precedes the command of execution. + +12. In successive movements executed in double time the leading or +base unit marches in QUICK TIME when not otherwise prescribed; the +other units march in DOUBLE TIME to their places in the formation +ordered and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. +If marching in double time, the command DOUBLE TIME is omitted. +The leading or base unit marches in QUICK TIME; the other units +continue at DOUBLE TIME to their places in the formation ordered +and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. + +13. To hasten the execution of a movement begun in quick time, +the command: 1. _Double_time_, 2. MARCH, is given. The leading +or base unit continues to march in quick time, or remains at a +halt if already halted; the other units complete the execution +of the movement in double time and then conform to the gait of +the leading or base unit. + +14. To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the +correction of errors, the command: 1. _In_place_, 2. HALT, is +given. All halt and stand fast, without changing the position of +the pieces. To resume the movement the command: 1. _Resume_, +2. MARCH, is given. + +15. To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt to begin +anew a movement improperly begun, the command, AS YOU WERE, is +given, at which the movement ceases and the former position is +resumed. + +16. Unless otherwise announced, the guide of a company or subdivision +of a company in line is right; of a battalion in line or line of +subdivisions or of a deployed line, center; of a rank in column +of squads, toward the side of the guide of the company. + +To march with guide other than as prescribed above, or to change +the guide: Guide (right, left, or center). + +In successive formations into line, the guide is toward the point +of rest; in platoons or larger subdivisions it is so announced. + +The announcement of the guide, when given in connection with a +movement, follows the command of execution for that movement. +Exception: 1. _As_skirmishers,_guide_right_(left_or_center)_, +2. MARCH. + +17. The TURN ON THE FIXED PIVOT by subdivisions is used in all +formations from line into column and the reverse. + +The TURN ON THE MOVING PIVOT is used by subdivisions of a column +in executing changes of direction. + +18. Partial changes of direction may be executed: + +By interpolating in the preparatory command the word HALF, as +COLUMN HALF RIGHT (LEFT), or RIGHT (LEFT) HALF TURN. A change +of direction of 45° is executed. + +By the command: INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT). The guide, or guiding +element, moves in the indicated direction and the remainder of +the command conforms. This movement effects slight changes of +direction. + +19. The designations LINE OF PLATOON, LINE OF COMPANIES, LINE OF +BATTALIONS, etc., refer to the formations in which the platoons, +companies, battalions, etc., each in column of squads, are in +line. + +20. Full distance in column of subdivisions is such that in forming +line to the right or left the subdivisions will have their proper +intervals. + +In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is +charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear preserve +the trace, step, and distance. + +21. In close order, all details, detachments, and other bodies +of troops are habitually formed in double rank. + +To insure uniformity of interval between files when falling in, +and in alignments, each man places the palm of the left hand +upon the hip, fingers pointing downward. In the first case the +hand is dropped by the side when the next man on the left has +his interval; in the second case, at the command front. + +22. The posts of officers, noncommissioned officers, special +units (such as band or machine-gun company), etc., in the various +formations of the company, battalion, or regiment, are shown in +plates. + +In all changes from one formation to another involving a change +of post on the part of any of these, posts are promptly taken +by the most convenient route as soon as practicable after the +command of execution for the movement; officers and noncommissioned +officers who have prescribed duties in connection with the movement +ordered, take their new posts when such duties are completed. + +As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever +their presence is necessary. As file closers it is their duty +to rectify mistakes and insure steadiness and promptness in the +ranks. + +23. Except at ceremonies, the special units have no fixed places. +They take places as directed; in the absence of directions, they +conform as nearly as practicable to the plates, and in subsequent +movements maintain their relative positions with respect to the +flank or end of the command on which they were originally posted. + +24. General, field, and staff officers are habitually mounted. +The staff of an officer forms in single rank 3 paces in rear of +him, the right or the rank extending 1 pace to the right of a point +directly in rear of him. Members of the staff are arranged in order +from right to left as follows: General staff officers, adjutant, +aids, other staff officers, arranged in each classification in +order of rank, the senior on the right. The flag of the general +officer and the orderlies are 3 paces in rear of the staff, the +flag on the right. When necessary to reduce the front of the +staff and orderlies, each line executes twos right or fours right, +as explained in the Cavalry Drill Regulations, and follows the +commander. + +When not otherwise prescribed, staff officers draw and return +saber with their chief. + +25. In making the about, an officer, mounted, habitually turns +to the left. + +When the commander faces to give commands, the staff, flag, and +orderlies do not change position. + +26. When making or receiving official reports, or on meeting out +of doors all officers will salute. + +Military courtesy requires the junior to salute first, but when +the salute is introductory to a report made at a military ceremony +or formation, to the representative of a common superior (as, +for example, to the adjutant, officer of the day, etc.), the +officer making the report, whatever his rank, will salute first. +The officer to whom the report is made will acknowledge by saluting +that he has received and understood the report. + +27. For ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of a regiment or +smaller unit, except those belonging to the machine-gun +organizations, are consolidated into a detachment. The senior +present commands if no officer is in charge. The detachment is +formed as a platoon or squad of Cavalry in line or column of +fours. Noncommissioned staff officers are on the right or in the +leading ranks. + +28. For ceremonies, such of the noncommissioned staff officers +as are dismounted are formed 5 paces in rear of the color in +order of rank from right to left. In column of squads they march +as file closers. + +29. Other than for ceremonies, noncommissioned stare officers +and orderlies accompany their immediate chiefs unless otherwise +directed. If mounted, the noncommissioned staff officers are +ordinarily posted on the right or at the head of the orderlies. + +30. In all formations and movements a noncommissioned officer +commanding a platoon or company carries his piece as the men +do, if he is so armed, and takes the same post as an officer in +like situation. When the command is formed in line for ceremonies +a noncommissioned officer commanding a company takes post on the +right of the right guide after the company has been aligned. + + +SECTION 3. ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS. + +31. COMMANDS only are employed in drill at attention. Otherwise +either a COMMAND, SIGNAL, or ORDER is employed, as best suits +the occasion, or one may he used in conjunction with another. + +32. Signals should be freely used in instruction, in order that +officers and men may readily know them. In making firm signals +the saber, rifle, or headdress may be held in the hand. + +33. Officers and men fix their attention at the first word of +command, the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first +motion of the signal. A signal includes both the preparatory +command and the command of execution: the movement commences as +soon as the signal is understood, unless otherwise prescribed. + +34. Except in movements executed AT ATTENTION, commanders or +leaders of subdivisions repeat orders, commands, or signals whenever +such repetition is deemed necessary to insure prompt and correct +execution. + +Officers, battalion noncommissioned staff officers, platoon leaders, +guides, and musicians are equipped with whistles. + +The major and his staff will use a whistle of distinctive tone; +the captain and company musicians a second and distinctive whistle; +the platoon leaders and guides a third distinctive whistle. + +35. Prescribed signals are limited to such as are essential as +a substitute for the voice under conditions which render the +voice inadequate. + +Before or during an engagement special signals may be agreed +upon to facilitate the solution of such special difficulties +as the particular situation is likely to develop, but it must +be remembered that simplicity and certainty are indispensable +qualities of a signal. + + +ORDERS. + +36. In these regulations an ORDER embraces instructions or directions +given orally or in writing in terms suited to the particular +occasion and not prescribed herein. + +ORDERS are employed only when the COMMANDS prescribed herein do +not sufficiently indicate the will of the commander. + +ORDERS are more fully described in paragraphs 378 to 383, inclusive. + + +COMMANDS. + +37. In these regulations a command is the will of the commander +expressed in the phraseology prescribed herein. + +38. There are two kinds of commands: + +The PREPARATORY command, such as _forward_, indicates the +movement that is to be executed. + +The command of EXECUTION, such as MARCH, HALT, or ARMS, causes +the execution. + +Preparatory commands are distinguished by _italics_, those +of execution by CAPITALS. + +Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the commands +prescribed, they are to be given by the commander of the unit +concerned. + +The PREPARATORY command should be given at such an interval of +time before the command of EXECUTION as to admit of being properly +understood; the command of EXECUTION should be given at the instant +the movement is to commence. + +The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness +proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended. + +Each PREPARATORY command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising +inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of +EXECUTION may he more energetic. + +The command of EXECUTION is firm in tone and brief. + +39. Majors and commanders of units larger than a battalion repeat +such commands of their superiors as are to be executed by their +units, facing their units for that purpose. The battalion is the +largest unit that executes a movement at the command of execution +of its commander. + +40. When giving commands to troops it is usually best to face +toward them. + +Indifference in giving commands must be avoided, as it leads +to laxity in execution. Commands should be given with spirit at +all times. + + +BUGLE SIGNALS. + +41. The authorized bugle signals are published in Part V of these +regulations. + +The following bugle signals may be used off the battle field, +when not likely to convey information to the enemy: + +ATTENTION: Troops are brought to attention. + +ATTENTION TO ORDERS: Troops fix their attention. + +FORWARD, MARCH: Used also to execute quick time from double time. + +DOUBLE TIME, MARCH. + +TO THE REAR, MARCH: In close order, execute SQUADS RIGHT ABOUT. + +HALT. + +ASSEMBLE, MARCH. + +The following bugle signals may be used on the battlefield: + +FIX BAYONETS. + +CHARGE. + +ASSEMBLE, MARCH. + +These signals are used only when intended for the entire firing +line; hence they can be authorized only by the commander of a unit +(for example, a regiment or brigade) which occupies a distinct +section of the battle field. Exception: FIX BAYONET. (see par. +318.) + +The following bugle signals are used in exceptional cases on +the battle field. Their principal uses are in field exercises +and practice firing. + +COMMENCE FIRING: Officers charged with fire direction and control +open fire as soon as practicable. When given to a firing line, +the signal is equivalent to fire at will. + +CEASE FIRING: All parts of the line execute CEASE FIRING at once. +These signals are not used by units smaller than a regiment, except +when such unit is independent or detached from its regiment. + + +WHISTLE SIGNALS. + +42. ATTENTION TO ORDERS. A SHORT BLAST of the whistle. This signal +is used on the march or in combat when necessary to fix the attention +of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, preparatory to +giving commands, orders, or signals. + +When the firing line is firing, each squad leader suspends firing +and fixes his attention at a SHORT BLAST of his platoon leader's +whistle. The platoon leader's subsequent commands or signals are +repeated and enforced by the squad leader. If a squad leader's +attention is attracted by a whistle other than that of his platoon +leader, or if there are no orders or commands to convey to his +squad, he resumes firing at once. + +SUSPEND FIRING. A LONG BLAST of the whistle. + +All other whistle signals are prohibited. + + +ARM SIGNALS. + +43. The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals +either arm may be used. Officers who receive signals, on the +firing line "repeat back" at once to prevent misunderstanding. + +FORWARD, MARCH. Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten and +hold the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of march. + +This signal is also used to execute quick time from double time. + +HALT. Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and +hold the arm vertically. + +DOUBLE TIME, MARCH. Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust +the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times. + +SQUADS RIGHT, MARCH. Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; +carry it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several +times between the vertical and horizontal positions. + +SQUADS LEFT, MARCH. Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; +carry it downward to the side and swing it several times between +the downward and horizontal positions. + +SQUADS RIGHT ABOUT, MARCH (if in close order) or, TO THE REAR, +MARCH (if in skirmish line). Extend the arm vertically above +the head; carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it +several times between the vertical and downward positions. + +CHANGE DIRECTION OR COLUMN RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH. The hand on the +side toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried +across the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; +then swing in a horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the +new direction. + +AS SKIRMISHERS, MARCH. Raise both arms laterally until horizontal. + +AS SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE CENTER, MARCH. Raise both arms laterally +until horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical +and return to the horizontal; repeat several times. + +AS SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH. Raise both arms laterally +until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily +in the horizontal position; swing the other upward until vertical +and return it to the horizontal; repeat several times. + +ASSEMBLE, MARCH. Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and +describe horizontal circles. + +RANGE, or CHANGE ELEVATION. To announce RANGE, extend the arm +toward the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist +closed; by keeping fist closed battle sight is indicated; by +opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number +equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 yards describe a short +horizontal line with forefinger. To CHANGE ELEVATION, indicate +the amount of increase or decrease by fingers as above; point +upward to indicate increase and downward to indicate decrease. + +WHAT RANGE ARE YOU USING? or WHAT IS THE RANGE? Extend the arms +toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, +resting on the other hand, fist closed. + +ARE YOU READY? or I AM READY. Raise the hand, fingers extended +and joined, palm toward the person addressed. + +COMMENCE FIRING. Move the arm extended in full length, hand palm +down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the +body. + +FIRE FASTER. Execute rapidly the signal "Commence firing." + +FIRE SLOWER. Execute slowly the signal "Commence firing." + +TO SWING THE CONE OF FIRE TO THE RIGHT, OR LEFT. Extend the arm +in full length to the front, palm to the right (left); swing +the arm to right (left), and point in the direction of the new +target. + +FIX BAYONET. Simulate the movement of the right hand in "Fix +bayonet" (par. 95).--(_C._I._D._R.,_No._14,_May_18,_1916._) + +SUSPEND FIRING. Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal +position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front. + +CEASE FIRING. Raise the forearm as in SUSPEND FIRING and swing +it up and down several times in front of the face. + +PLATOON. Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; +describe small circles with the hand. (See par. 44.) + +SQUAD. Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; +swing the hand up and down from the wrist. (See par. 44.) + +RUSH. Same as double time. + +44. The signals PLATOON and SQUAD are intended primarily for +communication between the captain and his platoon leaders. The +signal PLATOON or SQUAD indicates that the platoon commander +is to cause the signal which follows to be executed by platoon +or squad. + + +FLAG SIGNALS. + +45. The signal flags described below are carried by the company +musicians in the field. + +In a regiment in which it is impracticable to make the permanent +battalion division alphabetically, the flags of a battalion are +as shown; flags are assigned to the companies alphabetically, +within their respective battalions, in the order given below. + +First battalion: + Company A. Red field, white square. + Company B. Red field, blue square. + Company C. Red field, white diagonals. + Company D. Red field, blue diagonals. +Second battalion: + Company E. White field, red square. + Company F. White field, blue square. + Company G. White field, red diagonals. + Company H. White field, blue diagonals. +Third battalion: + Company I. Blue field, red square. + Company K. Blue field, white square. + Company L. Blue field, red diagonals. + Company M. Blue field, white diagonals. + +46. In addition to their use in visual signaling, these flags +serve to mark the assembly point of the company when disorganized +by combat, and to mark the location of the company in bivouac +and elsewhere, when such use is desirable. + +47. (1) For communication between the firing line and the reserve +or commander in the rear, the subjoined signals (Signal Corps +codes) are prescribed and should be memorized. In transmission, +their concealment from the enemy's view should be insured. In +the absence of signal flags, the headdress or other substitute +may be used. + +-------------+--------------------------+-------------------------- + Letter of |If signaled from the rear | If signaled from the + alphabet | to the firing line. | firing line to the rear. +-------------+--------------------------+-------------------------- +A M |Ammunition going forward. |Ammunition required. +C C C |Charge (mandatory at all |Am about to charge if + | times). | no instructions to the + | | contrary. +C F |Cease firing. |Cease firing. +D T |Double time or "rush". |Double time or "rush". +F |Commence firing. |Commence firing. +F B |Fix bayonets. |Fix bayonets. +F L |Artillery fire is causing |Artillery fire is causing + | us losses. | us losses. +G |Move forward |Preparing to move forward. +H H H |Halt. |Halt. +K |Negative |Negative. +L T |Left. |Left. +O |What is the (R. N., |What is the (R. N., +(Ardois and | etc.?) Interrogatory. | etc.)? Interrogatory. + Semaphore | | + only.) | | +O | do | Do. +(All methods | | + but ardois &| | + semaphore.) | | +P |Affirmative |Affirmative. +R |Acknowledgment. |Acknowledgment. +R N |Range. |Range. +R T |Right. |Right. +S S S |Support going forward. |Support needed. +S U F |Suspend firing. |Suspend firing. +T |Target. |Target. +-------------+--------------------------+-------------------------- + +(2) THE TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE. + +(See illustrations in chapter XII.) + + +SECTION 4. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. + +48. The instructor explains briefly each movement, first executing +it himself if practicable. He requires the recruits to take the +proper positions unassisted and does not touch them for the purpose +of correcting them, except when they are unable to correct +themselves. He avoids keeping them too long at the same movement, +although each should be understood before passing to another. +He exacts by degrees the desired precision and uniformity. + +49. In order that all may advance as rapidly as their abilities +permit, the recruits are grouped according to proficiency as +instruction progresses. Those who lack aptitude and quickness +are separated from the others and placed under experienced drill +masters. + + +INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS. + +50. For preliminary instruction a number of recruits, usually +not exceeding three or four, are formed as a squad in single +rank. + + +POSITION OF THE SOLDIER, OR ATTENTION. + +51. Heels on the same line and as near each other us the conformation +of the man permits. + +Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45°. + +Knees straight, without stiffness. + +Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally +on hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling +equally. + +Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the +trousers. + +Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the +axis of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front. + +Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of +the feet. + + +THE RESTS. + +52. Being at a halt, the commands are: FALL OUT; REST; AT EASE; +and, 1. _Parade_, 2. REST. + +At the command FALL OUT, the men may leave the ranks, but are +required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their +former places, at attention, at the command FALL IN. + +At the command REST each man keeps one foot in place, but is not +required to preserve silence or immobility. + +At the command at ease each man keeps one foot in place and is +required to preserve silence but not immobility. + +53. 1. _Parade_, 2. REST. Carry the right foot 6 inches +straight to the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, +without constraint, in front of the center of the body, fingers +joined, left hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by the thumb and +forefinger of the right hand; preserve silence and steadiness +of position. + +54. To resume the attention: 1. _Squad_, 2. ATTENTION. + +The men take the position of the soldier. + + +EYES RIGHT OR LEFT. + +55. 1. _Eyes_, 2. RIGHT (LEFT), 3. FRONT. + +At the command right, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes +fixed on the line of eye of the men in, or supposed to be in, +the same rank. At the command front, turn the head and eyes to +the front. + + +FACINGS. + +56. To the flank: 1. _Right_(left)_, 2. FACE. Raise +slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right turning +on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of +the left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left +face is executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner. + +Right (left) half face is executed similarly, facing 45°. + +"To face in marching" and advance, turn on the ball of either foot +and step off with the other foot in the new line of direction; +to face in marching without gaining ground in the new direction, +turn on the ball of either foot and mark time. + +57. To the rear: 1. _About_, 2. FACE. + +Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot-length to the +rear and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing +the position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the +right on the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by +the side of the left. + + +SALUTE WITH THE HAND. + +58. 1. _Hand_, 2. SALUTE. + +Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches +the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the right eye, +thumb and fingers extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm +inclined at about 45°, hand and wrist straight; at the same time +look toward the person saluted. (TWO) Drop the arm smartly by +the side. + +For rules governing salutes, see "Honors and Salutes," paragraphs +758-765. + + +STEPS AND MARCHINGS. + +59. All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except right +step, begin with the left foot. + +60. The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, measured +from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps +per minute. + +The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence +is at the rate of 180 steps per minute. + +The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step +by calling ONE, TWO, THREE, FOUR, or LEFT, RIGHT, the instant +the left and right root, respectively, should be planted. + +61. All steps and marchings and movements involving march are +executed in QUICK TIME unless the squad be marching in DOUBLE +TIME, or DOUBLE TIME be added to the command: in the latter case +DOUBLE TIME is added to the preparatory command. Example: 1. +_Squad_right,_double_time_, 2. MARCH (School of the Squad). + + +QUICK TIME. + +62. Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. +_Forward_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command FORWARD, shift the weight of the body to the right +leg, left knee straight. + +At the command MARCH, move the left foot smartly straight forward +30 inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it +without shock; next, in like manner, advance the right foot and +plant it as above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally. + +63. Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march in double +time; 1. _Double_time_, 2. MARCH. + +If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body +to the right leg. At the command MARCH, raise the forearms, fingers +closed, to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up +an easy run with the step and cadence of double time, allowing +a natural swinging motion to the arms. + +If marching in quick time, at the command MARCH, given as either +foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then +step off in double time. + +64. To resume the quick time: 1. _Quick_time_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command MARCH, given as either foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick +time, dropping the hands by the sides. + + +TO MARK TIME. + +65. Being in march; 1. _Mark_time_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command MARCH, given as either foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and +continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 +inches and planting it on line with the other. + +Being at a halt, at the command MARCH, raise and plant the feet +as described above. + + +THE HALF STEP. + +66. 1. _Half_step_, 2. MARCH. + +Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time. + +67. FORWARD, HALF STEP, HALT, and MARK TIME may be executed one +from the other in quick or double time. + +To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. +_Forward_, 2. MARCH. + + +SIDE STEP. + +68. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. _Right_(left)_step_, +2. MARCH. + +Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring +the left foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence +of quick time. + +The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed +in double time. + +If at order arms, the side step is executed AT TRAIL without command. + + +BACK STEP. + +69. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. _Backward_, 2. MARCH. + +Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear. + +The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed +in double time. + +If at order arms, the back step is executed AT TRAIL without command. + + +TO HALT. + +70. To arrest the march in quick or double time: 1. _Squad_, +2. HALT. + +At the command HALT, given as either foot strikes the ground, +plant the other foot as in marching; raise and place the first +foot by the side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands +by the sides. + + +TO MARCH BY THE FLANK. + +71. Being in march: 1. _By_the_right_(left)_flank_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command MARCH, given as the right foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching +and step off in the new direction with the right foot. + + +TO MARCH TO THE REAR. + +72. Being in march: 1. _To_the_rear_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command MARCH, given as the right foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right about on the +balls of both feet and immediately step off with the left foot. + +If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking four +steps in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the +left foot. + + +CHANGE STEP. + +73. Being in march: 1. _Change_step_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of the right foot +near the heel of the left and step off with the left foot. + +The charge on the right foot is similarly executed, the command +MARCH being given as the left foot strikes the ground. + + +MANUAL OF ARMS. + +74. As soon as practicable the recruit is taught the use, +nomenclature (Pl. 1), and care of his rifle; when fair progress +has been made in the instruction without arms, he is taught the +manual of arms; instruction without arms and that with arms +alternate. + +75. The following rules govern the carrying of the piece: + +First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the +chamber or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When +so loaded, or supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried +locked; that is, with the safety lock turned to the "safe." + +At all other times it is carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled. + +Second. Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are immediately +inspected at the commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. ARMS; 3. +_Order_(Right_shoulder,_port)_, 4. ARMS. + +A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal. + +If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine, they are removed +and placed in the belt. + +Third. The cut-off is kept turned "off" except when cartridges +are actually used. + +Fourth. The bayonet is not fixed except in bayonet exercise, on +guard, or for combat. + +Fifth. Fall in is executed with the piece at the order arms. FALL +OUT, REST, and AT EASE are executed as without arms. On resuming +ATTENTION the position of order arms is taken. + +Sixth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the piece +is brought to the right shoulder at the command MARCH, the three +motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may +be executed at the trail by prefacing the preparatory command +with the words AT TRAIL; as, 1. _At_trail,_forward_, 2. +MARCH; the trail is taken at the command march. + +When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval +or distance, and assemblings are executed from the order, raise +the piece to the trail while in motion and resume the order on +halting. + +Seventh. The piece is brought to the order on halting. The execution +of the order begins when the halt is completed. + +Eighth. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without +arms. + +76. The following rules govern the execution of the manual of +arms: + +First. In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center +of gravity, bayonet unfixed) the thumb clasps the piece; the +sling is included in the grasp of the hand. + +Second. In all positions of the piece "diagonally across the +body" the position of the piece, left arm and hand are the same +as in port arms. + +Third. In resuming the order from any position in the manual, +the motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the piece +about 3 inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left hand +above and near the right, steadying the piece, fingers extended +and joined, forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, +all fingers of the right hand grasping the piece. To complete +the order, lower the piece gently to the ground with the right +hand, drop the left quickly by the side, and take the position +of order arms. + +Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand to the ground, +or other similar abuse of the rifle to produce effect in executing +the manual, is prohibited. + +Fourth. The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the +recruits are first required to give their whole attention to the +details of the motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as +they become accustomed to handling their pieces. The instructor +may require them to count aloud in cadence with the motions. + +Fifth. The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are, for +the purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed +in detail; in this case the command of EXECUTION determines the +prompt execution of the first motion, and the commands, two, +three, four, that of the other motions. + +To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: +BY THE NUMBERS; all movements divided into motions are then executed +as above explained until he cautions: WITHOUT THE NUMBERS; or +commands movements other than those in the manual of arms. + +Sixth. Whenever circumstances require, the regular positions of +the manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard +to the previous position of the piece. + +Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may +be carried in any manner directed. + +77. POSITION OF ORDER ARMS STANDING: The butt rests evenly on +the ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with +toe of, and touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging +naturally, right hand holding the piece between the thumb and +fingers. + +78. Being at order arms: 1. _Present_, 2. ARMS. + +With the right hand carry the piece in front of the center of +the body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the +left hand at the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against +the body. (TWO) Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand. + +79. Being at order arms: 1. _Port_, 2. ARMS. + +With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across +the body. grasp it smartly with both hands; the right palm down, +at the small of the stock; the left palm up, at the balance; +barrel up, sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction +of the neck with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; +left forearm resting against the body; the piece in a vertical +plane parallel to the front. + +80. Being at present arms: 1. _Port_, 2. ARMS. + +Carry the piece diagonally across the body and take the position +of port arms. + +81. Being at port arms: 1. _Present_, 2. ARMS. + +Carry the piece to a vertical position in front of the center +of the body and take the position of present arms. + +82. Being at present or port arms: 1. _Order_, 2. ARMS. + +Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the piece to the +right with the left hand; regrasp it with the right hand just +above the lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the +next to the last position in coming to the order, (TWO) Complete +the order. + +83. Being at order arms: 1. _Right_shoulder_, 2. ARMS. + +With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across +the body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, +the heel between the first two fingers. (TWO) Without changing the +grasp of the right hand, place the piece on the right shoulder, +barrel up and inclined at an angle of about 45º from the horizontal, +trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near +the side, the piece in a vertical plane perpendicular to the +front; carry the left hand, thumb and fingers extended and joined, +to the small of the stock, tip of the forefinger touching the +cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow down. (THREE) Drop the +left hand by the side. + +84. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Order_, 2. ARMS. + +Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across +the body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (TWO), +(THREE) Execute order arms us described from port arms. + +85. Being at port arms: 1. _Right_shoulder_, 2. ARMS. + +Change the right hand to the butt. (TWO), (THREE) As in right +shoulder arms from order arms. + +86. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Port_, 2. ARMS. + +Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across +the body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (TWO) +Change the right hand to the small of the stock. + +87. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Present_, 2. ARMS. + +Execute port arms. (THREE) Execute present arms. + +88. Being at present arms: 1. _Right_shoulder_, 2. ARMS. + +Execute port arms. (TWO), (THREE), (FOUR) Execute right shoulder +arms as from port arms. + +89. Being at port arms: 1. _Left_shoulder_, 2. ARMS. + +Carry the piece with the right hand and place it on the left +shoulder, barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; +at the same time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between +first and second fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. +(TWO) Drop the right hand by the side. + +Being at left shoulder arms: 1. _Port_, 2. ARMS. + +Grasp the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock. +(TWO) Carry the piece to the right with the right hand, regrasp +it with the left, and take the position of port arms. + +LEFT SHOULDER ARMS may be ordered directly from the order, right +shoulder or present, or the reverse. At the command ARMS execute +PORT ARMS and continue in cadence to the position ordered. + +90. Being at order arms: 1. _Parade_, 2. REST. + +Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee +slightly bent; carry the muzzle in front of the center of the +body, barrel to the left; grasp the piece with the left hand +just below the stacking swivel, and with the right hand below +and against the left. + +Being at parade rest: 1. _Squad_, 2. ATTENTION. + +Resume the order, the left hand quitting the piece opposite the +right hip. + +91. Being at order arms: 1. _Trail_, 2. ARMS. + +Raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle +forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30º with the +vertical. + +When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, +the piece may be grasped at the balance and the muzzle lowered +until the piece is horizontal; a similar position in the left +hand may be used. + +92. Being at trail arms: 1. _Order_, 2. ARMS. + +Lower the piece with the right hand and resume the order. + + +RIFLE SALUTE. + +93. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Rifle_, 2. SALUTE. + +Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm +horizontal, palm of hand down, thumb and fingers extended and +joined, forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward +the person saluted. (TWO) Drop left hand by the side; turn head +and eves to the front. + +94. Being at order or trail arms: 1. _Rifle_, 2. SALUTE. + +Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand +down, thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against +piece near the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (TWO) +Drop the left hand by the side; turn the head and eyes to the +front. + +For rules governing salutes, see "Honors and Salutes." + + +THE BAYONET. + +95. Being at order arms: 1. _Fix_, 2. BAYONET. + +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade +rest; grasp the bayonet with the right hand, back of hand toward +the body; draw the bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the +barrel, glancing at the muzzle; resume the order. + +If the bayonet is carried on the haversack: Draw the bayonet with +the left hand and fix it in the most convenient manner. + +96. Being at order arms: 1. _Unfix_, 2. BAYONET. + +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade +rest; grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, +pressing the spring with the forefinger of the right hand; raise +the bayonet until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle +of the piece; drop the point to the left, back of the hand toward +the body, and, glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the +blade passing between the left arm and the body; regrasp the +piece with the right hand and resume the order. + +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the +bayonet from the rifle with the left hand find return it to the +scabbard in the most convenient manner. + +If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in +the most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned +to the original position. + +Fix and unfix bayonet are executed, with promptness and regularity +but not in cadence. + +97. CHARGE BAYONET. Whether executed at halt or in motion, the +bayonet is held toward the opponent as in the position of guard +in the Manual for Bayonet Exercise. + +Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are prescribed in +the Manual for Bayonet Exercise. + + +THE INSPECTION. + +98. Being at order firms: 1. _Inspection_, 2. ARMS. + +At the second command take the position of port arms. (TWO) Seize +the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, +turn the handle up, draw the bolt back, and glance at the chamber. +Having found the chamber empty, or haying emptied it, raise the +head and eyes to the front. + +99. Being at inspection arms: 1. _Order_(Right_shoulder,_port)_, +2. ARMS. + +At the preparatory command push the bolt forward, turn the handle +down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the command +arms, complete the movement ordered. + + +TO DISMISS THE SQUAD. + +100. Being at halt: 1. _Inspection_, 2. ARMS, 3. _Port_, +4. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED. + + +SECTION 5. SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD. + +101. Soldiers are grouped into squads for purposes of instruction, +discipline, control, and order. + +102. The squad proper consists of a corporal and seven privates. + +The movements in the School of the Squad are designed to make the +squad a fixed unit find to facilitate the control and movement +of the company. If the number of men grouped is more than 3 and +less than 12, they are formed as a squad of 4 files, the excess +above 8 being posted as file closers. If the number grouped is +greater than 11, 2 or more squads are formed and the group is +termed a platoon. + +For the instruction of recruits, these rules may be modified. + +103. The corporal is the squad leader, and when absent is replaced +by a designated private. If no private is designated, the senior +in length of service acts as leader. + +The corporal, when in ranks, is posted as the left man in the +front rank of the squad. + +When the corporal leaves the ranks to lead his squad, his rear +rank man steps into the front rank, and the file remains blank +until the corporal returns to his place in ranks, when his rear +rank man steps back into the rear rank. + +104. In battle officers and sergeants endeavor to preserve the +integrity of squads; they designate new leaders to replace those +disabled, organize new squads when necessary, and see that every +man is placed in a squad. + +Men are taught the necessity of remaining with the squad to which +they belong and, in case it be broken up or they become separated +therefrom, to attach themselves to the nearest squad and platoon +leaders, whether these be of their own or of another organization. + +105. The squad executes the HALT, REST, FACINGS, STEPS, and MARCHINGS +and the MANUAL OF ARMS as explained in the School of the Soldier. + + +TO FORM THE SQUAD. + +106. To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 paces in +front of where the center is to be and commands: FALL IN. + +The men assemble at attention, pieces at the order, and are arranged +by the corporal in double rank, as nearly as practicable in order +of height from right to left, each man dropping his left hand +as soon as the man on his left has his interval. The rear rank +forms with distance of 40 inches. + +The instructor then commands: COUNT OFF. + +At this command all except the right file execute EYES RIGHT, +and beginning on the right, the men in each rank count one, two, +three, four; each man turns his head and eyes to the front as +he counts. + +Pieces are then inspected. + + +ALIGNMENTS. + +107. To align the squad, the base file or files having been +established: 1. _Right_(Left)_, 2. DRESS, 3. FRONT. + +At the command DRESS all men place the left hand upon the hip +(whether dressing to the right or left); each man, except the +base file, when on or near the new line executes EYES RIGHT, +and, taking steps of 2 or 3 inches, places himself so that his +right arm rests lightly against the arm of the man on his right, +and so that his eyes and shoulders are in line with those of +the men on his right; the rear rank men cover in file. + +The instructor verifies the alignment of both ranks from the +right flank and orders up or back such men as may be in rear, +or in advance, of the line; only the men designated move. + +At the command front, given when the ranks are aligned, each +man turns his head and eyes to the front and drops his left hand +by his side. + +In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established on, +or parallel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in oblique +directions. + +Whenever the position of the base file or files necessitates a +considerable movement by the squad, such movement will be executed +by marching to the front or oblique, to the flank or backward, +as the case may be, without other command, and at the trail. + +108. To preserve the alignment when marching: GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT). + +The men preserve their intervals from the side of the guide, +yielding to pressure from that side and resisting pressure from the +opposite direction; they recover intervals, if lost, by gradually +opening out or closing in; they recover alignment by slightly +lengthening or shortening the step; the rear-rank men cover their +file leaders at 40 inches. + +In double rank, the front-rank man on the right, or designated +flank, conducts the march; when marching faced to the flank, +the lending man of the front rank is the guide. + + +TO TAKE INTERVALS AND DISTANCES. + +109. Being in line at a halt: 1. Take interval, 2. _To_the_right_ +_(left)_, 3. MARCH, 4. _Squad_, 5. HALT. + +At the second command the rear-rank men march backward 4 steps +and halt; at the command march all face to the right and the +leading man of each rank steps off; the other men step off in +succession, each following the preceding man at 4 paces, rear-rank +men marching abreast of their file leaders. + +At the command halt, given when all have their intervals, all +halt and face to the front. + +110. Being at intervals, to assemble the squad: 1. _Assemble,_ +_to_the_right_(left)_, 2. MARCH. + +The front-rank man on the right stands fast, the rear-rank man on +the right closes to 40 inches. The other men face to the right, +close by the shortest line, and face to the front. + +111. Being in line at a halt and having counted off: 1. _Take_ +_distance_, 2. MARCH, 3. _Squad_, 4. HALT. + +At the command march No. 1 of the front rank moves straight to +the front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front rank and Nos. 1, 2, +3, and 4 of the rear rank, in the order named, move straight +to the front, each stepping off so as to follow the preceding +man at 4 paces. The command HALT is given when all have their +distances. + +In case more than one squad is in line, each squad executes the +movement as above. The guide of each rank of numbers is right. + +112. Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. _Assemble_, +2. MARCH. + +No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward +to their proper places in line. + + +TO STACK AND TAKE ARMS. + +113. Being in line at a halt: STACK ARMS. + +Each even number of the front rank grasps his piece with the +left hand at the upper band and rests the butt between his feet, +barrel to the front, muzzle inclined slightly to the front and +opposite the center of the interval on his right, the thumb and +forefinger raising the stacking swivel; each even number of the +rear rank then passes his piece, barrel to the rear, to his file +leader, who grasps it between the bands with his right hand and +throws the butt about 2 feet in advance of that of his own piece +and opposite the right of the interval, the right hand-slipping +to the upper band, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking +swivel, which he engages with that of his own piece; each odd +number of the front rank raises his piece with the right hand, +carries it well forward, barrel to the front; the left hand, +guiding the stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the swivel +of his own piece with the free hook of that of the even number of +the rear rank; he then turns the barrel outward into the angle +formed by the other two pieces and lowers the butt to the ground, +to the right of and against the toe of his right shoe. + +The stacks made, the loose pieces are laid on them by the even, +numbers of the front rank. + +When each man has finished handling pieces, he takes the position +of the soldier. + +114. Being in line behind the stacks: TAKE ARMS. + +The loose pieces are returned by the even numbers of the front +rank; each even number of the front rank grasps his own piece +with the left hand, the piece of his rear-rank man with his right +hand, grasping both between the bands; each odd number of the +front rank grasps his piece in the same way with the right hand, +disengages it by raising the butt from the ground and then, turning +the piece to the right, detaches it from the stack; each even +number of the front rank disengages and detaches his piece by +turning it to the left, and then passes the piece of his rear-rank +man to him, and all resume the order. + +115. Should any squad have Nos. 2 and 3 blank files, No. 1 rear +rank takes the place of No. 2 rear rank in making and breaking +the stack; the stacks made or broken, he resumes his post. + +Pieces not used in making the stack are termed loose pieces. + +Pieces are never stacked with the bayonet fixed. + + +THE OBLIQUE MARCH. + +116. For the instruction of recruits, the squad being in column +or correctly aligned, the instructor causes the squad to face +half right or half left, points out to the men their relative +positions, and explains that these are to be maintained in the +oblique march. + +117. 1. _Right_(Left)_oblique_, 2. MARCH. + +Each man steps off in a direction 45° to the right of his original +front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders +parallel to those of the guide (the man on the right front of +the line or column), and so regulates his steps that the ranks +remain parallel to their original front. + +At the command halt the men halt faced to the front. + +To resume the original direction: 1. _Forward_, 2. MARCH. + +The men half face to the left in marching and then move straight +to the front. + +If at HALF STEP or MARK TIME while obliquing, the oblique march +is resumed by the commands: 1. _Oblique_, 2. MARCH. + + +TO TURN ON MOVING PIVOT. + +118. Being in line: 1. _Right_(Left)_turn_, 2. MARCH. + +The movement is executed by each rank successively and on the +same ground. At the second command, the pivot man of the front +rank faces to the right in marching and takes the half step; +the other men of the rank oblique to the right until opposite +their places in line, then execute a second right oblique and +take the half step on arriving abreast of the pivot man. All +glance toward the marching flank while at half step and take the +full step without command as the last man arrives on the line. + +RIGHT (LEFT) HALF TURN is executed in a similar manner. The pivot +man makes a half change of direction to the right and the other +men make quarter changes in obliquing. + + +TO TURN ON FIXED PIVOT. + +119. Being in line, to turn and march: 1. _Squad_right_(left)_, +2. MARCH. + +At the second command, the right flank man in the front rank faces +to the right in marching and marks time; the other front-rank +men oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, +and mark time. In the rear rank the third man from the right, +followed in column by the second and first, moves straight to the +front until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to the +right in marching and mark time; the other number of the rear rank +moves straight to the front four paces and places himself abreast +of the man on his right. Men on the new line glance toward the +marching flank while marking time and, as the last man arrives +on the line, both ranks execute FORWARD, MARCH, without command. + +120. Being in line, to turn and halt: 1. _Squad_right_(left)_, +2. MARCH, 3. _Squad_, 4. HALT. + +The third command is given immediately after the second. The +turn is executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except +that all men, on arriving on the new line, mark time until the +fourth command is given, when all halt. The fourth command should +be given as the last man arrives on the line. + +121. Being in line, to turn about and march: 1. _Squad_right_ +_(left)_about_, 2. MARCH. + +At the second command, the front rank twice executes SQUAD RIGHT, +initiating the SECOND SQUAD right when the man on the marching +flank has arrived abreast of the rank. In the rear rank the third +man from the right, followed by the second and first in column, +moves straight to the front until on the prolongation of the line +to be occupied by the rear rank; changes direction to the right; +moves in the new direction until in rear of his front-rank man, +when all face to the right in marching, mark time, and glance +toward the marching flank. The fourth man marches on the left +of the third to his new position; as he arrives on the line, +both ranks execute FORWARD, MARCH, without command. + +122. Being in line, to turn about and halt: 1. _Squad_right_ +_(left)_about_, 2. MARCH, 3. _Squad_, 4. HALT. + +The third command is given immediately after the second. The +turn is executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except +that all men, on arriving on the new line, mark time until the +fourth command is given, when all halt. The fourth command should +be given as the last man arrives on the line. + + +TO FOLLOW THE CORPORAL. + +123. Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad without +unnecessary commands, the corporal places himself in front of +it and commands FOLLOW ME. + +If in line or skirmish line. No. 2 of the front rank follows +in the trace of the corporal at about 3 paces; the other men +conform to the movements of No. 2. guiding on him and maintaining +their relative positions. + +If in column, the head of the column follows the corporal. + + +TO DEPLOY AS SKIRMISHERS. + +124. Being in any formation, assembled: 1. _As_skirmishers_, +2. MARCH. + +The corporal places himself in front of the squall, if not already +there. Moving at a run, the men place themselves abreast of the +corporal at half-pace intervals, Nos. 1 and 2 on his right, Nos. +3 and 4 on his left, rear-rank men on the right of their file +leaders, extra men on the left of No.4; all then conform to the +corporal's gait. + +When the squad is acting alone, skirmish line is similarly formed +on No. 2 of the front rank, who stands fast or continues the +march, as the case may be; the corporal places himself in front +of the squad when advancing find in rear when halted. + +When deployed us skirmishers, the men march at ease, pieces at +the trail unless otherwise ordered. + +The corporal is the guide when in the line; otherwise No. 2 front +rank is the guide. + +125. The normal interval between skirmishers is one-half pace, +resulting practically in one man per yard of front. The front +of a squad thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces. + + +TO INCREASE OR DIMINISH INTERVALS. + +126. If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater than the +normal interval; or if deployed, and it is desired to increase or +decrease the interval: 1. _As_skirmishers,_(so_many)_paces_, +2. MARCH. + +Intervals are taken at the indicated number of paces. If already +deployed, the men move by the flank toward or away from the guide. + + +THE ASSEMBLY. + +127. Being deployed: 1. _Assemble_, 2. MARCH. + +The men move toward the corporal and form in their proper places. + +If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in double time, +form, and follow him. + +The assembly while marching to the rear is not executed. + + +KNEELING AND LYING DOWN. + +128. If standing: KNEEL. + +Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the +left rear of the left heel; kneel on right knee, sitting as nearly +as possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; +piece remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping +it above the lower band. + +129. If standing or kneeling: LIE DOWN. + +Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry back the +left foot and lie flat on the belly, inclining body about 35° +to the right; piece horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground +and pointed to the front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the +balance, right hand grasping the small of the stock opposite +the neck. This is the position of order arms, lying down. + +130. If kneeling or lying down: RISE. + +If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked +by the left heel. + +If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand up, faced to the +front, on the ground marked by the knees. + +131. If lying down: KNEEL. + +Raise the body on both knees; take the position of kneel. + +132. In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lying down +are ordinarily used only for the better utilization of cover. + +When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position maybe taken in +lieu of the position kneeling. + + +LOADINGS AND FIRINGS. + +133. The commands for loading and firing are the same whether +standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed +at a halt. + +When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the rear rank does +not load, aim, or fire. + +The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading. + +Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only. + +134. Pieces having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without +command until the command UNLOAD, or INSPECTION ARMS, fresh clips +being inserted when the magazine is exhausted. + +135. The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This +may be done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both +are indicated before giving the command for firing, but may be +omitted when the target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in +such case battle sight is used if no sight setting is announced. + +136. The target or aiming point having been designated and the +sight setting announced, such designation or announcement need +not be repeated until a change of either or both is necessary. + +Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point +or target designated, and at the sight setting announced, until +a change is ordered. + +137. If the men are not already in the position of load, that +position is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if +the announcement is omitted, the position is taken at the first +command for firing. + +138. When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate +firing is discretionary with each man. + + +TO LOAD. + +139. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. _With_dummy_ +_(blank_or_ball)_cartridges_, 2. LOAD. + +At the command load each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half +right and carries the right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to +such position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness +of the body; raises, or lowers, the piece and drops it into the +left hand at the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, +muzzle at the height of the breast, and turns the cut-off up. With +the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back, takes a loaded +clip and inserts the end in the clip slots, places the thumb on +the powder space of the top cartridge, the fingers extending +around the piece and tips resting on the magazine floor plate; +forces the cartridges into the magazine by pressing down with +the thumb; without removing the clip, thrusts the bolt home, +turning down the handle; turns the safety lock to the "safe" +find carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each rear-rank +man moves to the right front, takes a similar position opposite +the interval to the right of his front-rank man, muzzle of the +piece extending beyond the front rank, and loads. + +A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as +nearly as practicable in the position of load. + +If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if +kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting, +the elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down, the left +hand steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe +of the butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground. + +For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying +down) are designated as that of load. + +140. For instruction in loading: 1. _Simulate_, 2. LOAD. + +Executed as above described, except that the cut-off remains "off" +and the handling of cartridges is simulated. + +The recruits are first taught to SIMULATE loading and firing; +after a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank +cartridges may be used. + +141. The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the +magazine "off." The magazine may be filled in whole or in part +while "off" or "on" by pressing cartridges singly down and back +until they are in the proper place. The use of the rifle as a +single loader is, however, to be regarded as exceptional. + + +TO UNLOAD. + +142. UNLOAD. + +Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt +alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected. +After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first +thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud +holding it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower +down and back to engage it under the bolt and then thrusting +the bolt home; the trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then +picked up, cleaned, and returned to the belt and the piece is +brought to the order. + + +TO SET THE SIGHT. + +143. RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, etc.), or BATTLE SIGHT. + +The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains +and verities sight settings, + + +TO FIRE BY VOLLEY. + +144. 1. READY, 2. AIM, 3. _Squad_, 4. FIRE. + +At the command READY turn the safety lock to the "ready"; at +the command AIM raise the piece with both hands and support the +butt firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb +clasping the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the +piece, right elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head +slightly forward and a little to the right, cheek against the +stock, left eye closed, right eye looking through the notch of +the rear sight so as to perceive the object aimed at, second +joint of forefinger resting lightly against the front of the +trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight is carefully +raised into, and held in, the line of sight. + +Each rear-rank man aims through the interval to the right of +his file leader and leans slightly forward to advance the muzzle +of his piece beyond the front rank. + +In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests on the left knee, point +of elbow in front of kneecap. + +In aiming sitting, the elbows are supported by the knees. + +In aiming lying down, raise the piece with both hands; rest on +both elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder. + +At the command FIRE press the finger against the trigger; fire +without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the +piece; lower the piece to the position of LOAD and load. + +145. To continue the firing: 1. AIM, 2. _Squad_, 3. FIRE. + +Each command is executed as previously explained. LOAD (from +magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the +bolt with the right hand, leaving the safety lock at the "ready." + + +TO FIRE AT WILL. + +146. FIRE AT WILL. + +Each man, independently of the others, comes to the READY, aims +carefully and deliberately ut the aiming point or target, FIRES, +LOADS, and continues the firing until ordered to SUSPEND or CEASE +FIRING. + +147. To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the +instructor shouts: FASTER (SLOWER). + +Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute +at effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting +the minimum of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate +aiming. To illustrate the necessity for deliberation, and to +habituate men to combat conditions, small and comparatively +indistinct targets are designated. + + +TO FIRE BY CLIP. + +148. CLIP FIRE. + +Executed in the same manner us FIRE AT WILL, except that each +man, after having exhausted the cartridges then in the piece, +SUSPENDS FIRING. + + +TO SUSPEND FIRING. + +149. The instructor blows a LONG BLAST of the whistle and repeats +same, if necessary, or commands: SUSPEND FIRING. + +Firing stops; pieces are held, loaded and locked, in a position of +readiness for instant resumption of firing, rear sights unchanged. +The men continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the +place at which the target disappeared, or at which it is expected +to reappear. + +This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to CEASE FIRING. + + +TO CEASE FIRING. + +150. CEASE FIRING. + +Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position +of load; those not loaded are loaded; sights are laid, pieces +are locked and brought to the older. + +CEASE FIRING is used for long pauses, to prepare for changes of +position, or to steady the men. + +151. Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at +any time after the preparatory command for firing whether the +firing has actually commenced or not. + + +THE USE OF COVER. + +152. The recruit should be given careful instruction in the +individual use of cover. + +It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of +natural cover, he must be able to fire easily and effectively +upon the enemy; if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily +and as rapidly as possible; he must conceal himself as much as +possible while firing and while advancing. While setting his +sight he should be under cover or lying prone. + +153. To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the same time +concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is practiced in +simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, and crouching +positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth or rocks, +from depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or windows. He is +taught to fire around the right side of his concealment whenever +possible, or, when this is not possible, to rise enough to fire +over the top of his concealment, + +When these details are understood, he is required to select cover +with reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind +it in proper position for firing. + +154. The evil of remaining too long in one place, however good +the concealment, should be explained. He should be taught to +advance from cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before +leaving his concealment. + +It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward +all enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing +from a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to +cover and throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced +in advancing from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the +left side, rifle grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself +forward with the right leg. + +155. He should be taught that, when fired on while acting +independently, he should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then +endeavor to locate his enemy. + +156. The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is continued +in the combat exercises of the company, but he must then be taught +that the proper advance of the platoon or company and the +effectiveness of its fire is of greater importance than the question +of cover for individuals. He should also be taught that he may +not move about or shift his position in the firing line except +the better to see the target. + + +OBSERVATION. + +157. The ability to use his eyes accurately is of great importance +to the soldier. The recruit should be trained in observing his +surrounding from positions and when on the march. + +He should be practiced in pointing out and naming military features +of the ground; in distinguishing between living beings; in counting +distant groups of objects or beings; in recognizing colors and +forms. + +158. In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, +they should be practiced in repeating to one another target and +aiming point designations and in quickly locating and pointing +out a designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, +from a prone position, distant objects, particularly troops, +both with the naked eye and with field glasses. Similarly, they +should be trained in estimating distances. + + +SECTION 6. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. + +159. The captain is responsible for the theoretical and practical +instruction of his officers and noncommissioned officers, not +only in the duties of their respective grades, but in those of +the next higher grades. + +160. The company in line is formed in double rank with the men +arranged, as far as practicable, according to height from right +to left, the tallest on the right. + +The original division into squads is effected by the command: +COUNT OFF. The squads, successively from the right, count off +as in the School of the Squad, corporals placing themselves as +Nos. 4 of the front rank. If the left squad contains less than +six men, it is either increased to that number by transfers from +other squads or is broken up and its members assigned to other +squads and posted in the line of file closers. These squad +organizations are maintained, by transfers if necessary, until +the company becomes so reduced in numbers us to necessitate a +new division into squads. No squad will contain less than six +men. + +161. The company is further divided into two, three, or four +platoons, each consisting of not less than two nor more than +four squads. In garrison or ceremonies the strength of platoons +may exceed four squads. + +162. At the formation of the company the platoons or squads are +numbered consecutively from right to left and these designations +do not change. + +For convenience in giving commands and for reference, the +designations, RIGHT, CENTER, LEFT, when in line, and LEADING, +CENTER, REAR, when in column, are applied to platoons or squads. +These designations apply to the actual right, left, center, head, +or rear, in whatever direction the company may be facing. The +CENTER squad is the middle or right middle squad of the company. + +The designation "So-and-so's" squad or platoon may also be used. + +163. Platoons are assigned to the lieutenants and noncommissioned +officers, in order of rank, as follows: 1. right; 2. left; 3. +center (right center); 4. left center. + +The noncommissioned officers next in rank are assigned as guides, +one to each platoon. If sergeants still remain, they are assigned +to platoons as additional guides. When the platoon is deployed, +its guide or guides accompany the platoon leader. + +During battle, these assignments are not changed; vacancies are +filled by noncommissioned officers of the platoon or by the nearest +available officers or noncommissioned officers arriving with +reenforcing troops. + +[Illustration] + +164. The first sergeant is never assigned as a guide. When not +commanding a platoon he is posted as a file closer opposite the +third file from the outer flank of the first platoon; and when +the company is deployed he accompanies the captain. + +The quartermaster sergeant, when present, is assigned according +to his rank as a sergeant. + +Enlisted men below the grade of sergeant, armed with the rifle, +are in ranks unless serving as guides; when not so armed, they +are posted in the line of file closers. + +Musicians, when required to play, are at the head of the column. +When the company is deployed, they accompany the captain. + +165. The company executes the HALT, RESTS, FACINGS, STEPS and +MARCHINGS, MANUAL OF ARMS, LOADINGS and FIRINGS, TAKES INTERVALS +and DISTANCES and ASSEMBLES, INCREASES and DIMINISHES INTERVALS, +resumes ATTENTION, OBLIQUES, resumes the direct march, preserves +alignments, KNEELS, LIES DOWN, RISES, STACKS, and TAKES ARMS, +as explained in the Schools of the Soldier and the Squad, +substituting in the commands COMPANY for SQUAD. + +The same rule applies to platoons, detachments, details, etc., +substituting their designation for SQUAD in the commands. In +the same manner these execute the movements prescribed for the +COMPANY, whenever possible, substituting their designation for +COMPANY in the commands. + +166. A company so depleted as to make division into platoons +impracticable is led by the captain as a single platoon, but +retains the designation of company. The lieutenants and first +sergeant assist in fire control; the other sergeants place themselves +in the filing line as skirmishers. + + +CLOSE ORDER. + +RULES. + +167. The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear, platoons, +are the right and left, or leading and rear, guides, respectively, +of the company when it is in line or in column of squads. Other +guides are in the line of file closers. + +In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the +head of the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the +guiding flank if in line. When a platoon has two guides their +original assignment to flanks of the platoon does not change. + +168. The guides of a column of squads place themselves on the +flank opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file +closers to the other flank, the captain commands: 1. _File_ +_closers_on_left_(right)_flank_; 2. MARCH. The file closers +dart through the column; the captain and guides change. + +In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward +the side of the guide. + +169. Men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings +or firings. + +Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the +manual of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when +they remain at the order. During ceremonies they execute all +movements. + +170. In TAKING INTERVALS AND DISTANCES, unless otherwise directed, +the right and left guides, at the first command, place themselves +in the line of file closers, and, with them, take a distance of +4 paces from the rear rank. In taking intervals, at the command +MARCH, the file closers face to the flank and each steps off with +the file nearest him. In ASSEMBLING the guides and file closers +resume their positions in line. + +171. In movements executed simultaneously by platoons (as PLATOONS +RIGHT or PLATOONS, COLUMN RIGHT), platoon leaders repeat the +preparatory command (PLATOON RIGHT, etc.), applicable to their +respective platoons. The command of execution is given by the +captain only. + + +TO FORM THE COMPANY. + +172. At the sounding of the assembly the first sergeant takes +position 6 paces in front of where the center of the company +is to be, faces it, draws saber, and commands: FALL IN. + +The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the +front, where the right of the company is to rest, and at such +point that the center of the company will be 6 paces from and +opposite the first sergeant; the squads form in their proper +places on the left of the right guide, superintended by the other +sergeants, who then take their posts. + +The first sergeant commands: REPORT. Remaining in position at the +order, the squad leaders, in succession from the right, salute +and report: ALL PRESENT; or PRIVATE(S) ------ ABSENT. The first +sergeant does not return the salutes of the squad leaders; he +then commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. ARMS, 3. _Order_, 4. +ARMS, faces about, salutes the captain, reports: SIR, ALL PRESENT +OR ACCOUNTED FOR, or the names of the unauthorized absentees, +and without command, takes his post. + +If the company can not be formed by squads, the first sergeant +commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. ARMS, 3. _Right_shoulder_, +4. ARMS, and calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, +answers here and executes order arms. The sergeant then effects +the division into squads and reports the company as prescribed +above. + +The captain places himself 12 paces in front of the center of, +and facing, the company in time to receive the report of the +first sergeant, whose salute he returns, and then draws saber. + +The lieutenants take their posts when the first sergeant has +reported and draw saber with the captain. The company, if not +under arms, is formed in like manner omitting reference to arms. + +173. For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company, +when small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close +order movements only are executed. The single rank executes all +movements as explained for the front rank of a company. + + +TO DISMISS THE COMPANY. + +174. Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first sergeant: +DISMISS THE COMPANY. The officers fallout; the first sergeant +places himself faced to the front, 3 paces to the front and 2 +paces from the nearest flank of the company, salutes, faces toward +opposite flank of the company, and commands: 1. _Inspection_. +2. ARMS, 3. _Port_, 4. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED. + + +ALIGNMENTS. + +175. The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School +of the Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank +file. The rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and +eyes to the front and covers his file leader. + +At each alignment the captain places himself in prolongation +of the line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the +dress is made, verifies the alignment, and commands: FRONT. + +Platoon lenders take a like position when requited to verify +alignments. + + +MOVEMENTS ON THE FIXED PIVOT. + +176. Being in line, to tune the company: 1. _Company_right_ +_(left)_, 2. MARCH, 3. _Company_, 4. HALT; or, 3. +_Forward_, 4. MARCH. + +At the second command the right-flank man in the front rank faces +to the right in marching and marks time; the other front-rank +men oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, +and mark time; in the rear rank the third man from the right, +followed in column by the second and first, moves straight to +the front until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to +the right in marching and mark time; the remaining men of the +rear rank move straight to the front 4 paces, oblique to the +right, place themselves abreast of the third man, cover their +file leaders, and mark time; the right guide steps back, takes +post on the flank, and marks time. + +The fourth command is given when the last man is 1 pace in rear +of the new line. + +The command HALT may be given at any time after the movement +begins; only those halt who are in the new position. Each of +the others halt upon arriving on the line, aligns himself to the +right, and executes FRONT without command. + +177. Being in line, to form column of platoons, or the reverse: +1. _Platoons_right_(left)_, 2. MARCH, 3. _Company_, +4. HALT; or, 3. _Forward_, 4. MARCH. + +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. + +Before forming line the captain sees that the guides on the flank +toward which the movement is to be executed are covering. This +is effected by previously announcing the guide to that flank. + +178. Being in line, to form column of squads, or the reverse; +or, being in line of platoons, to form column of platoons, or +the reverse: 1. _Squads_right_(left)_, 2. MARCH, or, 1. +_Squads_right_(left)_, 2. MARCH, 3. _Company_, 4. HALT. + +Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad. + +If the company or platoons be formed in line toward the side of +the file closers, they dart through the column and take posts +in rear of the company at the second command. If the column of +squads be formed from line, the file closers take posts on the +pivot flank, abreast of and 4 inches from the nearest rank. + + +MOVEMENTS ON THE MOVING PIVOT. + +179. Being in line, to change direction: 1. _Right_(Left)_turn_, +2. MARCH, 3. _Forward_, 4. MARCH. + +Executed as described in the School of the Squad, except that +the men do not glance toward the marching flank and that all +take the full step at the fourth command. The right guide is +the pivot of the front rank. Each rear-rank man obliques on the +same ground as his file leader. + +180. Being in column of platoons, to change direction: 1. _Column_ +_right_(left)_, 2. MARCH. + +At the first command the leader of the lending platoon commands: +RIGHT TURN. At the command MARCH the leading platoon turns to the +right on moving pivot; its lender commands: 1. _Forward_, +2. MARCH, on completion of the turn. Rear platoons march squarely +up to the turning point of the leading platoon and turn at command +of their lenders. + +181. Being in column of squads, to change direction: 1. _Column_ +_right_(left)_, 2. MARCH. + +At the second command the front rank of the leading squad turns +to the right on moving pivot, as in the School of the Squad; +the other ranks, without command, turn successively on the same +ground and in a similar manner. + +182. Being in column of squads, to form line of platoons or the +reverse: 1. _Platoons,_column_right_(left)_, 2. MARCH. + +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. + +183. Being in line, to form column of squads and change direction: +1. _Squads_right_(left)_,_column_right_(left)_, 2. MARCH; +or, 1. _Right_(Left)_by_squads_, 2. MARCH. + +In the first case the right squad initiates the COLUMN RIGHT as +soon as it has completed the SQUAD RIGHT. + +In the second case, at the command march, the right squad marches +FORWARD; the remainder of the company executes SQUADS RIGHT, +COLUMN LEFT, and follows the right squad. The right guide, when +he has posted himself in front of the right squad, takes four +short steps, then resumes the full step; the right squad conforms. + +184. Being in line, to form line of platoons: 1. _Squads_right_ +_(left),_platoons_column_right_(left)_, 2. MARCH; or, 1. +_Platoons,_right_(left)_by_squads_, 2. MARCH. + +Executed by each platoon as described for the company in the +preceding paragraph. + + +FACING OR MARCHING TO THE REAR. + +185. Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of platoons or +squads, to face or march to the rear: 1. _Squads_right_(left)_ +_about_, 2. MARCH; or, 1. _Squads_right_(left)_about_, +2. MARCH, 3. _Company_, 4. HALT. + +Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad. + +If the company or platoons be in column of squads, the file closers +turn about toward the column, and take their posts; if in line, +each darts through the nearest interval between squads. + +186. To march to the rear for a few paces: 1. _About_, 2. +FACE, 3. _Forward_, 4. MARCH. + +If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, now +the front rank; the file closers, on facing about, maintain their +relative positions. No other movement is executed until the line +is faced to the original front. + + +ON RIGHT (LEFT) INTO LINE. + +187. Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line on right +or left: 1. _On_right_(left)_into_line_, 2. MARCH, 3. _Company_, +4. HALT, 5. FRONT. + +At the first command the leader of the leading unit commands: +RIGHT TURN. The leaders of the other units command: FORWARD, if +at a halt. At the second command the leading unit turns to the +right on moving pivot. The command HALT is given when the leading +unit has advanced the desired distance in the new direction; it +halts; its leader then commands: RIGHT DRESS. + +The units in rear continue to march straight to the front; each, +when opposite the right of its place in line, executes right +turn at the command of its leaner; each is halted on the line +at the command of its leader, who then commands: RIGHT DRESS. +All dress on the first unit in line. + +If executed in double time, the lending squad marches in double +time until halted. + + +FRONT INTO LINE. + +188. Being in column of platoons or squads. to form line to the +front: 1. _Right_(Left)_front_into_line_, 2. MARCH, 3. _Company_, +4. HALT, 5. FRONT. + +At the first command the leaders of the units in rear of the +leading one command: RIGHT OBLIQUE. If at a halt, the leader +of the leading unit commands: FORWARD. At the second command +the leading unit moves straight forward; the rear units oblique +as indicated. The command HALT is given when the leading unit +has advanced the desired distance; it halts; its leader then +commands: LEFT DRESS. Each of the rear units, when opposite its +place in line, resumes the original direction at the command of +its leader; each is halted on the line at the command of its +leader, who then commands: LEFT DRESS. All dress on the first +unit in line. + +189. Being in column of squads to form column of platoons, or +being in line of platoons, to form the company in line: 1. +_Platoons,_right,_(left)_front_into_line_, 2. MARCH. 3. +_Company_, 4. HALT, 5. FRONT. + +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. In forming +the company in line, the dress is on the left squad of the left +platoon. If forming column of platoons, platoon leaders verify +the alignment before taking their posts; the captain commands +front when the alignments have been verified. + +When FRONT INTO LINE is executed in double time the commands +for halting and aligning are omitted and the guide is toward the +side of the first unit in line. + + +AT EASE AND ROUTE STEP. + +190. The column of squads is the habitual column of route. but +route step and at ease are applicable to any marching formation. + +191. To march at route step: 1. _Route_step_, 2. MARCH. + +Sabers are carried at will or in the scabbard; the men carry +their pieces at will, keeping the muzzles elevated; they are not +required to preserve silence, nor to keep the step. The ranks +cover and preserve their distance. If halted from route step, +the men stand AT REST. + +192. To march at ease: 1. _At_ease_, 2. MARCH. + +The company marches as in route step, except that silence is +preserved; when halted, the men remain at ease. + +193. Marching at route step or fit ease: 1. _Company_, 2. +ATTENTION. + +At the command ATTENTION the pieces are brought to the right shoulder +and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed. + + +TO DIMINISH THE FRONT OF A COLUMN OF SQUADS. + +194. Being in column of squads: 1. _Right_(Left)_by_twos_, +2. MARCH. + +At the command MARCH all files except the two right files of the +leading squad execute IN PLACE HALT; the two left files of the +leading squad oblique to the right when disengaged and follow the +right files at the shortest practicable distance. The remaining +squads follow successively in like manner. + +195. Being in column of squads or twos: 1. _Right_(Left)_by_ +_file_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command MARCH, all files execute in place halt except +the right file of the leading two or squad. The left file or +files of the leading two or squad oblique successively to the +right when disengaged and each follows the file on its right at +the shortest practicable distance. The remaining twos or squads +follow successively in like manner. + +196. Being in column of files or twos, to form column of squads; +or being in column of files, to form column of twos: 1. _Squads_ +_(Twos),_right_(left)_front_into_line_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command MARCH, the leading file or files halt. The remainder +of the squad, or two, obliques to the right and halts on line with +the leading file or files. The remaining squads or twos close up +and successively form in rear of the first in like manner. + +The movement described in this paragraph will be ordered RIGHT +or LEFT, so as to restore the files to their normal relative +positions in the two or squad. + +197. The movements prescribed in the three preceding paragraphs +are difficult of execution at attention and have no value as +disciplinary exercises. + +198. Marching by twos or files can not be executed without serious +delay and waste of road space. Every reasonable precaution will +be taken to obviate the necessity for these formations. + + +EXTENDED ORDER. + +RULES FOR DEPLOYMENT. + +199. The command GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT or CENTER) indicates the base +squad for the deployment; if in line it designates the actual +RIGHT (LEFT or CENTER) squad; if in column the command GUIDE +RIGHT (LEFT) designates the LEADING squad, and the command GUIDE +CENTER designates the center squad. After the deployment is +completed, the guide is CENTER without command, unless otherwise +ordered. + +200. At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line, from +either column of squads or line, each squad leader (except the +leader of the base squad, when his squad does not advance), cautions +his squad, FOLLOW ME or BY THE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK, as the case +may be; at the command MARCH, he steps in front of his squad +and leads it to its place in line. + +201. Having given the command for forming skirmish line, the +captain, if necessary, indicates to the corporal of the base squad +the point on which the squad is to march; the corporal habitually +looks to the captain for such directions. + +202. The base squad is deployed as soon as it has sufficient +interval. The other squads are deployed as they arrive on the +general line; each corporal halts in his place in line and commands +or signals, as skirmishers; the squad deploys and halts abreast +of him. + +If tactical considerations demand it, the squad is deployed before +arriving on the line. + +203. Deployed lines preserve a general alignment toward the guide. +Within their respective fronts, individuals or units march so +as best to secure cover or to facilitate the advance, but the +general and orderly progress of the whole is paramount. + +On halting a deployed line faces to the front (direction of the +enemy) in all cases and takes advantage of cover, the men lying +down if necessary. + +204. The company in skirmish line ADVANCES, HALTS, MOVES BY THE +FLANK, or TO THE REAR, OBLIQUES, resumes the DIRECT MARCH, passes +from QUICK to DOUBLE TIME and the reverse by the same commands and +in a similar manner as in close order; if at a halt, the movement +BY THE FLANK or TO THE REAR is executed by the same commands as +when marching. COMPANY RIGHT (LEFT, HALF RIGHT, HALF LEFT) is +executed as explained for the front rank, skirmish intervals +being maintained. + +205. A platoon or other part of the company is deployed and marched +in the same manner as the company, substituting in the commands, +PLATOON (DETACHMENT, etc.) for COMPANY. + + +DEPLOYMENTS. + +206. Being in line, to form skirmish line to the front: 1. _As_ +_skirmishers,_guide_right_(left_or_center)_, 2. MARCH. + +If marching, the corporal of the base squad moves straight to +the front; when that squad has advanced the desired distance, +the captain commands: 1. _Company_, 2. HALT. If the guide +be RIGHT (LEFT), the other corporals move to the LEFT (RIGHT) +front, and, in succession from the base, place their squads on +the line; if the guide be center, the other corporals move to +the RIGHT or LEFT front, according as they are on the right or +left of the center squad, and in succession from the center squad +place their squads on the line. + +If at a halt, the base squad is deployed without advancing; the +other squads may be conducted to their proper places by the flank; +interior squads may be moved when squads more distant from the +base have gained comfortable marching distance. + +207. Being in column of squads, to form skirmish line to the +front: 1. _As_skirmishers,_guide_right_(left_or_center)_, +2. MARCH. + +If marching, the corporal of the base squad deploys it and moves +straight to the front; if at a halt, he deploys his squad without +advancing. If the guide be RIGHT (LEFT), the other corporals move +to the LEFT (RIGHT) FRONT, and, in succession from the base, place +their squads on the line; if the guide be CENTER, the corporals +in front of the center squad move to the right (if at a halt, +to the right rear), the corporals in rear of the center squad +move to the left front, and each, in succession from the base, +places his squad on the line. + +The column of twos or files is deployed by the same commands and +in like manner. + +208. The company in line or in column of squads may be deployed +in an oblique direction by the same commands. The captain points +out the desired direction; the corporal of the base squad moves +in the direction indicated; the other corporals conform. + +209. To form skirmish line to the flank or rear the line or the +column of squads is turned by squads to the flank or rear and +then deployed as described. + +210. The intervals between men are increased or decreased as +described in the School of the Squad, adding to the preparatory +command, GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT or CENTER) if necessary. + + +THE ASSEMBLY. + +211. The captain takes his post in front of, or designates, the +element on which the company is to assemble and commands: 1. +_Assemble_, 2. MARCH. + +If in skirmish line the men move promptly toward the designated +point and the company is re-formed in line. If assembled by platoons, +these are conducted to the designated point by platoon leaders, +and the company is re-formed in line. + +Platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. _Platoons,_assemble_, +2. MARCH. + +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. + +One or more platoons may be assembled by the command: + +1. _Such_platoon(s),_assemble_, 2. MARCH, + +Executed by the designated platoon or platoons as described for +the company. + + +THE ADVANCE. + +212. The advance of a company into an engagement (whether for +attack or defense) is conducted in close order, preferably column +of squads, until the probability of encountering hostile fire +makes it advisable to deploy. After deployment, and before opening +fire, the advance of the company may be continued in skirmish +line or other suitable formation, depending upon circumstances. +The advance may often be facilitated, or better advantage taken +of cover, or losses reduced by the employment of the PLATOON +or SQUAD COLUMNS or by the use of a SUCCESSION OF THIN LINES. +The selection of the method to be used is made by the captain +or major, the choice depending upon conditions arising during +the progress of the advance. If the deployment is found to be +premature, it will generally be best to assemble the company +and proceed in close order. + +Patrols ure used to provide the necessary security against surprise. + +213. Being in skirmish line: 1. _Platoon_columns_, 2. MARCH. + +The platoon leaders move forward through the center of their +respective platoons; men to the right of the platoon leader march +to the left and follow him in file; those to the left march in +like manner to the right; each platoon leader thus conducts the +march of his platoon in double column of files; platoon guides +follow in rear of their respective platoons to insure prompt +and orderly execution of the advance. + +214. Being in skirmish line: 1. _Squad_columns_, 2. MARCH. + +Each squad leader moves to the front; the members of each squad +oblique toward and follow their squad leader in single file at +easy marching distances. + +215. PLATOON COLUMNS are profitably used where the ground is so +difficult or cover so limited as to make it desirable to take +advantage of the few favorable routes; no two platoons should +march within the area of burst of a single shrapnel.[5] SQUAD +COLUMNS are of value principally in facilitating the advance over +rough or brush-grown ground; they afford no material advantage +in securing cover. + +[Footnote 5: Ordinarily about 20 yards wide.] + +216. To deploy platoon or squad columns: 1. _As_skirmishers_, +2. MARCH. + +Skirmishers move to the right or left front and successively place +themselves in their original positions on the line. + +217. Being in platoon or squad columns: 1. _Assemble_, 2. +MARCH. + +The platoon or squad leaders signal ASSEMBLE. The men of each +platoon or squad, as the case may be, advance and, moving to +the right and left, take their proper places in line; each unit +assembling on the leading element of the column and re-forming +in line. The platoon or squad leaders conduct their units toward +the element or point indicated by the captain, and to their places +in line; the company is re-formed in line. + +218. Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of thin +lines: 1. _(Such_numbers),_forward_, 2. MARCH. + +The captain points out in advance the selected position in front +of the line occupied. The designated number of each squad moves to +the front; the line thus formed preserves the original intervals +as nearly as practicable; when this line has advanced a suitable +distance (generally from 100 to 250 yards, depending upon the +terrain and the character of the hostile fire), a second is sent +forward by similar commands, and so on at irregular distances, +until the whole line has advanced, Upon arriving at the indicated +position, the first line is halted. Successive lines, upon arriving, +halt on line with the first and the men take their proper places +in the skirmish line. + +Ordinarily each line is made up of one man per squad and the +men of a squad are sent forward in order from right to left as +deployed. The first line is led by the platoon leader of the +right platoon, the second by the guide of the right platoon, and +so on in order from right to left. + +The advance is conducted in quick time unless conditions demand +a faster gait. + +The company having arrived at the indicated position; a further +advance by the same means may be advisable. + +219. The advance in a succession of thin lines is used to cross +a wide stretch swept, or likely to be swept, by artillery fire or +heavy, long-range rifle fire which can not profitably be returned. +Its purpose is the building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory +to engaging in a fire tight. This method of advancing results in +serious (though temporary) loss of control over the company. Its +advantage lies in the fact that it offers less definite target, +hence is less likely to draw fire. + +220. The above are suggestions. Other and better formations may +be devised to fit particular cases. The best formation is the +one which advances the line farthest with the least loss of men, +time, and control. + + +THE FIRE ATTACK. + +221. The principles governing the advance of the firing line in +attack are considered in the School of the Battalion. + +When it becomes impracticable for the company to advance as a +whole by ordinary means, it advances by rushes. + +222. Being in skirmish line: 1. _By_platoon_(two_platoons,_squad,_ +_four_men,_etc.),_from_the_right_(left)_, 2. RUSH. + +The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully arranges +the details for a prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and +puts it into effect as soon as practicable. If necessary, he +designates the leader for the indicated fraction. When about +to rush, he causes the men of the fraction to cease firing and +to hold themselves flat, but in readiness to spring forward +instantly. The leader of the rush (at the signal of the platoon +leader, if the latter be not the leader of the rush) commands: +FOLLOW ME, and, running at top speed, leads the fraction to the +new line, where be halts it and causes it to open fire. The leader +of the rush selects the new line if it has not been previously +designated. + +The first fraction having established itself on the new line, +the next like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader, +without further command of the captain, and so on, successively, +until the entire company is on the line established by the first +rush. + +If more than one platoon is to join in one rush, the junior platoon +leader conforms to the action of the senior. + +A part of the line having advanced, the captain may increase +or decrease the size of the fractions to complete the movement. + +223. When the company forms a part of the firing line, the rush +of the company as a whole is conducted by the captain, as described +for a platoon in the preceding paragraph. The captain leads the +rush; platoon leaders lead their respective platoons; platoon +guides follow the line to insure prompt and orderly execution +of the advance. + +224. When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, becomes +impracticable, any method of advance that BRINGS THE ATTACK CLOSER +TO THE ENEMY, such as crawling, should be employed. + +For regulations governing the charge, see paragraphs 318 and 319. + + +THE COMPANY IN SUPPORT. + +225. To enable it to follow or reach the firing line, the support +adopts suitable formations, following the principles explained +in paragraphs 212-218. + +The support should be kept assembled as long as practicable. +If after deploying a favorable opportunity arises to hold it +for some time in close formation, it should be reassembled. It +is redeployed when necessary. + +226. The movements of the support as a whole and the dispatch +of reenforcements from it to the firing line are controlled by +the major. + +A reenforcement of less than one platoon has little influence +and will be avoided whenever practicable. + +The captain of a company in support is constantly on the alert +for the major's signals or commands. + +227. A reenforcement sent to the firing line joins it deployed +as skirmishers. The leader of the reenforcement places it in an +interval in the line, if one exists: and commands it thereafter +as a unit. If no such suitable interval exists, the reenforcement +is advanced with increased intervals between skirmishers; each +man occupies the nearest interval in the firing line, and each +then obeys the orders of the nearest squad lender and platoon +leader. + +228. A reenforcement joins the firing line as quickly as possible +without exhausting the men. + +229. The original platoon division of the companies in the firing +line should be maintained and should not be broken up by the +mingling of reenforcements. + +Upon joining the firing line, officers and sergeants accompanying +a reenforcement take over the duties of others of like grade +who have been disabled, or distribute themselves so as best to +exercise their normal functions. Conditions with vary and no rules +can be prescribed. It is essential that all assist in mastering +the increasing difficulties of control. + + +THE COMPANY ACTING ALONE. + +230. In general, the company, when acting alone, is employed +according to the principles applicable to the battalion acting +alone; the captain employs platoons as the major employs companies, +making due allowance for the difference in strength. + +The support may be smaller in proportion or may be dispensed with. + +231. The company must be well protected against surprise. Combat +patrols on the flanks are specially important. Each leader of +a flank platoon details a man to watch for the signals of the +patrol or patrols on his flank. + + +FIRE. + +232. Ordinarily pieces are loaded and extra ammunition is issued +before the company deploys for combat. + +In close order the company executes the firings at the command +of the captain, who posts himself in rear of the center of the +company. + +Usually the firings, in close order consist of saluting volleys +only. + +233. When the company is deployed, the men execute the firings +at the command of their platoon leaders; the latter give such +commands as are necessary to carry out the captain's directions, +and, from time to time, add such further commands as are necessary +to continue, correct, and control the fire ordered. + +234. The voice is generally inadequate for giving commands during +fire and must be replaced by signals of such character that proper +fire direction and control is assured. To attract attention, +signals must usually be preceded by the whistle signal (short +blast). A friction of the firing line about to rush should, it +practicable, avoid using the long blast signal as an aid to CEASE +FIRING. Officers and men behind the firing line can not ordinarily +move freely along the line, but must depend on mutual watchfulness +and the proper use of the prescribed signals. All should post +themselves so as to see their immediate superiors and subordinates. + +235. The musicians assist the captain by observing the enemy, the +target, and the fire effect by transmitting commands or signals +and by watching for signals. + +236. Firing with blank cartridges at an outlined or represented +enemy at distances less than 100 yards is prohibited. + +237. The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in relation +thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in +marksmanship, are treated in the Small-Arms Firing Manual. + + +RANGES. + +238. For convenience of reference ranges are classified as follows: + + 0 to 600 yards, close range. + 600 to 1,200 yards, effective range. + 1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range. + 2,000 yards and over, distant range. + +239. The distance to the target must be determined as accurately +as possible and the sights set accordingly. Aside from training +and morale, this is the most important single factor in securing +effective fire at the longer ranges. + +240. Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the +most accurate and only practicable method of determining the +range will generally be to take the mean of several estimates. + +Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate +estimators in the company, are designated as RANGE ESTIMATORS +and are specially trained in estimating distances. + +Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the +range estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the +mean of their estimates. The range estimators then take their +customary posts. + + +CLASSES OF FIRING. + +241. VOLLEY FIRING has limited application. In defense it may +be used in the early stages of the action if the enemy presents +a large, compact target. It may be used by troops executing FIRE +OF POSITION. When the ground near the target is such that the +strike of bullets can be seen from the firing line, RANGING VOLLEYS +may be used to correct the sight setting. + +In combat, volley firing is executed habitually by platoon. + +242. FIRE AT WILL is the class of fire normally employed in attack +or defense. + +243. CLIP FIRE has limited application. It is principally used: +1. In the early stages of combat, to steady the men by habituating +them to brief pauses in firing. 2. To produce a short burst of +fire. + + +THE TARGET. + +244. Ordinarily the major will assign to the company an objective +in attack or sector in defense; the company's target will lie +within the limits so assigned. In the choice of target, tactical +considerations are paramount; the nearest hostile troops within +the objective or sector will thus be the usual target. This will +ordinarily be the hostile firing line; troops in rear are ordinarily +proper targets for artillery, machine guns, or, at times, infantry +employing fire of position. + +Change of targets should not be made without excellent reasons +therefor, such as the sudden appearance of hostile troops under +conditions which make them more to be feared than the troops +comprising the former target. + +245. The distribution of fire over the entire target is of special +importance. + +The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each +platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds +to his position in the company. Men are so instructed that each +fires on that part of the target which is directly opposite him. + +246. All parts of the target are equally important. Care must +be exercised that the men do not slight its less visible parts. +A section of the target not covered by fire represents a number +of the enemy permitted to fire cooly and effectively. + +247. If the target can not be seen with the naked eye, platoon +leaders select an object in front of or behind it, designate +this as the AIMING TARGET, and direct a sight setting which will +carry the cone of fire into the target. + + +FIRE DIRECTION. + +248. When the company is large enough to be divided into platoons, +it is impracticable for the captain to command it directly in +combat. His efficiency in managing the firing line is measured +by his ability to enforce his will through the platoon leaders. +Having indicated clearly what he desires them to do, he avoids +interfering except to correct serious errors or omissions. + +249. The captain directs the fire of the company or of designated +platoons. He designates the target, and, when practicable, allots +a part of the target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire +action he determines the range, announces the sight setting, +and indicates the class of fire to be employed, and the time +to open fire. Thereafter, he observes the fire effect, corrects +material errors in sight setting, prevents exhaustion of the +ammunition supply, and causes the distribution of such extra +ammunition as may be received from the rear. + + +FIRE CONTROL. + +250. In combat the platoon is the fire unit. From 20 to 35 rifles +are as many as one leader can control effectively. + +251. Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or +directions of the captain, having first taken such precautions +to insure correct sight setting and clear description of the +target or aiming target as the situation permits or requires; +thereafter he gives such additional commands or directions as +are necessary to exact compliance with the captain's will. He +corrects the sight setting when necessary. He designates an aiming +target when the target can not be seen with the naked eye. + +252. In general, PLATOON LEADERS observe the target and the effect +of their fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands or +signals; they observe and regulate the rate of fire. The PLATOON +GUIDES watch the firing line and check every breach of fire +discipline. SQUAD LEADERS transmit commands and signals when +necessary, observe the conduct of their squads and abate excitement, +assist in enforcing fire discipline and participate in the firing. + +253. The best troops are those that submit longest to fire control. +Loss of control is an evil which robs success of its greatest +results. To avoid or delay such loss should be the constant aim +of all. + +Fire control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight +setting and target, and resume a well directed fire. + + +FIRE DISCIPLINE. + +254. "Fire discipline implies, besides a habit of obedience, +a control of the rifle by the soldier, the result of training, +which will enable him in action to make hits instead of misses. +It embraces taking advantage of the ground; care in setting the +sight and delivery of fire; constant attention to the orders of +the leaders, and careful observation of the enemy; an increase +of fire when the target is favorable, and a cessation of fire +when the enemy disappears; economy of ammunition." (Small-arms +Firing Manual.) + +In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position and +thus reduce the effectiveness of his fire have the approximate +value of hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward +fire superiority. + +Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, +each man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire +upon the proper target. + +255. To create a correct appreciation of the requirements of +fire discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire should be +as rapid as is consistent with accurate aiming; that the rate +will depend upon the visibility, proximity, and size or the target; +and that the proper rate will ordinarily suggest itself to each +trained man, usually rendering cautions or commands unnecessary. + +In attack the highest rate of fire is employed at the halt preceding +the assault, and in pursuing fire. + +256. In an advance by rushes, leaders of troops in firing positions +are responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover the advance +of each rushing fraction. Troops are trained to change slightly +the direction of fire so as not to endanger the flanks of advanced +portions of the firing line. + +257. In defense, when the target disappears behind cover, platoon +leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon the +point where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance +instantly with vigorous fire. + + +SECTION 7. COMPANY INSPECTION. + +745. Being in line at a halt: 1. _Open_ranks_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command MARCH the front rank executes right dress; the +rear rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, and +execute right dress; the lieutenants pass around their respective +flanks and take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of +the center of their respective platoons. The captain aligns the +front rank, rear rank, and file closers, takes post 8 paces in +front of the right guide, facing to the left, and commands: 1. +FRONT, 2. PREPARE FOR INSPECTION. + +At the second command the lieutenants carry saber; the captain +returns saber and inspects them, after which they face about, order +saber, and stand at ease; upon the completion of the inspection +they carry saber, face about, and order saber. The captain may +direct the lieutenants to accompany or assist him, in which case +they return saber and, at the close of the inspection, resume +their posts in front of the company, draw and carry saber. + +Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the +right of the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him, +executes INSPECTION ARMS. + +The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just +above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The captain +inspects the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same +position as in receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes +it with the left hand at the balance and executes ORDER ARMS. + +As the captain returns the piece the next man executes INSPECTION +ARMS, and so on through the company. + +Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man executes +ORDER ARMS as soon as the captain passes to the next, man. + +The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left +to right in rear, of each rank and of the line of file closers. + +When approached by the captain the first sergeant executes INSPECTION +SABER. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute INSPECTION +PISTOL by drawing the pistol from the holster and holding it +diagonally across the body, barrel up, and 6 inches in front +of the neck, muzzle pointing up and to the left. The pistol is +returned to the holster as soon as the captain passes. + +Upon completion of the inspection the captain takes post facing +to the left in front of the right guide and on line with the +lieutenants and commands: 1. _Close_ranks_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command MARCH the lieutenants resume their posts in line; +the rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file +leader; the file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank. + +746. If the company is dismissed. rifles are put away. In quarters, +headdress and accouterments are removed and the men stand near +their respective bunks; in camp they stand covered, but without +accourterments, in front of their tents. + +If the personal field equipment has not been inspected in ranks +and its inspection in quarters or camp is ordered, each man will +arrange the prescribed articles on his bunk, if in quarters or +permanent camp, or in front of his half of the tent, if in shelter +tent camp, in the same relative order as directed in paragraph +747. + +The captain, accompanied by the lieutenants, then inspects the +quarters or camp. The first sergeant precedes the captain and +calls the men to attention on entering each squad room or on +approaching the tents; the men stand at attention but do not salute. +(_C._I._D._R.,_No._16,_Aug._25,_1916_.) + +747. (Edition approved Aug. 10, 1911, and edition corrected to +November, 1913.) If the inspection is to include an examination +of the equipment while in ranks, the captain, after closing ranks, +causes the company to stack arms, to march backward until 4 paces +in rear of the stacks and to take intervals. He then commands: +1. UNSLING EQUIPMENT, 2. OPEN PACKS. + +At the first command, each man unslings his equipment and places +it on the ground at his feet, haversack to the front end of the +pack 1 foot in front of toes. + +At the second command, pack carriers are unstrapped, packs removed +and unrolled, the longer edge of the pack along the lower edge of +the cartridge belt. Each man exposes shelter tent pins, removes +meat can, knife, fork, and spoon from the meat-can pouch, and +places them on the right of the haversack, knife, fork, and spoon +in the open meat can; removes the canteen and cup from the cover +and places them on the left side of the haversack; unstraps and +spreads out haversack so as to expose its contents; folds up the +carrier to uncover the cartridge pockets; opens same; unrolls +toilet articles and places them on the outer flap of the haversack; +places underwear carried in pack on the left half of the open pack, +with round fold parallel with front edge of pack; opens first-aid +pouch and exposes contents to view. Special articles carried +by individual men, such as flag kit, field glasses, compass, +steel tape, notebook, etc., will be arranged on the right half +of the open pack. Each man then resumes the attention. Plate VI +shows the relative position of all articles except underwear +and special articles. + +The captain then passes along the ranks and file closers as be, +fore, inspects the equipment, returns to the right, and commands: +CLOSE PACKS. + +Each man rolls up his toilet articles and underwear, straps up +his haversack and its contents, replaces the meat can, knife, +fork, and spoon, and the canteen and cup: closes cartridge pockets +and first-aid pouch; restores special articles to their proper +receptacles; rolls up and replaces pack in currier; and, leaving +the equipment in its position on the ground, resumes the attention. + +All equipments being packed, the captain commands: SLING EQUIPMENT. + +The equipments are slung and belts fastened. + +The captain then causes the company to assemble and take arms. +The inspection is completed as already explained. + +748. Should the inspector be other than the captain, the latter, +after commanding FRONT, adds REST, and faces to the front. When +the inspector approaches, the captain faces to the left, brings +the company to attention, faces to the front, and salutes. The +salute acknowledged, the captain carries saber, faces to the +left, commands: PREPARE FOR INSPECTION, and again faces to the +front. + +The inspection proceeds as before; the captain returns saber +and accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter passes him. + +[Illustration: fig 3.] + + +SECTION 8. MANUAL OF TENT PITCHING. + +SHELTER TENTS. + +[For Infantry Equipment, model of 1910.][6] + +[Footnote 6: For method of pitching shelter tents, with old model +Infantry equipment or old model shelter tent, see paragraph 792, +in 'Method of Folding Pyramidal Tent'.] + +792. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands: +FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS. + +The officers, first sergeant, and guides fallout; the cooks form +a file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first +sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the +company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men +taken from the front rank; the remaining guide, or guides, and +file closers form on a convenient flank. + +Before forming column of platoons, preparatory to pitching tents, +the company may be redivided into two or more platoons, regardless +of the size of each. + +793. The captain then causes the company to take intervals as +described in the School of the Squad and commands: PITCH TENTS. + +At the command PITCH TENTS, each man steps off obliquely to the +right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the +butt of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the +front, barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each +front rank man then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground +by the outside of the right heel. + +[Illustration: Plate VI.] + +Equipments are unslung, packs opened, shelter half and pins removed: +each man then spreads his shelter half, small triangle to the +rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, the rear rank +man's half on the right. The halves are then buttoned together; +the guy loops at both ends of the lower half are passed through +the buttonholes provided in the lower and upper halves; the whipped +end of the guy rope is then passed through both guy loops and +secured, this at both ends of the tent. Each front rank man inserts +the muzzle of his rifle under the front end of the ridge and +holds the rifle upright, sling to the front, heel of butt on +the ground beside the bayonet. His rear rank man pins down the +front corners of the tent on the line of bayonets, stretching +the tent taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the front +guy rope and drives the pin at such a distance in front of the +rifle as to hold the rope taut; both men go to the rear of the +tent, each pins down a corner, stretching the sides and rear +of the tent before securing; the rear rank man then inserts an +intrenching tool, or a bayonet in its scabbard, under the rear +end of the ridge inside the tent, the front rank man pegging +down the end of the rear guy ropes; the rest of the pins are +then driven by both men, the rear rank man working on the right. + +NOTE.--The use of the hand ax and the pick mattock in organizations +equipped with the intrenching tool is authorized for the purpose +of driving shelter tent pins. The use of the bayonet for this +purpose is prohibited. + +The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown +back on the tent. + +As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges his equipment +and the contents of his pack in the tent and stands at attention +in front of his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin. + +To have a uniform slope when the tents are pitched, the guy ropes +should all be of the same length. + +In shelter-tent camps, in localities where suitable material +is procurable, tent poles may be improvised and used in lieu of +the rifle and bayonet or intrenching tool as supports for the +shelter tent. + +794. When the pack is not carried the company is formed for shelter +tents, intervals are taken, arms are laid aside or on the ground, +the men are dismissed and proceed to the wagon, secure their +packs, return to their places, and pitch tents as heretofore +described. + +795. Double shelter tents may be pitched by first pitching one +tent as heretofore described, then pitching a second tent against +the opening of the first, using one rifle to support both tents, +and passing the front guy ropes over and down the sides of the +opposite tents. The front corner of one tent is not pegged down, +but is thrown back to permit an opening into the tent. + + +SINGLE SLEEPING BAG. + +796. Spread the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet, +buttoned side to the left; fold the blanket once across its short +dimension and lay it on the poncho, folded side along the right +side of the poncho; tie the blanket together along the left side +by means of the tapes provided; fold the left half of the poncho +over the blanket and button it together along the side and bottom. + + +DOUBLE SLEEPING BAG. + +797. Spread one poncho on-the ground, buttoned end at the feet, +buttoned side to the left; spread the blankets on top of the +poncho; tie the edges of the blankets together with the tapes +provided; spread a second poncho on top of the blankets, buttoned +end at the feet, buttoned side to the right; button the two ponchos +together along both sides and across the end. + + +TO STRIKE SHELTER TENTS. + +798. The men standing in front of their tents: STRIKE TENTS. + +Equipments and rifles are removed from the tent; the tents are +lowered, packs made up, and equipments slung, and the men stand +at attention in the places originally occupied after taking +intervals. + + +TO PITCH ALL TYPES OF ARMY TENTS, EXCEPT SHELTER AND CONICAL WALL +TENTS. + +799. To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and conical +wall tents: Mark line of tents by driving a wall pin on the spot +to be occupied by the right (or left) corner of each tent. For +pyramidal tents the interval between adjacent pins should be +about 30 feet, which will give a passage of 2 feet between tents. +Spread tripod on the ground where the center of tent is to be, +if tripod is used. Spread the tent on the ground to be occupied, +door to the front, and place the right (or left) front wall loop +over the pin. The door (or doors, if more than one) being fastened +and held together at the bottom, the left (or right) corner wall +loop is carried to the left (or right) as far as it will go and +a wall pin driven through it, the pin being placed in line with +the right (or left) corner pins already driven. At the same time +the rear corner wall loops are pulled to the rear and outward +so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched to complete the +rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these loops. Each +corner pin should be directly in rear of the corresponding front +corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small +amount of slack should be allowed before the corner pins are driven. +According to the size of the tent, one or two men, crawling under +the tent if necessary, fit each pole or ridge or upright into +the ring or ridge-pole holes, and such accessories as hood, fly, +and brace ropes are adjusted. If a tripod be used an additional +man will go under the tent to adjust it. The tent, steadied by +the remaining men, one at each corner guy rope, will then be +raised. If the tent is a ward or storage type, corner poles will +now be placed at the four corners. The four corner guy ropes +are then placed over the lower notches of the large pins driven +in prolongation of the diagonals at such distance as to hold +the walls and end of the tent vertical and smooth when the guy +ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through each +remaining wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is driven +in line with the corner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes +of the tent are placed over the lower notches, while the guy +ropes of the fly are placed over the upper notches, and are then +drawn taut. Brace ropes when used, are then secured to stakes +or pins suitably placed. + +800. Rescinded. + + +CONICAL WALL TENT. + +801. Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. +Using the hood lines, with center pin as center, describe two +concentric circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. +In the outer circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At +intervals of about 3 feet drive the other guy pins. + +In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in +the case of pyramidal tents. + + +TO STRIKE COMMON, WALL, PYRAMIDAL, AND CONICAL WALL TENTS. + +802. STRIKE TENTS. + +The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner +guy ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the +conical wall tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their +receptacle. + +One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent +is lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and +pole fastened together, and the remaining pins collected. + + +TO FOLD TENTS. + +803. For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents: Spread +the tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms +of side walls are even, ends of tent forming triangles to the +right and left; fold the triangular ends of the tent in toward +the middle, making it rectangular in shape; fold the top over +about 9 inches; fold the tent in two by carrying the top fold +over clear to the foot; fold again in two from the top to the +foot; throw all guys on tent except the second from each end; +fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds of the second +cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned-in edge of +the right end, then fold the right end over the top, completing +the bundle; tie with the two exposed guys. + + +METHOD OF FOLDING PYRAMIDAL TENT. + +The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof +canvas pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished +by leaving the rear-corner wall pins in the ground with the wall +loops attached, one man at each rear-corner guy, and one holding +the square iron in a perpendicular position and pulling the canvas +to its limit away from the former front of the tent. This leaves +the three remaining sides of the tent on top of the rear side, +with the door side in the middle. + +Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-rear +corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, +and pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner +and return to the right, covering the right-rear corner. This +folds the right side of the tent on itself, with the crease in +the middle and under the front side of tent. + +Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described +above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides +of the tent lying smooth and fiat and the two side walls folded +inward, each on itself. + +Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward +toward the bottom of the tent, and continue to fold around the +square iron as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth and +parallel with the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly +made and the canvas kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover +the lower edge of the canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the +folded canvas except the two on the center width, which should +be pulled out and away from bottom edge to their extreme length +for tying. Now, beginning at one end, fold toward the center +on the first seam (that joining the first and second widths) +and fold again toward the center, so that the already folded +canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle width. +Then fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. +Then begin folding from opposite end, folding the first width +in half, then making a second fold to come within about 4 or +5 inches of that already folded; turn this fold entirely over +that already folded. Take the exposed guys and draw them taut +across each other, turn bundle over on the under guy, cross guys +on top of bundle, drawing tight. Turn bundle over on the crossed +guys and tie lengthwise. + +When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package +11 by 23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to +store or pack. + +Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the +middle width of canvas in the back wall. + + + WAR DEPARTMENT, + OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF, + _Washington,_December_2,_1911._ + +Paragraphs 747, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, and 798. Infantry +Drill Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops equipped with the +Infantry Equipment, model 1910. For troops equipped under General +Orders, No. 23, War Department, 1906, and orders amendatory thereof, +the alternative paragraphs published herewith will govern. + +By order of the Secretary of War: + + LEONARD WOOD, + _Major_General,_Chief_of_Staff_. + +747. If the inspection is to include an examination of the blanket +rolls the captain, before dismissing the company and after inspecting +the file closers, directs the lieutenants to remain in place, closes +ranks, stacks arms, dresses the company back to four paces from +the stacks, takes intervals, and Commands: 1. _Unsling_, +2. PACKS, 3. _Open_, 4. PACKS. + +At the second command each man unslings his roll and places it +on the ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, square end +of shelter half to the right. + +At the fourth command the rolls are untied, laid perpendicular +to the front, with the triangular end of the shelter half to the +front, opened, and unrolled to the left; each man prepares the +contents of his roll for inspection and resumes the attention. + +The captain then returns saber, passes along the ranks and file +closers as before, inspects the rolls, returns to the right, +draws saber and commands: 1. _Close_, 2. PACKS. + +At the second command each man, with his shelter half smoothly +spread on the ground with buttons up and triangular end to the +front, folds his blanket once across its length and places it +upon the shelter half, fold toward the bottom, edge one-half +inch from the square end, the same amount of canvas uncovered +at the top and bottom. He then places the parts of the pole at +the side of the blanket next the square end of shelter half, near +and parallel to the fold, end of pole about 6 inches from the +edge of the blanket; nests the pins similarly near the opposite +edge of the blanket find distributes the other articles carried in +the roll; folds the triangular end and then the exposed portion +of the bottom of the shelter half over the blanket. + +The two men in each file roll and fasten first the roll of the +front and then of the rear rank man. The file closers work similarly +two and two, or with the front rank man of a blank file. Each +pair stands on the folded side, rolls the blanket roll closely +and buckles the straps, passing the end of the strap through both +keeper and buckle, back over the buckle and under the keeper. +With the roll so lying on the ground that the edge of the shelter +half can just be seen when looking vertically downward one end is +bent upward and over to meet the other, a clove hitch is taken +with the guy rope first around the end to which it is attached and +then around the other end, adjusting the length of rope between +hitches to suit the wearer. + +As soon as a file completes its two rolls each man places his +roll in the position it was in after being unslung find stands +at attention. + +All the rolls being completed, the captain commands: 1. _Sling_, +2. PACKS. + +At the second command the rolls ure slung, the end containing +the pole to the rear. + +The company is assembled, takes arms, and the captain completes +the inspection as before. + +792. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands: +FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS. + +The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks +form a file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the +first sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file +of the company; blank files are filled by the file closers or +by men taken from the front rank; the remaining guide or guides, +and file closers form on a convenient flank. Before forming column +of platoons, preparatory to pitching tents, the company may be +redivided into two or more platoons, regardless of the size of +each. + +793. The captain then causes the company to take intervals as +described in the School of the Squad, and commands: PITCH TENTS. + +At the command PITCH TENTS, each man steps off obliquely to the +right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the +butt of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the +front, barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each +front rank man then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground +by the outside of the right heel. All unsling and open the blanket +rolls and take out the shelter half, poles, and pins. Each then +spreads his shelter half, triangle to the rear, flat upon the +ground the tent is to occupy, rear rank man's half on the right. +The halves are then buttoned together. Each front rank man joins +his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of the halves, and holds +the pole upright beside the bayonet placed in the ground; his rear +rank man, using the pins in front, pins down the front corners +of the tent on the line of bayonets, stretching the canvas taut; +he then inserts a pin in the eye of the rope and drives the pin +at such distance in front of the pole as to hold the rope taut. +Both then go to the rear of the tent; the rear rank man adjusts +the pole and the front rank man drives the pins. The rest of +the pins are then driven by both men, the rear-rank man working +on the right. + +NOTE.--The use of the hand ax and the pick mattock in organizations +equipped with the intrenching tool is authorized for the purpose +of driving shelter tent pins. The use of the bayonet for that +purpose is prohibited. + +As soon as the tent is patched each man arranges the contents +of the blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front +of his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin. + +The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents +are pitched, should all be of the same length. + +794. When the blanket roll is not carried, intervals are taken +as described above; the position of the front pole is marked with +a bayonet and equipments are laid aside. The men then proceed +to the wagon, secure their rolls, return to their places, and +pitch tents as heretofore described. + +795. To pitch double shelter tent, the captain gives the same +commands as before, except TAKE HALF INTERVAL is given instead of +TAKE INTERVAL. In taking interval each man follows the preceding +man at 2 paces. The captain then commands: PITCH DOUBLE TENTS. + +The first sergeant places himself on the right of the right guide +and with him pitches a single shelter tent. + +Only the odd numbers of the front rank mark the line with the +bayonet. + +The tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of two +single tents. Two complete tents, except one pole, are used. +Two guy ropes are used at each end, the guy pins being placed +in front of the corner pins. + +The tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear rank; +and by numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rank; the men falling +in on the left are numbered, counting off if necessary. + +All the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the tent is +to occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the triangular +ends to the front. All four halves are then buttoned together, +first the ridges and then the square ends. The front corners +of the tent are pinned by the front rank men, the odd number +holding the poles, the even number driving the pins. The rear +rank men similarly pin the rear corners. + +While the odd numbers steady the poles, each even number of the +front rank takes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted +by the even number of the rear rank, he adjusts the pole to the +center eyes of the shelter halves in the following order: (1) +The lower half of the front tent; (2) the lower half of the rear +tent; (3) the upper half of the front tent; (4) the upper half +of the rear tent. The guy ropes are then adjusted. + +The tents having been pitched, the triangular ends are turned back, +contents of the rolls arranged, and the men stand at attention, +each opposite his own shelter half and facing out from the tent. + +796. Omitted. + +797. Omitted. + +798. Omitted. + + +SECTION 9. MANUAL OF THE BAYONET. + +1. The Infantry soldier relies mainly on fire action to disable the +enemy, but he should know that personal combat is often necessary +to obtain success. Therefore, he must be instructed in the use +of the rifle and bayonet in hand-to-hand encounters. + +2. The object of this instruction is to teach the soldier how to +make effect use of the rifle and bayonet in personal combat: to +make him quick and proficient in handling his rifle; to give him +an accurate eye and a steady hand; and to give him confidence in +the bayonet in offense and defense. When skill in these exercises +has been acquired, the rifle will still remain a most formidable +weapon at close quarters should the bayonet be lost or disabled, + +3. Efficiency of organizations in bayonet fighting will be judged +by the skill shown by individuals in personal combat. For this +purpose pairs or groups of opponents, selected at random from +among recruits and trained soldiers, should engage in assaults, +using the fencing equipment provided for the purpose. + +4. Officers and specially selected and thoroughly instructed +noncommissioned officers will act us instructors. + +5. Instruction in bayonet combat should begin as soon as the soldier +is familiar with the handling of his rifle and will progress, as +far as practicable, in the order followed in the text. + +6. Instruction is ordinarily given on even ground; but practice +should also be had on uneven ground, especially in the attack +and defense of intrenchments. + +7. These exercises will not be used as a calisthenic drill. + +8. The principles of the commands are the same as those given in +paragraph 9, 15, and 38, Infantry Drill Regulations. Intervals +and distances will be taken as in paragraphs 109 and 111, Infantry +Drill Regulations, except that, in formations for bayonet exercises, +the men should be at least four paces apart in every direction. + +9. Before requiring soldiers to take a position or execute a +movement for the first time, the instructor executes the same +for the purpose of illustration, after which he requires the +soldiers to execute the movement individually. Movements prescribed +in this manual will not be executed in cadence as the attempt to +do so results in incomplete execution and lack of vigor. Each +movement will be executed correctly as quickly as possible by +every man. As soon as the movements are executed accurately, +the commands are given rapidly, as expertness with the bayonet +depends chiefly upon quickness of motion. + +10. The exercises will he interrupted at first by short and frequent +rests. The rests will be less frequent as proficiency is attained. +Fatigue and exhaustion will be specially guarded against, as +they prevent proper interest being taken in the exercises and +delay the progress of the instruction. Rests will be given from +the position of order arms in the manner prescribed in Infantry +Drill Regulations. + + +THE BAYONET. + +NOMENCLATURE AND DESCRIPTION. + +11. The bayonet is a cutting and thrusting weapon consisting +of three principal parts, viz, the _blade,_guard_, and +_grip_. + +12. The blade has the following parts: Edge, false edge, back, +grooves, point, and tang. The length of the blade from guard to +point is 16 inches, the edge 14.5 inches, and the false edge +5.6 inches. Length of the rifle, bayonet fixed, is 59.4 inches. +The weight of the bayonet is 1 pound; weight of rifle without +bayonet is 8.69 pounds. The center of gravity of the rifle, with +bayonet fixed, is just in front of the rear sight. + +NOTE.--The use of the hand ax and the pick mattock in organizations +equipped with the intrenching tool is authorized for the purpose +of driving shelter-tent pins. The use of the bayonet for that +purpose is prohibited. + + +I. INSTRUTION WITHOUT THE RIFLE. + +13. The instructor explains the importance of good footwork and +impresses on the men the fact that quickness of foot and suppleness +of body are as important for attack and defense as is the ability +to parry and deliver a strong point or cut. + +14. All foot movements should be made from the position of guard. +As far as practicable, they will be made on the balls of the +feet to insure quickness and agility. No hard and fast rule can +be laid down as to the length of the various foot movements; +this depends entirely on the situations occurring in combat. + +15. The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor +commands: + +1. _Bayonet_exercise_, 2. GUARD. + +At the command GUARD, half face to the right, carry back and +place the right foot about once and a half its length to the +rear and about 3 inches to the right, the feet forming with each +other an angle of about 60°, weight of the body balanced equally +on the balls of the feet, knees slightly bent, palms of hands +on hips, fingers to the front, thumbs to the rear, head erect, +head and eyes straight to the front. + +16. To resume the attention. 1. _Squad_, 2. ATTENTION, The +men take the position of the soldier and fix their attention. + +17. ADVANCE. Advance the left foot quickly about once its length, +follow immediately with the right foot the same distance. + +18. RETIRE. Move the right foot quickly to the rear about once its +length, follow immediately with the left foot the same distance. + +19. 1. _Front_, 2. PASS. Place the right foot quickly about +once its length in front of the left, advance the left foot to +its proper position in front of the right. + +20. 1. _Rear_ 2. PASS, Place the left foot quickly about +once its length in rear of the right, retire the right foot to +its proper position in rear of the left. + +The passes are used to get quickly within striking distance or +to withdraw quickly therefrom. + +21. 1. _Right_, 2. STEP. Step to the right with the right +foot about once its length and place the left foot in its proper +relative position. + +22. 1. _Left_, 2. STEP. Step to the left with the left foot +about once its length and place the right foot in its proper +relative position. + +These steps are used to circle around an enemy, to secure a more +favorable line of attack, or to avoid the opponent's attack. +Better ground or more favorable light may be gained in this way. +In bayonet fencing and in actual combat the foot first moved in +stepping to the right or left is the one which at the moment +bears the least weight. + + +II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE. + +23. The commands for and the execution of the foot movements +are the same as already given for movements without the rifle. + +24. The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor +commands: + +1. _Bayonet_exercise_, 2. GUARD. + +At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 15); +at the same time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp +the rifle with the left hand just below the lower band, fingers +between the stock and gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the +left, the right hand grasping the small of the stock about 6 inches +in front of the right hip, elbows free from the body, bayonet +point at the height of the chin. + +25. 1. _Order_, 2. ARMS. + +Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position +of order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention. + +26. During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses +will he executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after +which they may be executed from any position in which the rifle +is held. + + +ATTACKS. + +27. 1. THRUST. + +Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left +arm, turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the +bayonet at the point to be attacked, butt covering the right +fore-arm. At the same time straighten the right leg vigorously +and throw the weight of the body forward and on the left leg, +the ball of the right foot always on the ground. Guard is resumed +immediately without command. + +The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right +arm, the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at +which the attack should be directed are, in order of their +importance, stomach, chest, head, neck, and limbs. + +28. 1. LUNGE. + +Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left +foot is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must +always be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately +without command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right +foot if for any reason it is desired to hold the ground gained +in lunging. In the latter case the preparatory command FORWARD +will be given. Each method should be practiced. + +29. 1. _Butt_, 2. STRIKE. + +Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of +rifle against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand +at about the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to +pass to the rear on the left side of the head, Guard is resumed +without command. + +[Illustration: Par. 27.] + +[Illustration: Par. 24.] + +The points of attack in their order of importance are head, neck, +stomach, and crotch. + +30. 1. _Cut_, 2. DOWN. + +Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point +of attack. Guard is resumed without command. + +31. 1. _Cut_, 2. RIGHT (LEFT). + +With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right +(left), directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is +resumed without command. + +The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands +of an enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that +the false, or back edge, is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be +executed continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries. + +[Illustration: Par. 28.] + +32. To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier +will change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient +manner, for example: 1. _To_the_right_rear_, 2. _Cut_, +3. DOWN; 1. _To_the_right_, 2. LUNGE; 1. _To_the_left_, +2. THRUST, etc. + +Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement +of the body should be thrown into the attack. In general this +will be best accomplished by turning on the ball of the right +foot. + +These movements constitute a change of front in which the position +of guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. + +[Illustration: Par. 29.] + +33. Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting +and lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against +rings or other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, +suitably suspended at desired heights. + +34. The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by +endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed +by directing the attack against one opening while looking at +another. + +35. The soldier should also experience the effect of actual +resistance offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in +attacks. This will be taught by practicing attacks against a +dummy. + +36. Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit +the execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of +the bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable +dummy can be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in length plaited +closely together into a cable between 6 and 12 in diameter. Old +rope is preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, +shavings, etc. are also suitable. + +[Illustration: Par. 36.] + +[Illustration: Par. 33.] + + +DEFENSES. + +37. In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of +guard is resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men have +become proficient the instructor will cause them to resume the +position of guard instantly without command after the execution +of each parry. + +38. 1. _Parry_, 2. RIGHT. + +Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle +sharply to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point +is about 6 inches to the right. + +39. 1. _Parry_, 2. LEFT. + +Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as +to cover the point attacked. + +40. 1. _Parry_, 2. HIGH. + +Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line +of vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left +front. + +[Illustration: Par. 40.] + +[Illustration: Par. 41.] + +When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may +be supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. +This position will be necessary against attacks from higher +elevations, such as men mounted or on top of parapets. + +41. 1. _Low_parry_, 2. RIGHT (LEFT). + +Carry the point of the bayonet down until it is at the height +of the knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently to the +right (left) to keep the opponent's attacks clear of the point +threatened. + +These parries and rarely used, as an attack below the waist leaves +the head and body exposed. + +[Illustration: Par. 41.] + +[Illustration: Par. 44.] + +42. Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short +motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, +as far as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against +BUTT STRIKE are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover +the point attacked. + +43. To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear the +soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most +convenient maimer: for example: 1. To the left rear, 2. _Parry_, +3. HIGH; 1. To the right, 2. _Parry_, 3. RIGHT, etc. + +These movements constitute a change of front in which the position +of guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. + +In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there +is danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought +to a vertical position. + + +III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET. + +44. 1. _Club_rifle_, 2. SWING. + +[Illustration: Par. 44.] + +Being at order arms, at the preparatory command quickly raise and +turn the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear +sight and muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward +the butt; at the same time raise the rifle above the shoulder +farthest from the opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows +slightly bent and knees straight. Each individual takes such +position of the feet, shoulders, and hands as best accords with +his natural dexterity. SWING. Tighten the grasp of the hands +and swing the rifle to the front and downward, directing it at +the head of the opponent, and immediately return to the position +of club rifle by completing the swing of the rifle downward and +to the rear. Repeat by the command, SWING. + +The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through +any guard or parry that may be interposed. + +Being at CLUB RIFLE, order arms is resumed by command. + +The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is prohibited. + +45. The position of CLUB RIFLE may be taken from any position of +the rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken +in personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude +the use of the bayonet. + + +IV. COMBINED MOVEMENT. + +46. The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous +attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained by the +single movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to +defense and the reverse. Every movement to the front should be +accompanied by an attack, which is increased in effectiveness +by the forward movement of the body. Every movement to the rear +should ordinarily be accompanied by a parry and should always +be followed by an attack. Movements to the right or left may +be accompanied by attacks or defense. + +47. Not more than three movements will be used in any combination. +The instructor should first indicate the number of movements +that are to be combined as TWO MOVEMENTS or THREE MOVEMENTS. +The execution is determined by one command of execution, and +the position of guard is taken upon the completion of the last +movement only. + + +EXAMPLES. + +Front pass and LUNGE. + +Right step and THRUST. + +Left step and low parry RIGHT. + +Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE. + +Lunge and cut RIGHT. + +Parry right and parry HIGH. + +Butt strike and cut DOWN. + +Thrust and parry HIGH. + +Parry high and LUNGE. + +Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT. + +Right step, parry left and cut DOWN. + +To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN. + +To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE. + +48. Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach will +be made against the dummies both in quick time and double time. + + +V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT. + +49. The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught +as far as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet +exercise. + +50. The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme +importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an +attack fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack +before the opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. +Keep the opponent on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, +it is necessary to take the defensive, constantly watch for an +opportunity to assume the offensive and take immediate advantage +of it. + +51. Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing. +Time for this will generally be too limited to permit more than +a single hasty glance. + +52. In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can +be plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon +the point of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, +as in night attacks, watch the movements of his weapon and of +his body. + +53. Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The +point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in +the line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, +to the right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is +for attack or defense. + +54. Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left +hand. His position of guard will not differ materially from that +described in paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a cutting +edge, he will be at a great disadvantage. + +55. The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is particularly +useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a sentry can +strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle. + +56. Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the +muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's energies +will be directed toward getting past the bayonet. Attack him with +short, stabbing thrusts, and keep him beyond striking distance +of his weapon. + +57. The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust +and lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand +and advancing the right as far as possible. When this is done, a +sharp parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, leaving +him exposed to a counter attack, which should follow promptly. + +58. Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage +by grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked +from behind. + +59. In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort +must be made to get on his near or left side, because here his +reach is much shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible +to disable such an enemy, attack his horse and then, renew the +attack on the horseman. + +60. In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can +be best observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his +approach generally brings him against the sky line. When he arrives +within attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well forward +at the middle of his body. + + +VI. FENCING EXERCISES. + +61. Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of +thrusts, parries, and foot movements executed at command or at +will, the opponent replying with suitable parries and returns. + +62. The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment +before the exercise begins and fissure himself that everything +is in such condition as will prevent accidents. + +63. The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order, +facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and +a distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated +as number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense. + +64. The opponents being at the order facing each other, the +instructor commands: SALUTE. + +Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly +to the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended +and joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. +(Two.) Drop the arm smartly by the side. + +This salute is the fencing salute. + +All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals +will begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing +salute. + +65. After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor +commands: 1. _Fencing_exercise_, 2. GUARD. + +At the command GUARD each man comes to the position of guard, +heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet bearing +lightly to the right against the corresponding portion of the +opponent's bayonet. This position is known as the ENGAGE or ENGAGE +RIGHT. + +66. Being at the ENGAGE RIGHT: ENGAGE LEFT. + +The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of +his opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward +and to the right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged +position, each man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against +the corresponding portion of the opponent's bayonet. + +67. Being at ENGAGE LEFT: ENGAGE RIGHT. + +The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of +his opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward +and to the left and engages. + +68. Being engaged: ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT. + +The attack ENGAGE LEFT and then immediately ENGAGES RIGHT. + +69. Being engaged left: ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT. + +The attack ENGAGES RIGHT and then immediately ENGAGES LEFT. + +70. 1. Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT); 2. Number two, COUNTER. + +Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two +quickly drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward +to the original position. + +71. In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage +a certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting +of the play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the +other. This is necessary to prevent the opponent from divining +the intended attack. It also prevents his using the point of +contact as a pivot for his assaults. In charging from one engage +to the other the movement is controlled by the left hand, the +right remaining stationary. + +72. After some exercise in ENGAGE, ENGAGE LEFT, and COUNTER, +exercises will be given in the assaults. + + +ASSAULTS. + +73. The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by +name, as head, neck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be +made below the knees. The commands are given and the movements +for each line are first explained thoroughly by the instructor; +the execution begins at the command ASSAULT. Number one executes +the attack, and number two parries; conversely, at command, number +two attacks and number one parries. + +74. For convenience in instruction ASSAULTS are divided into +SIMPLE ATTACKS, COUNTER ATTACKS, ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE, and FEINTS. + + +SIMPLE ATTACKS. + +75. Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement. +There are three simple attacks--the STRAIGHT, the DISENGAGEMENT, +and the COUNTER DISENGAGEMENT. They are not preceded by a feint. + +76. In the STRAIGHT the bayonet is directed straight at an opening +from the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle +may or may not be abandoned while making it. If the opening be +high or low, contact with the rifle will usually be abandoned +on commencing the attack. If the opening be near his guard, the +light pressure used in the engage may be continued in the attack. + +Example: Being at the ENGAGE RIGHT, 1. Number one, at neck (head, +chest, right leg, etc.), thrust; 2. Number two, parry right; 3. +ASSAULT. + +77. In the DISENGAGEMENT contact with the opponent's rifle is +abandoned and the point of the bayonet is circled under or over +his bayonet or rifle and directed into the opening attacked. +This attack is delivered by one continuous spiral movement of +the bayonet from the moment contact is abandoned. + +Example: Being at the ENGAGE RIGHT, 1. Number one, at stomach +(left chest. left leg, etc.), thrust; 2. Number two, parry left +(etc.); 3. ASSAULT. + +78. In the COUNTER DISENGAGEMENT a swift attack is made into +the opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change +the engagement of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous +spiral movement of the bayonet into the opening. + +Example: Being at the ENGAGE RIGHT, 1. Number two, engage left; +2. Number one, at chest, thrust; 3. Number two, parry left; 4. +ASSAULT. + +Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon +as the opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry. + +79. A COUNTER ATTACK or RETURN is one made instantly after or +in continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as +possible. This makes it more difficult for the opponent to recover +and counter parry. The counter attack should also be made at +or just before the full extension of the opponent's attack, as +when it is so made a simple extension of the arms will generally +be sufficient to reach the opponent's body. + +Example: Being at ENGAGE, 1. Number two, at chest, lunge; 2. +Number one, parry right and at stomach (chest, head, etc.), thrust; +3. ASSAULT. + + +ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE. + +80. These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or disclosing +an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the PRESS, +the BEAT, and the TWIST. + +81. In the PRESS the attack quickly presses against the opponent's +bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as the +attack is delivered. + +Example: Being at the ENGAGE, 1. Number one, press, and at chest, +thrust; 2. Number two, parry right; 3. ASSAULT. + +82. The attack by DISENGAGEMENT is particularly effective following +the PRESS. + +Example: Being at the ENGAGE, 1. Number one, press, and at stomach, +thrust; 2. Number two, low parry left; 3. ASSAULT. + +83. The BEAT is an attack in which a sharp blow is struck against +the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose +an opening into which an attack immediately follows. It is used +when there is but slight opposition or no contact of rifles. + +Example: Being at the ENGAGE, 1. Number one, beat, and at stomach +(chest, etc.), thrust; 2. Number two, parry left; 3. ASSAULT. + +84. In the twist the rifle is crossed over the opponent's rifle +or bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion +and a straight attack made into the opening. It requires superior +strength on the part of the attack. + +Example: Being at the ENGAGE, 1. Number one, twist, and at stomach, +thrust; 2. Number two, low parry left; 3. ASSAULT. + + +FEINTS. + +85. Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and +are made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that exposes +the desired point of attack. They are either single or double, +according to the number of such movements made by the attack. + +86. In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little +force as possible is put into a feint. + +Example: Being at the ENGAGE, 1. Number one, feint head thrust; +at stomach, lunge; 2. Number two, parry right and low parry right; +3. ASSAULT. + +Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two +executes both parries. + +87. In double feints first one part of the body and then another +is threatened and a third attacked. + +Example: Being at the ENGAGE, 1. Number one, feint straight thrust +at chest; disengagement at chest; at stomach, lunge; 2. Number +two, parry right, parry left, and low parry left; 3. ASSAULT. + +88. An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in +the PRESS or BEAT. + +89. In fencing exercises every FEINT should at first be parried. +When the defense is able to judge or divine the character of the +attack the feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified +by a counter feint. + +90. A COUNTER FEINT is a feint following the opponent's feint or +following a PARRY of his attack and generally occurs in combined +movements. + + +COMBINED MOVEMENTS. + +91. When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the various +foot movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the +instructor combines several of them and gives the commands in +quick succession, increasing the rapidity and number of movements +as the men become more skillful. Opponents will be changed +frequently. + +1. Example: Being at the ENGAGE. 1. Number one, by disengagement +at chest, thrust; 2. Number two, parry left, right step (left +foot first), and lunge; 3. ASSAULT. + +2. Example: Being at ENGAGE LEFT, 1. Number one, press and lunge; +2. Number two, parry right, left step, and thrust; 3. ASSAULT. + +3. Example: Being at the ENGAGE, 1. Number one, by disengagement +at chest, thrust; 2. Number two, parry left, front pass, and +at head butt strike; 3. Number one, right step; 4. ASSAULT. + +92. Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as CROSS +COUNTERS, and example No. 3 of movements known as CLOSE COUNTERS. + +93. A CHANCERY is an attack by means of which the opponent is +disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which +disables his weapon. + +94. When the different combinations are executed with sufficient +skill the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized +and executed at the command ASSAULT. The accuracy and celerity +of the movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, +with a view to the correction of faulty execution. + +95. It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, but +to leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity +of instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord +with the object of the drill. + + +VII. FENCING AT WILL. + +96. As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed +to the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between +two men, each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being +hit himself. Fencing at will should not be allowed to degenerate +into random attacks and defenses. + +97. The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at +a time. Frequent changes should be made so that the men may earn +different methods of attack and defense from each other. + +98. The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with +a view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards +everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of +the movements, and quick perception of the adversary's intentions. + +99. Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent +dodging to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive should +he continually encouraged. + +100. In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents +facing each other at the position of order arms, salute. They +then immediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard +rifles engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard before +his opponent has completed his salute. The choice of position +is decided before the salute. + +101. The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing +salute having been rendered, the instructor commands 1. _At_ +_will_, 2. ASSAULT, after which either party has the right +to attack. To interrupt the contest the instructor will command +HALT, at which the combatants will immediately come to the order. +To terminate the contest, the instructor will command, 1. +_Halt_, 2 SALUTE, at which the combatants will immediately +come to the order, salute, and remove their masks. + +102. When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one +opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick +time at CHARGE BAYONET, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, +and deliver an attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent +the instructor commands, HALT, and the assault terminates. Opponents +alternate in assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to +advance at double time from a distance not exceeding 20 yards +and at a run from a distance not exceeding 30 yards. + +103. The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide +doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest +indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will +comment on the action of both parties, point out errors and +deficiencies and explain how they may be avoided in the future. + +104. As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield +the rifle left handed, that is on the left side of the body, +left hand at the small of the stock. Many men will be able to +use this method to advantage. It is also of value in case the +left band is wounded. + +[Illustration: Par. 104.] + +105. After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given +in fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When +practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this character. + +In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number +of umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn +at once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group +having the numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute +is not required in group fencing. + + +RULES FOR FENCING AT WILL. + +106. 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. +No hit counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has +sufficient force to disable. + +2. Upon receiving a hit, call out "hit." + +3. After receiving a fair hit a counter attack is not permitted. +A position of engage is taken. + +4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted +only when the first hit was not called. + +5. When it is necessary to stop the contest--for example, because +of breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection--take +the position of the order. + +6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it +will not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition +to defend himself. + +7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing. + +8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit. + + +SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT WILL. + +107. When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's +position and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to +discover, if possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw +the adversary out and induce him to expose that part of the body +at which the attack is to be made, it is advisable to simulate +an attack by a feint and then make the real attack. + +108. Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are +difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach and +more exposed. The return can be made a continuation of the parry, +as there is no previous warning of its delivery, although it +should always be expected. Returns are made without lunging if +the adversary can be reached by thrusts or cuts. + +109. Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without +knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit +and leads to instinctive returns--that is, habitual returns with +certain attacks from certain parries--a fault which the skilled +opponent will soon discover. + +110. Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and lunging. + +111. The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as +many forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible. +Complicated and intricate movements should not be attempted. + + +HINTS FOR INSTRUCTORS. + +112. The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master +of his weapon, not only to show the various movements, but also +to lead in the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of +the men and arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify +themselves as instructors by fencing with each other. + +113. The character of each man, his bodily conformation, and +his degree of skill must always be taken into account. When the +instructor is demonstrating the combinations, feints, returns, +and parries the rapidity of his attack should be regulated by +the skill of the pupil and no more force than is necessary should +be used. If the pupil exposes himself too much in the feints +and parries, the instructor will, by an attack, convince him of +his error; but if these returns be too swiftly or too strongly +made the pupil will become overcautious and the precision of +his attack will be impaired. The object is to teach the pupil, +not to give exhibitions of superior skill. + +114. Occasionally the instructor should leave himself uncovered +and fail to parry, in order to teach the pupil to take quick +advantage of such opportunities. + + +SUGGESTIONS. + +Instruction in bayonet exercise and bayonet fencing should be +conducted with a view to teaching the aggressive use of the bayonet. +Unless troops are so thoroughly trained with the bayonet that +they believe that with it they are superior to their opponents +it will be difficult or impossible to develop that morale which +is necessary for a successful assault. Men should be impressed +with the importance of acting always on the offensive in bayonet +combat, of pushing their attack with all their might. Troops which +are successful in their first few bayonet encounters will seldom +thereafter be called upon to use the bayonet--their opponents +will not await the assault. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +FIELD SERVICE. + + +SECTION 1. PRINCIPLES OF INFANTRY TRAINING. + +Inaction gives every advantage to the enemy. + +The offensive alone gives decisive results. + +A quick and energetic offensive minimizes losses. + +An advance against the enemy's position once entered upon must +be continued. To go back under fire is to die. + +The best way to hold down the fire of the enemy and to diminish +his power to inflict losses is to bring the position he occupies +under well conducted and continued fire. + +Present as small a target as possible to the enemy by utilizing +every bit of cover the ground affords. + +Individual skill in marksmanship is an advantage in battle only +when united with fire discipline and control. + +Constant movement to the front lessens the effect of the enemy's +fire. Modern battles fought in the open show that the heaviest +losses are in the mid and long ranges. When close range is reached +the losses diminish rapidly. + +The best protection against artillery fire is a constant but +irregular movement to the front. When close to the enemy's position +his fire is least effective. + +A knowledge of how to use the bayonet and the will to use it must +often be the deciding factors in battle. + +Finally: + +In infantry training we can not go far wrong or fail to accomplish +the best results if we keep before our minds the spirit as well as +the wording of paragraph 352 of the Infantry Drill Regulations: +"The duties of infantry are many and difficult. All infantry +must be fit to cope with all conditions that may arise. Modern +war requires but one kind of infantry--good infantry." + + +SECTION 2. COMBAT. + +The field of battle is the final test of the instruction, discipline, +and efficiency of the fighting force of any army. + +The battalion is the attack unit or the defense unit, whether +operating alone or as part of a regiment. The companies constitute +the firing line and the support. + +An individual soldier is concerned only with the enemy in his +immediate front, in obeying orders, and instinctively doing what +he has been trained to do. + +The one requisite necessary to win the battle is intelligent +team work. The army is handled just like a football team. A part +is on the first line facing the enemy. Another part, like the +half backs, is held back as supports. Another part, like the +full backs, is held as a reserve. Each unit, like each player, +has a certain duty to perform. When the signal is given, all +work together--all play the game--team work. The players consist +of all branches of the service. + +The same rule holds true down to the smallest unit and even to +the individual enlisted man. Each regiment is a team composed +of three players--each a battalion. Each battalion is a team of +four players--each a company. In the same manner each company +is a team of two or more platoons; each platoon a team of two +or more squads; and last, but not least, each squad is a team +of eight players. + +The one question that always presents itself on the battlefield +every minute of the time to every person, whether he be a general +or a private, is "What play has my team captain ordered, and +how best may I act so as to work in conjunction with the other +players to bring about the desired result?"--team play. + +To the Infantry private this means-- + +First. Prompt and loyal obedience to the squad leader. Every +squad always has a team captain. If the squad leader is killed or +disabled, another player previously designated takes his place. +If no one was designated, then the private with the longest service +takes command. When the squad leader gives the command for a +certain play, don't stop to think if the play is a good one, +but do your very best to carry ont the play as ordered. A poor +play in which every player enters with his whole heart (team +work) will often win, while, on the other hand, the best play in +which some of the players are skulkers and shirkers will probably +fail. + +Second. Never lose touch with your squad. Every individual, as +well as every unit, should always be acting under the control +of some higher commander. This is necessary if there is to be +any unity of action. Therefore if you lose your squad, or it +becomes broken up, join the first squad you can find and obey +your new squad leader as loyally and as cheerfully as you did +your own. + +Infantry approaches the battle field in columns of squads. While +yet several miles from the enemy's position the troops may come +under artillery fire. On green men entering upon their fight, +the sound of the projectile whistling through the air, the noise, +flash, and smoke on the burst of the shrapnel, and the hum of +the various pieces thereafter, all produce a very terrifying +effect, but old soldiers soon learn to pay little attention to +this, as the danger is not great. + +As the troops advance, the column breaks up into smaller columns, +which form on an irregular line with more or less interval between. +As the advance continues each column breaks up into smaller columns +until finally a line of skirmishers is formed. + +Firing is delayed as long as possible for three reasons, viz: +(a) At the extreme ranges little damage can be done on the +enemy, and ineffective firing always encourages him; (b) +halting to fire delays the advance, and the great object to be +accomplished is to close in on the enemy where you can meet him +on better terms; (c) plenty of ammunition will be required +at the decisive stage of the fight, and it is very difficult to +send extra ammunition up to the firing line. Therefore never +fire until ordered to do so, and then never fire more than the +number of rounds designated. Never fire after the command "cease +firing" is given. + +Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first. +Thirty rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be +held as a reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer. + +Soon, however, it will be necessary to halt and open fire on +the enemy in order to cause him some loss, to make his riflemen +keep down in their trenches, and to make them fire wildly. It +is probable that at this time and until you arrive much closer +you will not see any of the enemy to fire at. You may not even +see any trenches nor know just where the enemy is. Your higher +officers, however, with their field glasses and the messages +they receive, will know. Each company will be assigned a certain +front to cover with its fire. Therefore be careful to fix your +sights at the designated range and fire only at the designated +target. This means team work in firing, which is one of the most +important elements of success. + +The firing line advances from position to position by means of +rushes. At long range the entire line may rush forward at the +same time, but as the range decreases one part of the line rushes +forward while the remainder keeps up a hot fire on the enemy. +The number taking part in each rush decreases as the fire of +the enemy becomes warmer, until perhaps only one squad, or even +less, rushes or crawls forward at a time, protected by the fire +of the rest of the company. The distance covered by each rush +also becomes less and less. After any rush no part of the line +again advances until the rest of the line is up. In making a +rush, the leader of the unit gives the signal and leads the way. +The rest follow. No attempt is made to keep a line, but each man +rushes forward at a run, seeking only to reach the new halting +position as quickly and with as little exposure as possible. +When halted, the skirmishers need not be in a perfect line, but +every advantage should be taken of the ground for concealment +and protection. It is necessary only that no man or group of +men should interfere with the fire of other parts of the firing +line. + +The noise on the firing line will be great. Leaders will be disabled +and new men will take their places. Reinforcements coming up will +cause units to become mixed. To the green man everything may appear +to be in confusion, but this is not so. This is war as it really +is. If you have lost your squad or your squad leader, join the +leader nearest to you. This is the way the game is played. + +As long as the fight lasts every available rifleman must be kept +in the firing line. The first and last consideration is to win +the battle. Therefore, under no circumstances will any soldier be +permitted to go to the rear, either for ammunition or to assist +the wounded. + +If the attacking force can no longer advance, it is much safer to +throw up hasty intrenchments and await the arrival of reinforcements +or darkness than it is to retreat. Retreating troops are the one +that suffer the greatest. This lesson is taught by every great +war. Therefore, always remember that the safest thing to do is +to stick to firing line. + +Troops on the firing line, when not actually engaged in firing +at the enemy, busy themselves throwing up shelter trenches. It +only requires a few minutes to construct a trench that gives +great protection. Therefore, never get separated from your +intrenching tool. + +Concealment is no less important than protection. Therefore, +when conditions permit, as is generally the case when on the +defensive, every effort should be made to hide intrenchments by +the use of sod, grass, weeds, bushes, etc. + +In making an attack the infantry is always supported when possible +by its own artillery, which continues to fire over its head until +the infantry arrives very close to the enemy's trenches. This +fire is helping you a great deal by keeping down the fire of +the enemies infantry and artillery. Therefore, don't think you +are being fired into by your own artillery because you hear their +shells and shrapnel singing through the air or bursting a short +distance in your front, but rather be thankful you are receiving +their help up to the very last minute. + +In the last rush which carries the enemy's position there is +always much mixing of units. The firing line does not continue +rushing madly as individuals after the enemy, but halts and fires +on him until he gets out of good range. The pursuit is taken +up by formed troops held in reserve or by the firing line only +after its units are again gotten together. + +As the fighting often lasts all day, and great suffering is caused +from thirst, don't throwaway your canteen when the fight commences. +It may also be impossible to get rations up to the line during +the night. Therefore, it is advisable to hold onto at least one +ration. + +As the recent war has shown the possibility of hand-to-hand fighting, +especially at night, each soldier should be schooled in the use +of the bayonet. + +The following has particular reference to the duties of platoon +and squad leaders and to the team work of the platoon in combat: + +Attacking troops must first gain fire superiority in order to +reach the hostile position. By gaining fire superiority is meant +making one's fire superior to that of the enemy in volume and +accuracy, and it depends upon the number of rifles employed, +the rate of fire, the character of the target, training and +discipline, and fire direction and control. When the fire of the +attackers becomes effective and superior to that of the defenders +the latter are no longer able to effectively and coolly aim and +fire at the former, and, as a consequence, the attackers are +able to inaugurate a successful rush or advance which carries +them nearer to the enemy's position. + +When a trained organization has been committed to the attack, +the gaining of fire superiority depends upon the way in which +fire direction and fire control are exercised. + +The captain directs the fire of the company. He indicates to +the platoon commanders the target (enemy) which the company is +to fire and advance upon, and tells each upon which part of this +target he is to direct the fire of his platoon. When he desires +the fire to be opened he gives the necessary commands or signals, +including the range at which the sights lire to be set. + +When the fire fight has once started it becomes to a great extent +a fight of a number of platoons. The platoon is the largest +organization which can be controlled by a single leader in action. +The platoon commander (lieutenant or sergeant) controls its fire +in order to gain the maximum fire effect and to avoid wasting +ammunition. He must try his best to make the fire of his platoon +effective, to get it forward, and to support neighboring platoons +in their effort to advance. At the same time he must hold himself +subject to his captain's directions. He should take advantage +of every chance to carry his platoon forward unless otherwise +ordered. In all this he is assisted by his platoon guide (sergeant) +and by his corporals. + +At the commencement of an engagement the platoon commander will +give the objective (part of the enemy's line or aiming target) at +which his platoon is to direct its fire. Noncommissioned officers +must be sure that they see and understand the objective, and that +all the men in their squads do likewise. Fire is then directed at +this objective without further command until the platoon commander +gives a new objective. + +Men should be instructed to aim at that part of the target assigned +to their platoon which corresponds with their own position in +their own platoon, so that there will be no portion of the target +which is not covered by fire. A portion of the enemy's line not +covered by fire means that that portion is able to coolly aim +and fire at their opponents. + +In an engagement the voice can seldom be heard over a few feet, +and the platoon commander will generally have to convey his orders +by signals. A corporal may be able to shout orders to his squad, +and orders may be repeated along a skirmish line by shouting. +Care should be taken that orders intended for one platoon only +are not thus conveyed to another platoon. + +A short blast on the whistle, given by the platoon commander, +means "Attention to Orders." All noncommissioned officers at +once suspend firing and glance toward the platoon commander to +see if the latter has any signals or orders for them. If not, +they resume firing. A long blast on the whistle means "Suspend +Firing." When a noncommissioned officer hears this signal from +his platoon commander he should at once shout "Suspend Firing." +Upon receiving a signal, the noncommissioned officer for whom +it is intended should at once repeat it back, to be sure that +it is correctly understood. + +When a leader in command of a platoon or squad receives an order +or signal to rush, he should cause his men to suspend firing and +to hold themselves flat but ready for a sprinter's start. He +selects the point, as far as possible with reference to cover, +to which he intends to carry his unit forward. He then gives the +command "RUSH," springs forward, and running at full speed about +three paces ahead of his men, leads them in the rush. Arriving +at the position he has selected, he throws himself prone, and +the men drop on either side of him. All crawl forward to good +firing positions, considering the cover also, and the leader +gives the necessary orders for resuming the fire. The latter +will include giving the range again, the length of the rush being +subtracted from the sight setting ordered at the last position. + +As a rule, rushes should be started by a unit on one flank, and +should be followed in succession by the other units to the opposite +flank. Each succeeding unit should halt on the line established +by the unit which first rushed. When a unit is about to rush, +leaders in charge of adjacent units should caution their men to +be careful not to fire into the rushing unit as it bounds forward. + +When one unit suspends fire for the purpose of rushing, adjacent +leaders should arrange to have a portion of their men turn their +fire on the target of the rushing unit, to the end that there +may be no portion of the enemy's line not under fire and able +to fire coolly on the rushing unit. + +Rushes should be made for as long a distance as possible, due +regard being had for the wind of the men and not to get beyond +supporting distance of the other units. Long rushes facilitate an +advance, and quickly place a skirmish line close to the enemy's +position, where its fire will have more effect. An attacking +line suffers less from casualties at short ranges than it does +at mid range. + +Every advantage should be taken to utilize the cover available. +The best kind of cover is that which, while it masks the skirmishers +from the sight and fire of the enemy, affords favorable conditions +for firing and for readily advancing. In order to allow men to +regain their wind, or should the fire of the enemy be so effective +as to prevent a further advance without reinforcement, advantage +may be taken to lie close in cover, or hasty fire trenches may be +thrown up in order to allow the line to maintain its position. +"To go back under fire is to die." + +When a platoon is firing, all noncommissioned officers watch +every opportunity to make the fire more effective. The platoon +guide should constantly watch the men to see that they do not +become excited, fire too hastily or without aim, that their sights +are set at the correct range, that they are obviously firing +at the designated target, and that they assume steady firing +positions and take advantage of cover. In performing these duties +it may be necessary for the guides to be constantly crawling +along the line. A corporal in like manner supervises his squad, +firing with it when he is not actively engaged in controlling +it. + +Bayonets are fixed preparatory to a charge. This command is usually +given by the bugle. Only one or two men in each squad should +fix their bayonets at the same time, in order that there may +be no marked pause or diminution in the fire at this critical +stage of the engagement. + +In order to be effective in combat, the platoon must be thoroughly +trained to work as a team. Each noncommissioned officer must be +conversant with the signals and commands and the proper methods +for instantly putting into effect the orders of his platoon +commander. Each private must be trained until he instinctively +does the right thing in each phase of the action. + + +SECTION 3. PATROLLING. + +The designation of a patrol indicates the nature of the duty for +which it is detailed, as, for example, visiting, reconnoitering, +exploring, flanking, combat, harassing, pursuing, etc. An Infantry +patrol consists, as a rule, of from 3 to 16 men. + +Reconnoitering patrols are habitually small and seek safety in +concealment or flight, fighting only when their mission demands +it. The most skillful reconnaissance is where patrols accomplish +their mission and return without being discovered by the enemy. +When resistance is expected stronger detachments are required. +These cover themselves with small patrols of two to four men, +the remainder acting as support. + +The commander determines the number and strength of patrols and +when they are to be sent out. It is a cardinal principle to send +out patrols of such strength only as will accomplish the object. + +The officer sending out the patrol verifies the detail, designates +a second in command, and gives the necessary instruction. The +orders or instructions for a patrol, or for any detachment going +on reconnoissance, must state clearly where the enemy is or is +supposed to be, what information is desired, what features are +of special importance, the general direction to be followed, +whether friendly patrols are liable to be encountered, and where +messages are to be sent or the patrol is to report. Important and +comprehensive instructions should be in writing, but precautions +against capture of papers must be taken. An officer sending out a +patrol must be certain that his orders are understood. Detailed +instructions are, as a rule, avoided. When necessary the time +of return is stated. + +The patrol leader should be selected with care. He should have +good judgment, courage, be able to read maps, make sketches, +and send clear and concise messages. In addition to his ordinary +equipment, he should have a map of the country, a watch, field +glass, compass, whistle, message blanks, and pencils. + +The leader of a patrol should carefully inspect it before starting +out and see that each member is in good physical condition, has +serviceable shoes, a full canteen, one ration, a first-aid packet, +and that his rifle and ammunition are in good condition. He will +see that the equipment is arranged so as not to rattle; that +nothing bright is exposed so as to glitter in the sunlight; that +nothing is taken along that will give information to the enemy +should any member fall into his hands, as, for example, copies +of orders, maps with position of troops marked thereon, letters, +newspapers, or collar ornaments. Blanket rolls should generally +be left behind, in order that the patrol may travel as light +as possible. + +The leader then gives his patrol information and instructions. +These embrace instructions from higher authority; his detailed +plans; information of the country and enemy; the countersign, +if any; the point where the patrol will assemble if scattered. +He will see that the men understand the prescribed signals. + +It must always be remembered that it makes no difference how +valuable may be the information that the patrol gets, it is worthless +if not sent back in time to be of service. Herein is where most +patrols full. This applies particularly to the information obtained +by patrols acting as a point or flankers of advance, rear, and +flank guards. Whenever the patrol gets any information, the leader +must think whether the commanding officer would change his plans +or issue new orders if he had the information. If he would, the +information should be sent back at once. If the distance is great +or the inhabitants are hostile, it is well to send two men with +the message. These men should not travel side by side, but as +a patrol of two men. If the information is very important, and +the danger of capture is considerable, the message should be +sent by two parties, each traveling by a different route. + +A message from a patrol should always show (a) the place from +which it is sent; (b) the time it is sent (date, hour, and minute); +(c) to whom it is sent; (d) the message itself; (e) what the +patrol intends doing after sending the message; (f) the name of +the sender. Under (d) care must be taken to separate what has +actually been seen by the patrol from information received from +other sources. Care must also be taken not to exaggerate what is +seen, but to report only the exact facts. + +In their conduct patrols exercise the greatest vigilance to prevent +discovery. No formal formation is or should be prescribed. Under +the leader's guidance it moves so as to guard against surprise, +usually with point and flankers. To extend the sphere of its +observation, still smaller patrols (one or two men) may be sent +out for short distances, communication with the leader being +maintained by signals. Whatever the formation adopted, it should +favor the escape of at least one man in case of surprise. + +In patrols of two to five men the commander generally leads. +In this formation few signals are necessary, the men simply +regulating their movements by his. + +In questioning civilians caution is observed not to disclose +information that may be of value to the enemy. Strangers are +not allowed to precede the patrol. Patrol lenders are authorized +to seize telegrams and mail matter, and to arrest individuals, +reporting the facts as soon as possible. + +Patrols should observe everything for signs of the enemy. Even +apparent trifles may be of great value. The finding of a collar +ornament showing a man's regiment may enable the chief of staff +to determine that the enemy has been reenforced. + +Patrols should not travel on the main roads if they can observe +them and at the same time make the necessary progress by moving +some distance to the side of the roads. + +Unless in case of attack or of great personal danger, no member +of the patrol should fire on hostile troops without orders from +the patrol leader. When sent out to gain information, patrols +should avoid fighting unless it is absolutely necessary in order +to carry out their orders. + +Villages and inclosures involving danger of surprise are entered +with precaution, and for brief periods only. Halts are made at +points affording good view, and the country is studied in all +directions, landmarks to the rear being impressed on the minds +of the men so that the way back can be readily found; the leader +consults his map and locates himself thereon. + +When a patrol is scattered it reassembles at some place previously +selected; if checked in one direction, it takes another; if cut +off, it returns by a detour or forces its way through. As a last +resort, it scatters so that at least one man may return with +information. Patrols nearing their own lines should march at a +walk unless pressed by the enemy. + +Occasionally it is advisable fur the leader to conceal his patrol +and continue the reconnoissance with one or two companions. + +Patrols far from their commands or in contact with the enemy +often remain out overnight. In such cases they seek a place of +concealment, proceeding thereto after nightfall or under cover. + +When the enemy is encountered it is very necessary to locate his +main force. Information is particularly desired of his strength, +whether he has infantry, cavalry, and artillery, the route and +direction of his march, or the location of his camp and line +of outposts. + +Dust clouds indicate moving bodies. Infantry raises a low, thick +cloud; cavalry a high thin cloud; artillery and wagons a broken +cloud. The kind of troops, direction of march, and approximate +strength may thus sometimes be roughly estimated. If from some +position a body of troops can be seen marching along in column, +the exact time in minutes and seconds it requires for them to +pas a certain point should be noted, together with the formation +they are in, thus: Infantry, column of squads, three minutes and +twelve seconds; cavalry, columns of twos at a trot, one minute +and twenty seconds; wagons, four-mule, five minutes. From this +information the strength can be determined by the following rule: + +Assuming that infantry in column of squads occupy half a yard +per man, cavalry in column of fours 1 yard per man, and artillery +and wagons in single column 20 yards per gun, caisson, or wagon, +a given point would be passed in one minute by about-- + + 175 infantry. + 110 cavalry at a walk. + 200 cavalry at a trot. + 5 guns, caissons, or wagons. + +For troops in column of twos, take one-half of the above estimate. + +Patrols should always observe the country marched over, with a +view to making a report on the same. The following information +is always of value: + +ROADS.--Direction; kind, whether dirt, gravel, macadam, etc.; +width, whether suitable for column of squads, etc.; border, whether +fenced with stone, barbed, wire, rails, etc.; steepness in crossing +hills and valleys; where they pass through defiles and along +commanding heights. etc.; crossroads. + +SURROUNDING COUNTRY.--Whether generally open and passable for +infantry, cavalry, and artillery, or whether broken and impassable, +due to fences, woods, crops, ravines, etc. + +RAILROADS.--Single or double track, narrow or broad gauge, tunnels, +bridges, cuts, direction, stations, etc. + +BRIDGES.--Material, wood, stone, steel, etc.: length and breadth; +number and kind of piers or supports. + +RIVERS.--Direction; width, depth; kind of bottom, such as mud, +sand, rocky, etc.: banks, steep or gentle, open or wooded; rapidity +of current; variations in depth at different times as indicated +by driftwood and high-water marks; islands; heights in vicinity +commanding streams. + +WOODS.--Extent and shape; kind of trees; free from underbrush +or not; clearings, roads, swamps, ravines, etc. + +TELEGRAPH LINES.--Number of wires, along ronds or railroads, +stations, etc. + +VILLAGES.--Size, kind of houses, nature of streets, means of defense, +etc. + +HILLS AND RIDGES.--Whether slopes are gentle or steep; whether top +is narrow or wide; whether ground is broken or smooth, wooded or +clear; whether difficult or easy to cross, etc.; whether commanded +by other hills. + +DEFILES.--Their direction, length, and width; whether surrounding +heights are passable for infantry and artillery; kind of country +at each opening of the defile, etc. + +RAVINES, DITCHES, ETC.--Width and depth; banks, whether passable +for infantry, cavalry, and wagons; whether suitable for trenches, +or for movement of troops therein, etc. + +In general, every soldier should be constantly on the lookout to +obtain information that might be of some military value. Remember +that information of the enemy and of the country is worthless +unless made known to the proper officials in time to be of use. + +Every soldier should be able to find his way in a strange country; +should know how to use a compass; should know how to locate the +North Star; should be able to travel across country, keeping +a given direction, both by day and by night, and by observing +landmarks he should be able to return to the starting point either +over the same route or by a more circuitous one. This can easily +be learned by a little practice. + +It adds a great deal to the value of a soldier if he knows how +to use a map to find his way. If he knows how to make a rough +sketch of the country, showing the position of roads, streams, +woods, railroads, bridges, houses, villages, fields, fences, +hills, etc., he has added to his value as a soldier very much, +indeed, because a rough sketch of a country will give more and +better information at a glance than can be obtained by reading +many pages of written description. + +PATROLLING is one of the most important duties a soldier can +learn. Any enlisted man who understands thoroughly his duties as +a member of a patrol will understand also most of his duties when +with advance or rear guards or when on outpost duty. Patrolling +can not be learned merely by reading books nor by work indoors. +Thoroughness comes only by actually going out in the country +and acting as a patrol. + +In carrying out this idea the following scheme is recommended: + +Let four or more men and a noncommissioned officer act as a patrol. +They assemble at a certain time, at a convenient point on some +country road. An officer, whom we will call Captain A, acts as +the director; the noncommissioned officer, whom we will call +Sergeant B, acts as patrol leader; and the others (Privates C, +D, E, etc.) act as members of Sergeant B's patrol. + +Assume that the company (battalion. etc.) has just made camp in +this vicinity find that the inhabitants are friendly (or hostile). + +Captain A indicates to the rest of the men where the camp is +situated and points out where the various sentinels are posted. +(This in itself affords an opportunity for much discussion and +for teaching many valuable lessons.) + +Captain A then calls up Sergeant B and tells him-- + +(a) Just what information Captain A has of the enemy, +and also any information of the country or of friendly troops +in the vicinity that might be of service to Sergeant B. + +(b) How many men he shall take for the patrol (this is +another problem for Captain A to solve). Any men present not +used as part of the patrol go along with Captain A as observers. + +(c) How far he shall go and what country he shall cover +with the patrol. + +(d) Just what information it is particularly desired he +shall obtain. + +(e) Where he shall send his messages and when he shall +return. + +Example 1: + +"Sergeant B, it has just been reported to me that a company of +hostile infantry was in camp last night at X, about 5 miles from +here on this road. Take 5 men and proceed toward X and find out +whether the enemy is still there, and if not, when he left and +where he went. Send messages to me here, and return by 8 o'clock +this evening." + +Example 2: + +"Sergeant B, I think I heard the firing of field guns over in +that direction a short while ago. Take 6 men and proceed to that +high hill you see over there about 4 miles away. Send a message to +me here when you reach there. You may go farther if you then think +it advisable, but return before daylight. I desire particularly to +know if there are any hostile troops in this vicinity, especially +artillery. I shall send Sergeant X with 3 men to observe the +country from that hill you see over there farther to the south. +He will remain there till dark. Send messages to me here. If +the company is not here on your return you will find a note for +you underneath this rail." + +Example 3: + +"Sergeant B, this friendly country boy has just reported that +four hostile cavalrymen stopped about half an hour ago at his +father's house, which he says is about 2 miles up this road. +One of the men seemed to be very sick. You will select eight +men from your section and endeavor to capture these men. If they +have disappeared you will reconnoiter in that vicinity until dark. +This boy will accompany you as a guide. I desire particularly to +learn the position, strength, and composition of any hostile +troops in this vicinity. Send reports to me here. Return before +daylight." + +Example 4: + +"Sergeant B, here is a map of the country in this vicinity on +a scale of 1 inch to the mile. Here is where we are camped +[indicating position on map]. I have just learned that foraging +parties of the enemy are collecting supplies over here at X +[indicating point on map], which is 10 miles off in that direction +[pointing across country toward X]. It is reported that this +bridge over this stream [indicating same on the map] which is +about 3 miles down this road [indicating road and direction on +the ground], has been destroyed. You will take three men from +your platoon and verify this report. You will also reconnoiter +the stream for a distance of 1 mile both above and below the +bridge for fords suitable for infantry. Messages will reach me +here. Return by 8 o'clock to-night." + +Sergeant B then inspects his men and gives them their instructions. +The patrol is then formed and moves out exactly as it would under +actual war conditions. + +Captain A may halt (and assemble if desirable) the patrol at +intervals in order to discuss the formation used and the movement +of any members of the patrol, their route, use of cover, etc., +with the reasons therefor, and compare the same with suggested +modifications of the formations, etc. After the discussion, the +patrol is again set in motion. Captain A may accompany any part +of the patrol. From time to time he presents certain situations +to some member of the patrol, being very careful to assume only +such situations as might naturally occur. + +Thus, take Example 1: + +Captain A is with Sergeant B, who, with Private C, is marching +along the road as the point of the patrol. The other members of +the patrol are distributed to suit the nature of the country +over which the patrol is marching. The point has just reached a +ridge beyond which the country is open and cultivated for about +half a mile. Beyond this the road enters a woods. Captain A now +says: "Sergeant B, from this point you see two soldiers in khaki +on the road there at the beginning of that cornfield about 200 +yards from the woods [points out same]. They are moving in this +direction. About 200 yards to the right of these find somewhat +farther to their rear you see two more men moving along that +rail fence." + +Sergeant B now does exactly as he would do in actual war. How +does he signal to his patrol? Does he assemble his men? If so, +how and where? Does he send a message back to camp; and if so, +by whom, and is it written or verbal? (If written, Sergeant B +actually writes it and delivers it to Private ----, with the +necessary instructions. If verbal, it is actually given to Private +---- with instructions.) Captain A must in this case make notes +of what the message was. In either case, Private ---- ceases to +be a member of the patrol and joins Captain A as an observer. +He should, however, at some later time be required to repeat his +message to Captain A, on the assumption that he had reached camp +with the same. The message, whether oral or written, should be +thoroughly analyzed and discussed. Was it proper to send a message +at this time? Does Sergeant B intend to remain in observation; if +so, how long? (Captain A can give such information from time to +time concerning the hostile patrol as Sergeant B might reasonably +be supposed to learn in view of his dispositions. In order that +Captain A may present natural assumptions, it is very essential +that in his own mind he should, at the outset, assume a situation +for the hostile forces and that he should consider himself as +in command of all hostile troops. In this particular case he +should assume himself to be in command of the hostile patrol, +acting under certain specified orders similar to examples given, +and he should conduct this patrol in his own mind in accordance +with these orders, giving Sergeant B only such information as +he might reasonably be expected to obtain in view of whatever +action Sergeant B takes.) Will Sergeant B attempt to capture this +patrol? If so, how? Will he avoid fighting and attempt to pass +it unobserved; and if so, how and why? + +In this manner the exercise is continued. Care must be taken +not to have the patrol leader or members state what they would +do, but they must actually do it. Explanations and discussions +may take place later. + +In a similar manner the director may inform Sergeant B (or any +member of the patrol) that this hostile patrol is followed by +a squad (on the assumption that it is the leading unit of an +advance guard), and the exercise is then continued along these +lines. + +The following are examples of assumption that might be made and +carried out: + +(a) That the patrol is unexpectedly fired upon. + +(b) That one or more of the patrol is wounded. + +(c) That a prisoner is captured (let an observer act as +prisoner). + +(d) That a friendly inhabitant gives certain information. + +(e) That a dust cloud is seen in the distance over the trees. + +(f) That a column of troops can be seen marching along +a distant road. + +(g) That an abandoned camp is discovered and certain signs +noted. + +(h) That the patrol is attacked by a superior force and +compelled to scatter. + +There is practically no end to the number of reasonable assumptions +that may be made. + +Company officers may use this method of instructing non-commissioned +officers in patrolling, advance and rear guard duty, outposts, +and in squad leading, in writing messages, in selecting positions +for trenches, and in constructing and concealing same. This form +of instruction is called "a tactical walk." It is very greatly +used by all foreign armies. Exercises along the same general +lines are conducted for field and staff officers and even general +officers, and are called "tactical rides" and "strategical rides," +depending upon their object. + +After some proficiency has been attained as a result of these +tactical walks, the greatest interest and enthusiasm can be awakened +in this work by sending out two patrols the same day, one to +operate against the other. Each should wear a distinctive uniform. +The strength of each patrol, its starting point, route to be +followed, and its orders should all be unknown to the other patrol. +If blank ammunition is used, an officer should supervise its +issue and carefully inspect to see that no man carries any ball +cartridges. One umpire should accompany the commander of each +party. Each umpire should be fully informed of the strength, +orders, and route of both patrols. He must, however, carefully +avoid giving suggestions or offering any information to the +commander. Observers in these small maneuver problems are generally +in the way and none should be permitted to be along. + +These small maneuvers may be gradually developed by having one +side establish al outpost or fight a delaying action, etc. + +It should always be remembered that there is no hard and fast +rule prescribing how a patrol of three, five, or any number of +men should march. The same is equally true of advance guards, +and applies also to the establishment of outposts. It is simply +a question of common sense based on military knowledge. Don't +try to remember any diagrams in a book. Think only of what you +have been ordered to do and how best you can handle your men +to accomplish your mission, and at the same time save the men +from any unnecessary hardships. Never use two or more men to do +what one can do just as well, and don't let your men get beyond +your control. + +In addition to the signals prescribed in the Infantry Drill +Regulations, the following should be clearly understood by the +members of a patrol. + +Enemy in sight in small numbers, hold rifle above the head +horizontally; enemy in force, same proceeding, raising and lowering +the rifle several times; take cover, a downward motion of the +hand. + +Other signals may be agreed upon, but they must be familiar to +the men; complicated signals are avoided. Signals must be used +cautiously so as not to convey information to the enemy. + + +SECTION 4. ADVANCE GUARDS. + +The advance guard is a detachment of the main body which precedes +and covers it on the march. The primary duty of an advance guard +is to insure the safe and uninterrupted march of the main body. +Specifically its duties are: + +1. To guard against surprise and furnish information by +reconnoitering. + +2. To push back small parties of the enemy and prevent their +observing, firing upon, or delaying the main body. + +3. To check the enemy's advance in force long enough to permit +the main body to prepare for action. + +4. When the enemy is encountered on the defensive, to seize a +good position and locate his lines, care being taken not to bring +on a general engagement unless the advance guard commander is +empowered to do so. + +5. To remove obstacles, repair the road, and favor in every way +the steady march of the column. + +The strength of the advance guard will vary with the proximity +of the enemy and character of the country; for a regiment it +will generally consist of from two companies to a battalion, +for a battalion of one company; for a company of from a squad +to a platoon. The advance guard commander is responsible for +the proper performance of the duties with which it is charged +and for its conduct and formation. + +The advance guard provides for its security and gains information +by throwing out to the front and flanks smaller bodies. Each part +must keep in touch with the unit from which it is sent out. An +advance guard is generally divided into a reserve and a support; +where it consists of less than a battalion, the reserve is generally +omitted. + +The support sends forward an advance party, which, in turn, sends +forward a point. In small advance guards the point precedes the +advance party about 150 yards, the advance party the support +about 300 yards, and the support the main body about 400 yards. +Where advance guards are large enough to require a reserve these +distances are increased about one-fourth, the reserve following +the support, the main body following the reserve at a distance +varying from 500 to 800 yards. + +Unless the country to the flanks is distinctly visible from the +roads for a distance of what may be said to be effective rifle +fire, approximately 1,000 yards, flanking patrols of two or three +men each should be sent out from the advance party, and, when +in proximity of the enemy, in addition from the support. When +the nature of the country is such that patrols may move across +country without undue effort and fatigue these patrols should +march at a distance of from 200 to 300 yards from the flank of +the body from which detached. For the examination of any object, +such as a wood, buildings, etc., examining patrols should be sent +out from the main body. The usual method of protecting the flanks, +particularly when the country is at all cut up or difficult, is +to send out patrols from time to time to some point from which a +good outlook can be obtained, or which will afford protection to +the enemy. These patrols remain in observation until the advance +guard has passed, when they rejoin the nearest subdivision, as +quickly as possible working their way to that to which they belong +during the halts. By sending out a succession of small patrols in +this manner the flanks are protected. Should the advance party +become depleted, it must be reenforced from the support. + +A battalion acting as advance guard would have two companies +in reserve and two in support. The support would send forward +as advance party two platoons, the advance party in turn sending +forward as point one squad. A company acting as advance guard +would have no reserve and would send forward as advance party +one platoon. + +Cases may arise when the best means of covering the head and +flanks of the column will be by a line of skirmishers extended at +intervals of from 5 to 50 yards, as, for instance, when passing +through high corn, underbrush, etc. + +It must always be remembered that the principal duty of the advance +guard is to secure the uninterrupted march of the main body. If +the point is fired upon, it should at once deploy and endeavor to +advance fighting. The flankers should assist in this and endeavor +to locate the enemy's flank should there be such resistance that +advance was impossible. Each succeeding body should march promptly +forward, and in turn be placed in action, with the idea of clearing +the way for the advance of the main body. Should this be impossible, +the commander of the entire body must determine what measures he +will take. + + +SECTION 5. REAR GUARDS. + +A rear guard is a detachment detailed to protect the main body +from attack in rear. In a retreat it checks pursuit and enables +the main body to increase the distance between it and the enemy +and to re-form if disorganized. The general formation is that +of an advance guard reversed. + +Its commander should take advantage of every favorable opportunity +to delay the pursuers by obstructing the road or by taking up +specially favorable positions from which to force the enemy to +deploy. In this latter case care must be taken not to become so +closely engaged as to render withdrawal unnecessarily difficult. +The position taken should be selected with reference to ease of +withdrawal and ability to bring the enemy under fire at long +ranges. + + +SECTION 6. FLANK GUARDS. + +A flank guard is a detachment detailed to cover the flank of a +column marching past, or across the front of, an enemy. It may +be placed in position to protect the passage, or it may be so +marched as to cover the passage. The object of the flank guard +is to hold the enemy in check long enough to enable the main body +to pass, or, like the advance guard, to enable the main body +to deploy. Like all other detachments, it should be no larger +than is necessary, and should not be detailed except when its +protection is required. + +When a flank guard consists of a regiment or less, its distance +from the main body should not exceed a mile and a half. Practicable +communication must exist between it and the main body. The flank +guard is marched as a separate command; that is, with advance or +rear guards, or both, as circumstances demand, and with patrolling +on the exposed flank. + + +SECTION 7. OUTPOSTS. + +Troops not on the march provide for their security by outposts. +The general duties of an outpost are reconnoissance, observation, +and resistance. + +The specific duties are: + +1. To protect the main body, so that the troops may rest undisturbed. + +2. In case of attack, to check the enemy long enough to enable +the main body to make the necessary dispositions. + +During an advance the outposts are usually detailed from the +advance guard. During the retreat the outpost for the night usually +forms the rear guard the next day. If the command remains in +bivouac, the new outpost generally goes on duty at daybreak. + +The vigilance of outpost troops must be unceasing, but they should +avoid bringing on combats or unnecessarily alarming the command. +Firing disturbs the rest of troops and, if frequently indulged +in, ceases to be a warning. + +No trumpet signals except "to arms" or "to horse" are sounded, +and all unnecessary noises must be avoided. + +As a rule an outpost will not exceed one-sixth the strength of +a command. For a single company a few sentinels and patrols will +suffice; for a larger command a more elaborate system must be +devised. The troops composing the outpost are generally divided +into a reserve and several supports. + +At a proper distance in front of the camp of the main body a +line which offers a good defensive position is selected. This +is called the LINE OF RESISTANCE, and should he so located that +an advancing enemy will be held in check beyond effective rifle +range in case of a small force, artillery range in case of a +large force, of the main body until the latter can deploy. The +reserve is stationed at some point in rear of this line, where +it can be moved quickly to reinforce any point as needed. The +line of resistance is divided into sections, the limits of each of +which are clearly defined. A support is assigned to each section, +which are numbered from right to left, and occupies a position +on or near the line, having special regard to covering avenues +of approach. The position occupied should always be intrenched. +The reserve and supports proceed to their respective positions +by the shortest routes, providing for their own protection by +sending out covering detachments. + +Generally speaking, about one-half the Infantry of the advance +guard should be in the supports. As each support arrives at its +position it sends out observation groups, varying in size from +four men to a platoon, to watch the country in the direction of +the enemy. These groups are called outguards. For convenience +they are classified as pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts, +and should be sufficient in number to cover the front of the +section occupied by the support and connect with the neighboring +supports. + +A picket is a group consisting of two or more squads, ordinarily +not exceeding half a company, posted in the line of outposts +to cover a given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or more +sentinels, sentry squads, or cossack posts for observation. Pickets +are placed at the more important points in the line of outguards, +such as road forks. The strength of each depends upon the number +of small groups required to observe properly its sector. + +A sentry squad is a squad (eight men) posted in observation at +an indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, +the remaining men resting near by and furnishing the reliefs of +sentinels. In some cases it may be required to furnish a patrol. + +A cossack post consists of four men. It is an observation group +similar to a sentry squad, but employs a single sentinel. + +As a rule not more than one-third of the support should be on +outguard duty. As soon as they are sent out to their postions +the support commander selects a defensive position on the line of +resistance; gives instruction for intrenching same; establishes +a sentinel to watch for and transmit signals from outguards; +sends out patrols to reconnoiter the country to the front of +his section and, if on the flank of the line, the flank; and +then proceeds to make a careful reconnoissance of the section +assigned him, rectifying the position of outguards if necessary, +seeing that they understand their instructions in case of attack +or when strangers approach their posts, and pointing out their +lines of retreat in case they are compelled to fall back on the +support. + +When the outguards are established, the members of the support may +stack arms and remove equipment except cartridge belts. No fires +will be built or smoking permitted unless specially authorized, +or no loud talking or other noise. All patrolling to the front +will be done, as a rule, from the support. The support commander +should locate the position of the adjacent supports und make +arrangements with the commanders for the joint defense of the +line of resistance. At nights all roads and trails should be +carefully covered and the country to the front and between adjacent +outguards well patrolled. + +The line occupied by the outguards is called the LINE OF OBSERVATION. +Outguards move to their positions providing for their own protection +and so us to conceal the movement from the enemy. These positions +are intrenched and are numbered from right to left in each support. + +The duties of the outguard are to observe the enemy, to guard +the outpost from surprise, and to make a preliminary resistance +to the enemy's advance. The strength of the outguard will vary +according to its object. When an important road which at night +will afford a line of advance, or a bridge is to be covered, or +when several posts are established from an outguard it should +be of considerable strength, two squads or a platoon. When mere +observation and alarm are all that is required four men will +suffice. A squall is a good unit to use as an outguard; this +will allow one double sentry post of three reliefs and one man in +addition to the commander, who may be used for messenger service. +The outguard should be carefully concealed. + +The utmost quiet should be observed, and there should be no cooking +or smoking. The intervals between outguards will depend upon +the situation and the terrain. The line of observation is not +necessarily continuous, but all avenues of approach must be carefully +guarded. The distance of the outguard from the support likewise +is governed by the terrain, but in general may be said to be +from 300 to 400 yards. In thick country or at night outguards +patrol along the line of observation between posts. Communication +between outguards and the support is by signal and messenger, in +special cases by wire. Members of the outguard retain possession +of their weapons and do not remove their equipment. + +Sentinels from the outguard are posted so as to avoid observation, +but so that they may have a clear lookout and be able to see, +if possible, by day, the sentinels of the adjacent outguards. +Double sentinels are always posted near enough to each other to +communicate easily in ordinary voice. Sentinels are generally +on post two hours out of six. For every sentinel and every patrol +there should be three reliefs, and outguards should be of a strength +sufficient to allow this. The position of a sentinel should be +selected with reference to observation. It may be advantageous +to place a sentinel in a tree. Sentinels furnished by cossack +posts or sentry squads are kept near their group. Those furnished +by their pickets may be kept as far sa 100 yards away. + +Reliefs, visiting patrols, and inspecting officers approach sentinels +from the rear. + +A sentinel on the line of observation should always have the +following instructions: The names of villages, streams, and prominent +features in sight and where the roads lead. The number (if any) of +his post, and the number of his and of the adjoining outguards; +the position of the support; the line of retreat to be followed if +the outguard is compelled to fall back; the position of advance +detachments and whether friendly patrols are operating in front; +to watch to the front and flanks without intermission and devote +special attention to unusual or suspicious occurrences; if he +sees indications of the enemy, to at once notify his immediate +superior; in case of imminent danger, or when an attack is made, +to give the alarm by firing rapidly; by day to pass in or out +officers, noncommissioned officers, and detachments recognized +as part of the outposts, and officers known to have authority to +do so; to detain all others and notify the outguard commander; +at night, when persons approach his post, to come to a ready, halt +them, and notify the outguard commander; the latter challenges, +ascertains their identity, and acts accordingly. When individuals +fail to halt, or otherwise disobey, to fire upon them after a +second warning, or sooner if they attempt to attack or escape; +to require deserters to lay down their arms, and remain until a +patrol is sent out to bring them in; to order deserters pursued +by the enemy to drop their arms and to give an alarm; if they +fail to obey they are fired upon; to require bearers of flags of +truce and their escorts to halt and to face outward; to permit +them to hold no conversation and to see that they are then +blindfolded and disposed of in accordance with instructions from +the support commander; if they fall to obey to fire upon them; +at night, to remain practically stationary, moving about for +purposes of observation only; not to sit or lie down unless +authorized to do so; in the daytime, to make use of natural or +artificial cover and assume such positions as to give him the +best field of view; to inform passing patrols of what he has +seen; to carry his weapon habitually loaded and locked and at +will. + +Outpost patrols are divided into those which operate beyond the +lines and those whose duty lies principally within the lines. +The former, called reconnoitering patrols, scout in the direction +of the enemy; the latter, called visiting patrols, maintain +communication between the parts of the outpost and supervise the +performance of duty on the line of observation. Reconnoissance +should be continuous. Though scouts and detachments of cavalry +remain in contact with the enemy, or at least push forward to a +considerable distance, more detailed reconnoissance by infantry +patrols in the foreground must not be neglected. Reconnoitering +patrols are composed of at least two men and a skillful leader, who, +in important cases, would be an officer. They obtain information, +ascertain the presence of the enemy, or discover his approach. +All patrols, when they cross the line of observation, inform the +nearest sentinel of the direction in which they are to advance; +on their return they similarly report what they have seen of the +enemy; signals are agreed upon so that they can be recognized +when returning. Any ground near the line of observation which +might afford cover for troops, or for scouts or spies, and the +approach to which can not be observed by sentinels, is searched +frequently by patrols. Definite information concerning the enemy +is reported at once. Patrols fire only in self-defense or to +give the alarm. Supports on the flank of an outpost position +patrol the country on the exposed flank. Visiting patrols and +reliefs should not march in the open, and thereby expose the +position of sentinels. + +During a march in the vicinity of the enemy when halts are made, +special measures for protection are taken. When the halt is for +a short period, less than half an hour, the advance party and +support remain at ease, the point and flankers move to positions +from which they can obtain a good lookout, and additional patrols +may be sent out from advance parties and supports. Where the halt +is for a period exceeding half an hour a MARCH OUTPOST should +be formed. With an advance guard consisting of a battalion, 2 +companies in the reserve, 2 in the support, the latter having +as advance party one-half a company, a typical march outpost +would be formed as follows: The advance party would send one +platoon, four or five hundred yards to the right as outguard No. +1, the remaining platoon constituting outguard No. 2. A platoon +from the head of the support would be sent a similar distance to +the left as outguard No. 3. The balance of the support would +constitute the support of the march outpost, the reserve of the +advance guard acting as reserve. On signal being given to resume +the march, the various units would close in, and as soon as the +advance party had assembled the march would be taken up. + + +SECTION 8. RIFLE TRENCHES. + +Soldiers should remember that only by acting vigorously on the +offensive can an army hope to gain the victory. The defensive may +delay or stop the enemy, but it can never destroy him. "Troops +dig because they are forced to halt; they do not halt to dig." + +Trenches will frequently be constructed, without being used, +and soldiers must expect this as a feature of campaigning and +accept cheerfully what at times may appear as unnecessary labor. + +When intrenching under fire cover is first secured in the lying +position, each man scooping out a depression for his body and +throwing the earth to the front. In this position no excavation +can be conveniently made for the legs, but if time permits the +original excavation is enlarged and deepened until it is possible +to assume a sitting position, with the legs crossed and the shoulder +to the parapet. In such a position a man presents a smaller target +to shrapnel bullets than in the lying trench and can fire more +comfortably and with less exposure than in the kneeling trench. +From the sitting position the excavation may be continued until +a standing trench is secured. + +The accompanying plate shows some of the more common forms of +trenches in profile. Figure 1 is the simplest form of standing +trench. Figure 2 shows the same trench deepened in rear, so as +to allow men to walk along in the rear (deeper) portion of the +trench without exposing their heads above the parapet. Figure 3 +shows a cover and firing trench, with a chamber in which men can +find shelter when under heavy artillery fire. When the excavated +earth is easily removed figure 4 shows a good profile. The enemy's +infantry, as well as his artillery, will generally have great +difficulty in seeing this type of trench. + +The mound or bank of earth thrown up for shelter in front of a +trench is called the PARAPET. It should be at least 30 inches +thick on top, and the front should slope gradually, as shown in +the plate, so that shells will tend to glance from it, rather +than penetrate and explode. The top should be covered with sod, +grass, or leaves, so as to hide the newly turned earth, which +could be easily seen and aimed at by the enemy. There should be +no rocks, loose stones, or pebbles on top, which might be struck +by the bullets, splintering and flying, thus adding greatly to +the number of dangerous projectiles, and often deflecting bullets +downward into the trench. A stone wall is a very dangerous thing +to be behind in a fight. + +The portion of the ground in rear of the parapet and between +the parapet and the trench not covered by the parapet is to rest +the elbows on when firing, the rifle being rested on top of the +parapet. + +To obtain head cover in a trench fill a gunny sack or other bag +with sand or soil and place it on top of the parapet, aiming +around the right-hand side of it, or dig a small lateral trench +in the parapet large enough to hold the rifle. Roof it over with +boards, small logs, or brush, and heap dirt on top, aiming through +the small trench or resulting loophole. + +Figure 5 shows the plan of a section of a rifle trench.[7] Between +the portions occupied by each squad there is often placed a mound +of earth as high as the top of the parapet and projecting back into +the trench. This is called a TRAVERSE and protects the occupants +of the trench from fire from a flank. Bullets from this direction +hit a traverse, instead of flying down into the trench and wounding +several men. + +[Footnote 7: The traverse should be at least 6 feet wide instead +of 3 feet, as shown in figure 5.] + +Trenches are seldom continuous, but are made in sections placed +at the most advantageous points, as shown in figure 6. A company +or battalion may occupy a single section. The firing trenches +have cover trenches in rear of them, where the supports can rest +undisturbed by the hostile fire until they are needed in the +firing trench to repel a serious assault or to take part in a +counter attack. Passages consisting of deep communicating trenches +facilitate passage from the cover trenches to the firing trenches +when under fire. These communicating trenches are usually zigzag +or traversed to prevent their being swept by hostile fire. + +When troops are likely to remain in trenches for a considerable +time drainage should be arranged for, and latrines and dressing +stations should be constructed in trenches. Water should be brought +into the trenches and holes excavated in the front wall of the +trench for extra ammunition. + +In digging trenches men usually work in reliefs, one relief digging +while the others rest, the proportion of shovelers to pick men +being about 3 to 1. If a plow can be obtained to turn the sod, +it will greatly facilitate the initial work of digging. + +[Illustration: Plate V.] + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +MARCHING AND CAMPING. + + +SECTION 1. BREAKING CAMP AND PREPARATION FOR A MARCH. + +THE EVENING BEFORE THE MARCH. + +When a command learns that it is to make a march on the following +day, presumably starting early in the morning, certain details +should be attended to the evening before. + +All men should fill their canteens as there will probably be no +time for this in the morning. + +The mess sergeant should find out whether lunch or the reserve +ration will be carried on the march and should attend to these +details in the evening in order that the issue can be made promptly +in the morning. + +The commander of the guard should be given a memorandum as to +what time to awaken the cooks and where their tent is. The member +of the guard who does this should awaken them without noise so +as not to disturb the rest of the remainder of the command. + +The cooks should be instructed as to what time breakfast is to +be served and what time to awaken the first sergeant. + +The cooks or cook's police must cut and split all firewood for +the morning before 9 p. m. There must be no chopping, talking, +or rattling of pans before reveille which will disturb the rest +of the command. This applies to every morning in camp. + + +THE MORNING OF THE MARCH. + +Cooks arise when called by the guard and start the preparation of +breakfast without noise. The first sergeant is usually awakened +by one of the cooks about half an hour before reveille in order +that he may complete his toilet and breakfast early and be able +to devote all his time to supervising the details of the morning's +work. If the officers desire to be awakened before reveille they +will notify the first sergeant accordingly. + +At first call the men turn out, perform their toilets, strike +their shelter tents (unless it has been directed to await the +sounding of the general for this), and make up their packs. + +At the sounding of assembly immediately after reveille each man +must be in his proper place in ranks. This assembly is under +arms. The first sergeant starts to call the roll or commands +"Report" at the last note of assembly. Arms are stacked before +the company is dismissed. + +Breakfast is served to the company immediately after roll call. +Immediately after breakfast each man will wash his mess kit in +the hot water provided for that purpose at the kitchen and will +at once pack the mess kit in his haversack. + +The cooks will provide hot water for washing mess kits at the +same time that breakfast is served. + +Immediately after breakfast the company proceeds to the work +of breaking camp and packing in accordance with a prearranged +system similar to the following: + +One squad assists the cooks in packing the kitchen. + +One squad strikes and folds the officers' tents and brings them +to the kitchen. + +One squad fills in the sink. The sink should not be filled in +earlier than is absolutely necessary. + +One squad polices the camp within the company police limits. + +One squad is available for possible details from regimental +headquarters. + +Officers and first sergeant supervise the work. + +A permanent assignment of squads to these duties lightens the +labor and decreases the time necessary for breaking camp. After +the breaking of camp the entire company is used to police camp. + +Men should not start from camp thirsty, but should drink all +the water they want immediately after breakfast. All canteens +should be filled before marching, one man in each squad being +detailed to fill the canteens for his squad. + +At assembly for the march the men fall in in rear or the stacks +fully equipped for marching. + + +SECTION 2. MARCHING. + +The principal work of troops in the field consists of marching. +Battles take place only at indefinite intervals, but marches are +of daily occurrence. It is only by good marching that troops +can arrive at a given point at a given time and in good condition +for battle. + +The rate of march depends greatly upon the condition of the roads +and the weather, but the average rate for infantry is about 2-1/2 +miles per hour. This allows for a rest of 10 minutes each hour. +The total distance marched in a day depends not only on the rate +of march, but upon the size of the command, large commands often +covering only about 10 miles a day, while small commands easily +cover double that distance. + +In order to make the march with the greatest comfort and the +least danger, it is necessary that each unit be kept well in +hand. Each man is permitted and encouraged to make himself as +comfortable as possible at all times, excepting only that he +must not interfere with the comfort of others or with the march +of the column. + +Infantry generally marches in column of squads, but on narrow +roads or trails column of twos or files is used. The route step is +habitually used when silence is not required. In large commands, +in order that the column be kept in hand, it is very necessary that +each man keep his place in ranks and follow his file leader at the +prescribed distance. This is one of the best tests for determining +the discipline and efficiency of troops. The equipment should +be carefully adjusted before starting out, and any part that is +not comfortable should be rearranged at the first opportunity. +The rifle is carried at will, except that the muzzle must be +pointed up so as not to interfere with the other men. + +Under no circumstances will any man leave the ranks without +permission from his company or higher commander. If the absence +is to be for more than a short while, he must be given a pass +showing his name, rank, and organization, and the reason he is +permitted to be absent. If sick, it is better to wait by the +roadside at some comfortable place for the arrival of the surgeon +or the ambulance. In any case, the soldier keeps his rifle and +equipment with him, if possible. Soldiers absent from their +organization without a pass will be arrested and returned to their +command for punishment. + +Marches in hot weather are particularly trying. Green leaves or +a damp cloth carried in the hat lessens the chance of sunstroke. +The hat should have ventilators, and when not exposed to the +direct rays of the sun it should be removed from the head. It +is well to keep the clothing about the neck and throat open, +and sometimes to turn up the shirt sleeves so as to leave the +wrists free. + +The canteen should always be filled before starting out. Use +the water very sparingly. None at all should be drunk during +the first three or four hours of the march. After that take only +a few mouthfuls at a time and wash out the mouth and throat. +Except possibly in very hot weather, one canteen of water should +last for the entire day's march. Excessive water drinking on +the march will play a man out very quickly. Old soldiers never +drink when marching. A small pebble carried in the mouth keeps it +moist and therefore reduces thirst. Or a small piece of chocolate +may occasionally be eaten. Smoking is very depressing during a +march. + +Canteens will not be refilled on the march without authority +from an officer, as the clearest water, whether from a well, +spring, or running stream, may be very impure and the source of +many camp diseases. If canteens are to be refilled, it should be +done by order, and a detail is generally made for this purpose. + +Entering upon private property without permission, or stealing +fruit, etc., from gardens and orchards, is a serious military +offense, as well as a violation of the civil laws. + +When a cooked meal is carried, it should not be eaten until the +proper time. + +A command ordinarily marches for 50 minutes and halts for 10 +minutes. The first halt in a day's march is for about 15 minutes, +is made after about 30 minutes' marching, and is for the express +purpose of allowing the men to relieve themselves. Men who wish +to do this should attend to it at once and not wait until the +command is almost ready to march again. + +At every halt get all the rest possible and don't spend the time +wandering around or standing about. Only green recruits do this. +If the ground is dry, stretch out at full length, removing the +pack or blanket roll and belt, and get in as comfortable position +as possible. The next best way is to sit down with a good back +rest against a tree or a fence or some other object. Never sit +down or lie down, however, on wet or damp ground. Sit on your +pack or blanket roll, or on anything else that is dry. At a halt +it is very refreshing to adjust the underclothing. + + +SECTION 3. MAKING CAMP. + +On reaching the camp site the men should be allowed to fall out +and rest as soon as the arms have been stacked and the shelter +tents pitched. If the blanket rolls have been carried on the +wagons, then the location of the front poles of the shelter tents +should be marked before they are allowed to fall out. The men +will not be allowed to relieve themselves until sinks are dug. +Temporary sinks may be dug with intrenching tools, if carried. +A guard should be placed over the water supply at once. + +As soon as the shelter tents are pitched the company proceeds +to the remainder of the camp work in accordance with a permanent +assignment similar to the following: + +One squad helps arrange the kitchen. + +One squad pitches the officers' tents. + +One squad digs the sink. + +One squad procures wood and water. + +One squad is held available for details from regimental headquarters. + +The officers and first sergeant supervise the work. + +The sinks are located by the commanding officer. The detail to +dig them should wait until informed of the location. An officer +should inspect the sink as soon as the detail reports it as +completed. + +After the camp has been put in order the first sergeant makes +the details from roster for kitchen police and noncommissioned +officer in charge of quarters for the next day and for such guard +as may be ordered for that day. + +The details called for by regimental headquarters for pitching +the headquarters camp for the quartermaster, etc., should be +reported to the adjutant without delay. + +The cooks pitch their tent at that end of the company street +nearest the kitchen. Space must be left for this tent if the +cooks are not in ranks when the company pitches tents. Unless +lunch has been carried or cooked during the march, the cooks +should get to work on a hot meal as soon as possible. The kitchen +police report at the kitchen as soon as their tent is pitched. +Wood and water will be required at once. + +Officers should avoid keeping the men unnecessarily under arms +or on their feet after a hard day's march. + +When the details of making camp have been completed, all men +should at once care for their rifles and feet. (For details as +to the care of the rifle see Chapter II Section 1, for the care +of the feet see Chapter IV.) + + +SECTION 4. CAMP SERVICE AND DUTIES. + +In camp "Reveille" is preceded by "First call," and a march played +by the band or field music, and is followed immediately by +"Assembly." If there is a reveille gun, it is fired at the first +note of the march and is the signal for all to arise. The roll +is called at the last notes of assembly after reveille. At this +formation men should fall in in the proper uniform--rifle and +belt, service hat, olive-drab flannel shirt, service breeches, +leggings, and shoes. The regimental commander may prescribe that +coats are to be worn and will prescribe the exact uniform for +all drills, parades, and other formations, as well as for men +going on pass. + +Immediately after reveille roll call the sergeant next in rank +to the first sergeant takes command of the company and deploys +it for a general police of the camp within the limits assigned +to the company. Men pick up all scraps of paper and rubbish of +all kinds, depositing it in the company incinerator or place +designated for the purpose. The police limits of each company +are usually designated as extending from head to rear of camp +within the space occupied by the company street, including the +ground occupied by the tents of the company, no unassigned space +being left between companies. + +Immediately after breakfast men police their tents and raise +walls of same. If the day is fair, all bedding should be spread +on the tents for several hours' airing. + +At sick call all men who are sick fall in and are marched to +the regimental infirmary, under charge of the noncommissioned +officer in charge of quarters. The noncommissioned officer takes +with him the company sick report previously filled in and signed +by the company commander. The surgeon examines all those reporting +and indicates their status on the sick report. This status may be +"Duty" (available for all duty), "Quarters" (patient to remain +in tent or company street), and "Hospital" (patient to be sent +to the hospital). The noncommissioned officer then returns to +the company with all the men not marked "Hospital" and hands +the sick report to the first sergeant. + +At "Drill call" the company prepares for drill and falls in so +that it will be completely formed at assembly, which is usually +sounded 10 minutes after drill call. All men are required to attend +drill except those excused by sick report and those specially +excused from headquarters. The excused list should include in each +company only the mess sergeant, the two cooks, one kitchen police, +and men on regimental guard. During drill hours the guard to be +excused should be limited to a small patrol to guard against +fire and thieves in camp. + +If the bedding has been aired, it should be taken in immediately +after drill and placed in the tents neatly folded. + +Some time during the morning, at a time designated by him, the +company commander inspects the entire company camp. At this +inspection the entire street should be policed, kitchen in order, +and tents policed, as follows: + +In permanent camp, when pyramidal, conical, or wall tents are +used: Bedding folded neatly and placed on the head of the cot. +(If bed sacks are used, they will be folded in three folds and +the bedding placed on top.) Hats on top of the bedding. Shoes +under foot of cot. Surplus kit bag at side of squad leader's +cot. Equipment suspended neatly from a frame arranged around +the tent pole. Rifles in rack constructed around the tent pole. + +In shelter-tent camp: Bedding neatly folded and placed at rear +of tent, ponchos underneath. Equipment arranged on the bedding. +Rifles laid on bedding except when used as tent poles. + +The regimental commander prescribes the exact scheme to be followed +in the police of tents. + +Should there be no parade, retreat roll call is held at the same +hour. This roll call is under arms and is supervised by an officer +of the company. After the roll call and at the sounding of "Retreat," +the officer brings the company to parade rest and keeps it in +this position during the sounding of this call. At the first +note of the National Anthem ("The Star-Spangled Banner") or "To +the Color" the company is brought to attention and so stands +until the end of the playing. The officer then reports the result +of the roll call to the adjutant or officer of the day, returns +to the company, inspects the arms, and dismisses it. + +At the sounding of "Call to quarters" all men will repair to their +company street. + +After taps has sounded all talking must cease and all lights must +be extinguished, and so remain until first call for reveille. + +In camp all enlisted men are prohibited from crossing the officers' +street, or from visiting officers' tents unless actually engaged +in some duty requiring them to do so, or sent for by an officer. + +Men are not allowed to leave camp without a pass signed by the +company commander and countersigned by the regimental adjutant. +The first sergeant is sometimes allowed to give men permission +to leave camp from retreat to taps. + +The noncommissioned officer in charge of quarters, detailed for +24 hours goes on duty each day at reveille. He is responsible +that the grounds around the company are kept in proper police; +that no loud noise, disturbance, or disorder occurs in the company +street; that men confined to the company street do not leave +the same without proper authority. He reports men who are sick +to the surgeon. He may be required to report all other details +called for. He accompanies the captain in his daily inspection +of the company. He will not leave the company street during his +tour of duty except as provided above. + +One or two privates are detailed daily as kitchen police. They +go on duty at reveille. It is their duty to assist the cooks in +the kitchen. They assist in the preparation of meals, wait on +the table, wash dishes, procure water and wood, chop firewood, +and keep the kitchen, mess tent, and surrounding ground policed. +They are under the orders of the mess sergeant and the cooks. + +Rifles need careful attention in camp. They should be cleaned +and oiled daily, preferably just before retreat or parade. It +is advisable for each man to have a canvas cover to keep off +the dust and dampness. In a shelter-tent camp tie the rifle, +muzzle up, to the pole of the tent, placing a chip of wood under +the butt plate and an oily rag over (never inside) the muzzle. + +Wet shoes should be filled with oats or dry sand, and set in a +cool place to dry. Never dry them by a fire. + +Uniforms need special care, as camp service is very hard on them. +In a permanent camp every man should have two pair of breeches. +The coat will seldom be worn except at parade or retreat. One +pair of breeches and the coat should be kept neat, clean, and +pressed for use on ceremonies, inspections, and when going on +pass. Woolen uniforms may be cleaned and freed from spots by +rubbing with a flannel rag saturated with gasoline. Cotton uniforms +may be washed with water, soap, and a scrubbing brush, wrung +out, and stretched, properly creased, on a flat wood surface in +the sun to dry. Leggings can be similarly washed. Hats should +be cleaned with gasoline, and dampened and ironed to restore +their shape. + +Enlisted men should be very careful to observe all the sanitary +regulations of the camp. Flies are the greatest spreaders of camp +disease. All fecal matter and food should be carefully guarded from +them. In camps extreme precautions are taken to screen the sinks +and kitchens from flies, and all enlisted men should cooperate in +the effort to make these precautions successful. One fly carrying +germs on his feet from the sinks to the food can start a serious +and fatal epidemic in a camp. Defecating on the ground in the +vicinity of camp or urinating in camp are extremely dangerous +to the health of the command, and are serious military offenses. +At night a urinal can is provided in each company street. + +In a permanent camp cots or bed sacks are usually provided for +the men to sleep on. In a shelter tent camp beds should be made +of hay, grass, leaves, pine or spruce boughs, or pine needles, +on top of which the poncho and blanket are spread, thus softening +the ground and keeping the sleeper away from the cold and dampness. +Neglect to prepare the bed when sleeping without cot or bed sack +means a loss of sleep, and may lead to colds, bowel disorders, +and rheumatism. + +In wet weather tents should be ditched, and in windy or cold +weather dirt may be banked around them. A place for washing the +person and clothes should be arranged for in each company street, +and the waste water disposed of by means of drainage or rock-filled +pits. In dry weather the streets in camp should frequently be +sprinkled with water to keep down the dust. This is specially +necessary around the kitchen. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +TARGET PRACTICE. + + +SECTION 1. PRELIMINARY TRAINING IN MARKSMANSHIP. + +Effective rifle fire is generally what counts most in battle. +To have effective rifle fire, the men on the firing line must +be able to HIT what they are ordered to shoot at. There is no +man who can not be taught how to shoot. It is not necessary or +even desirable to begin instruction by firing on a rifle range. +A perfectly green recruit who has never fired a rifle may be made +into a good shot by a little instruction and some preliminary +drills and exercises. + +Before a man goes on the range to fire it is absolutely necessary +that he should know-- + + 1. How to set the rear sight. + 2. How to sight or aim. + 3. How to squeeze the trigger. + 4. How to hold the rifle in all positions. + +If he does not know these things it is worse than useless for +him to fire. He will not improve; the more he shoots the worse +he will shoot, and it will become more difficult to teach him. + + +SECTION 2. SIGHT ADJUSTMENT. + +Men must be able to adjust their sights correctly and quickly. +An error in adjustment so small that one can scarcely see it +on the sight leaf is sufficient to cause a miss at an enemy at +500 yards and over. + +Notice your rear sight. When the leaf is laid down the BATTLE +SIGHT appears on top. This sight is set for 547 yards and is +not adjustable. When the leaf is raised four sights come into +view. The extreme range sight for 2,850 yards at the top of the +leaf is seldom used. The open sight at the upper edge of the +drift slide is adjustable from 1,400 to 2,750 yards. To set it +the upper edge of the slide is made to correspond with the range +reading on the leaf, and the slide is then clamped with the slide +screw. This sight also is seldom used. The open sight at the +bottom of the triangular opening in the drift slide is adjustable +from 100 to 2,450 yards. To set it the index line at the lower +corners of the triangle is set opposite the range graduation on +the leaf and the slide clamped. This and the peep sight just +below it are the sights most commonly used. To set the peep sight, +the index lines on either side of the peephole are set opposite +the range desired and the slide clamped. + +Notice the scales for the various ranges on either side of the +face of the leaf. The odd-numbered hundreds of yards are on the +right and the even on the left. The line below the number is +the index line for that range. Thus to set the sight for 500 +yards the index line of the slide is brought in exact line with +the line on the leaf below the figure 5 and the slide clamped. +To set for 550 yards the index lines of the slide are set half +way between the index lines on the leaf below the figure 5 on +the right side and the figure 6 on the left side. Look at your +sight carefully when setting it and take great pains to get it +exact. An error in setting the width of one of the lines on the +leaf will cause an error of about 8 inches in where your bullet +will strike at 500 yards. + +The WIND GAUGE is adjusted by means of the windage screw at the +right front end of the base of the sight. Each graduation on +the wind-gauge scale is called a "point." For convenience in +adjusting the line of each third point on the scale is longer +than the others. If you turn the windage screw so that the movable +base moves to the right, you are taking right windage, which +will cause your rifle to shoot more to the right. + +It is seldom that a rifle will shoot correctly to the point aimed +at at a given range with the sights adjusted exactly to the scale +graduations for that range. If your sight is not correctly adjusted +for your shooting and you wish to move it slightly to make it +correct, remember to move it in the direction you wish your shot +to hit. If you wish to shoot higher raise your sight. If to the +right, move the wind gauge to the right. Always move your sight +the correct amount in accordance with the following table: + + +SECTION 3. TABLE OF SIGHT CORRECTIONS. + +_Showing_to_what_extent_the_point_of_impact_is_moved_by_a_change_ +_of_25_yards_in_elevation_or_1_point_in_windage._ + + Correction Correction + by a change by a change + Range. in elevation in windage + of 25 yards. of 1 point. + -------- -------------- ------------- + _Yards._ _Inches._ _Inches._ + 100 0.72 4 + 200 1.62 8 + 300 2.79 12 + 400 4.29 16 + 500 6.22 20 + 600 8.59 24 + 800 15.43 32 + 1,000 25.08 40 + +An easy rule to remember the windage correction by is: "A change +of 1 point of wind changes the point of impact 4 inches for every +100 yards of range." + +Copy this table and take it to the range with you. + +Example of sight adjustment: Suppose you are firing at 500 yards. +The first two or three shots show you that your shots are hitting +about a foot below and a foot to the right of the center of the +bull's-eye. From the above table you will see that if you will +raise your sight 50 yards and move the wind gauge half a point to +the left the rifle will be sighted so that if you aim correctly +the bullets will hit well inside the bull's eye. + + +SECTION 4. AIMING. + +OPEN SIGHT: Always align your sights with the front sight squarely +in the middle of the "U" or notch of the rear sight, and the +top of the front sight even with the upper corners of the "U." +(See fig. 1.) All the sights on the rifle except the peep sight +are open sights. + +PEEP SIGHT: Always center the tip of the front sight in the center +of the peephole when aiming with this sight. (See fig. 2.) + +[Illustration: FIGURE 1.] + +Always aim below the bull's-eye. Never let your front sight appear +to touch the bull's-eye in aiming. Try to see the same amount of +white target between the top of the front sight and the bottom +of the bull's-eye each time. The eye must be focused on the +bull's-eye or mark and not on the front or rear sight. + +Look at figures 1 and 2 until your eye retains the memory of +them, then try to duplicate the picture every time you aim. Aim +consistently, always the same. Never change your aim; change +your sight adjustment if your shots are not hitting in the right +place. + + +SECTION 5. BATTLE SIGHT. + +The battle sight is the open sight seen when the leaf is laid +flat. It is adjusted for a range of 547 yards. It is intended +to be used in battle, when you get nearer to the enemy than 600 +yards. Always aim at the belt of a standing enemy, or just below +him if he is kneeling, sitting, or lying. On the target range +this sight is used for rapid fire. With it the rifle shoots about +2 feet high at ranges between 200 and 400 yards, so you must aim +below the figure on the target "D." Find out in four instruction +practice just how much you must aim below to hit the figure. + + +SECTION 6. TRIGGER SQUEEZE. + +Use the first joint of the fore finger to squeeze the trigger. +It is the most sensitive and best controlled portion of the body. +As you place the rifle to your shoulder squeeze the trigger so +as to pull it back about one-eighth of an inch, thus taking up +the safety portion, or slack, of the pull. Then contract the +trigger finger gradually, slowly and steadily increasing the +pressure on the trigger while the aim is being perfected. Continue +the gradual increase of pressure so that when the aim has become +exact the additional pressure required to release the point of +the sear can be given almost insensibly and without causing any +deflection of the rifle. Put absolutely all your mind and will +power into holding the rifle steady and squeezing the trigger +off without disturbing the aim. Practice squeezing the trigger +in this way every time you have your rifle in your hand until +you can surely and quickly do it without a suspicion of a jerk. + +[Illustration: FIGURE 2.] + +By practice the soldier becomes familiar with the trigger squeeze +of his rifle, and knowing this, he is able to judge at any time, +within limits, what additional pressure is required for its +discharge. By constant repetition of this exercise he should be +able finally to squeeze the trigger to a certain point beyond +which the slightest movement will release the sear. Having squeezed +the trigger to this point, the aim is corrected, and, when true, +the additional pressure is applied and the discharge follows +and the bullet flies true to the mark. + + +SECTION 7. FIRING POSITIONS. + +When in ranks at close order the positions are those described +in the Infantry Drill Regulations. When in extended order, or +when firing alone, these positions may be modified somewhat to +better suit the individual. The following remarks on the various +positions are offered as suggestions whereby steady positions +may be learned by the soldier. + +STANDING POSITION: Face the target, then execute right half face. +Plant the feet about 12 inches apart. As you raise the ride to +the shoulder lean very slightly backward just enough to preserve +the perfect balance on both feet which the raising of the rifle +has somewhat disturbed. Do not lean far back, and do not lean +forward at all. If your body is out of balance it will be under +strain and you will tremble. The right elbow should be at about +the height of the shoulder. The left hand should grasp well around +the stock and handguard in front of the rear sight, and the left +elbow should be almost directly under the rifle. The right hand +should do more than half the work of holding the rifle up and +against the shoulder, the left hand only steadying and guiding +the piece. Do not try to meet the recoil; let the whole body +move back with it. Do not be afraid to press the jaw hard against +the stock; this steadies the position, and the head goes back +with the recoil and insures that your face is not hurt. + +KNEELING POSITION: Assume the position very much as described +in the Infantry Drill Regulations. Sit on the right heel. The +right knee should point directly to the right, that is, along +the firing line. The point of the left elbow should rest over +the left knee. There is a flat place under the elbow which fits +a flat place on the knee and makes a solid rest. Lean the body +well forward. This position is uncomfortable until practiced, +when it quickly ceases to be uncomfortable. + +SITTING POSITION: Sit down half faced to the right, feet from 6 +to 8 inches apart, knees bent, right knee slightly higher than +the left, left leg pointed toward the target. Rest both elbows +on the knees, hands grasping the piece the same as in the prone +position. This is a very steady position, particularly if holes +can be found or made in the ground for the heels. + +PRONE POSITION AND USE OF THE GUN SLING: To adjust the sling +for firing, unhook the straight strap of the sling and let it +out as far as it will go. Adjust the loop so that when stretched +along the bottom of the stock its rear end (bight) comes about +opposite the comb of the stock. A small man needs a longer loop +than a tall man. Lie down facing at an angle of about 60° to +the right of the direction of the target. Spread the legs as +wide apart as they will go with comfort. Thrust the left arm +through between the rifle and the sling, and then back through +the loop of the sling, securing the loop, by means of the keeper, +around the upper left arm as high up as it will go. Pass the +hand under and then over the sling from the left side, and grasp +the stock and handguard just in rear of the lower band. Raise +the right elbow off the ground, rolling slightly over on the +left side. Place the butt to the shoulder and roll back into +position, clamping the rifle hard and steady in the firing position. +The rifle should rest deep down in the palm of the left hand +with fingers almost around the handguard. Shift the left palm +a little to the right or left until the rifle stands perfectly +upright (no cant) without effort. The left elbow should rest +on the ground directly under the rifle, and right elbow on the +ground about 5 inches to the right of a point directly under +the stock. In this position the loop of the sling, starting at +the lower band, passes to the right of the left wrist, and thence +around the left upper arm. The loop should be so tight that about +50 pounds tension is placed on it when the position is assumed. +This position is uncomfortable until practiced, when it quickly +ceases to be uncomfortable. It will be steadier if small holes +can be found or dug in the ground for the elbows. In this position +the sling binds the left forearm to the rifle and to the ground +so that it forms a dead rest for the rifle, with a universal +joint, the wrist, at its upper end. Also the rifle is so bound +to the shoulder that the recoil is not felt at all. This is the +steadiest of all firing positions. + +The gun sling can also be used in this manner with advantage in +the other positions. + + +SECTION 8. CALLING THE SHOT. + +It is evident that the sights should be so adjusted at each range +that the rifle will hit where you aim. In order to determine +that the sights are so adjusted it is necessary that you shall +know each time just where you were aiming on the target at the +instant your rifle was discharged. If you know this and your +rifle hits this point your rifle is correctly sighted. If your +shot does not hit near this point, you should change your sight +adjustment in accordance with the table of sight corrections +in section 3. + +No man can hold absolutely steady. The rifle trembles slightly, +and the sights seem to wobble and move over the target. You try +to squeeze off the last ounce of the trigger squeeze just as +the sights move to the desired alignment under the bull's-eye. +At this instant, just before the recoil blots out a view of the +sights and target, you should catch with your eye a picture, as +it were, of just where on the target your sights were aligned, and +call to yourself or to the coach this point. This point is where +your shot should strike if your sights are correctly adjusted, +and if you have squeezed the trigger without disturbing your +aim. Until a man can call his shots he is not a good shot, for +he can never tell if his rifle is sighted right or not, or if +a certain shot is a good one or only the result of luck. + + +SECTION 9. COORDINATION. + +Good marksmanship consists in learning thoroughly the details +of-- + + Holding the rifle in the various positions. + Aiming. + Squeezing the trigger. + Calling the shot. + Adjusting the sights. + +And, when these have been mastered in detail, then the coordination +of them in the act of firing. This coordination consists in putting +absolutely all of one's will power into an effort to hold the +rifle steadily, especially in getting it to steady down when +the aim is perfected; in getting the trigger squeezed off easily +at the instant the rifle is steadiest and the aim perfected; in +calling the shot at this instant; and, if the shot does not hit +near the point called, then in adjusting the sights the correct +amount so that the rifle will be sighted to hit where you aim. + + +SECTION 10. ADVICE TO RIFLEMEN. + +Before going to the range clean the rifle carefully, removing +every trace of oil from the bore. This can best be done with +a rag saturated with gasoline. Put a light coat of oil on the +bolt and cams. Blacken the front and rear sights with smoke from +a burning candle or camphor or with liquid sight black. + +Look through the bore and see that there is no obstruction in +it. + +Keep the rifle off the ground; the stock may absorb dampness, +the sights may be injured, or the muzzle filled with dirt. + +Watch your hold carefully and be sure to know where the line +of sight is at discharge. It is only in this way that the habit +of calling shots, which is essential to good shooting, can be +acquired. + +Study the conditions, adjust the sling, and set the sight before +going to the firing point. + +Look at the sight adjustment before each shot and see that it +has not changed. + +If sure of your hold and if the hit is not as called, determine +and make FULL correction in elevation and windage to put the +next shot in the bull's-eye. + +Keep a written record of the weather conditions and the corresponding +elevation and windage for each day's firing. + +Less elevation will generally be required on hot days; on wet +days; in a bright sunlight; with a 6 o'clock wind; or with a +cold barrel. + +More elevation will generally be required on cold days; on very +dry days; with a 12 o'clock wind; with a hot barrel; in a dull +or cloudy light. + +The upper band should not be tight enough to bind the barrel. + +Do not put a cartridge into the chamber until ready to fire. +Do not place cartridges in the sun. They will get hot and shoot +high. + +Do not rub the eyes--especially the sighting eye. + +In cold weather warm the trigger hand before shooting. + +After shooting, clean the rifle carefully and then oil it to prevent +rust. + +Have a strong, clean cloth that will not tear and jam, properly +cut to size, for use in cleaning. + +Always clean the rifle from the breech, using a brass cleaning +rod when available. An injury to the rifling at the muzzle causes +the piece to shoot very irregularly. + +Regular physical exercise, taken systematically, will cause a +marked improvement in shooting. + +Frequent practice of the "Position and aiming drills" is of the +greatest help in preparing for shooting on the range. + +RAPID FIRING: Success is rapid firing depends upon catching a +quick and accurate aim, holding the piece firmly and evenly, +and in squeezing the trigger without a jerk. + +In order to give as much time as possible for aiming accurately, +the soldier must practice taking position, loading with the clip, +and working the bolt, so that no time will be lost in these +operations. With constant practice all these movements may be +made quickly and without false motions. + +When the bolt handle is raised, it must be done with enough force +to start the shell from the chamber; and when the bolt is pulled +back, it must be with sufficient force to throw the empty shell +well away from the chamber and far enough to engage the next +cartridge. + +In loading, use force enough to load each cartridge with one motion. + +The aim must be caught quickly, and, once caught, must be held +and the trigger squeezed steadily. Rapid firing, as far as holding, +aim, and squeezing the trigger are concerned, should be done with +all the precision of slow fire. The gain in time should be in +getting ready to fire, loading, and working the bolt. + +FIRING WITH RESTS: In order that the shooting may be uniform the +piece should always be rested at the same point. + + +SECTION 11. THE COURSE IN SMALL-ARMS FIRING. + +The course in small-arms firing consists of-- + + (a) Nomenclature and care of rifle. + (b) Sighting drills. + (c) Position and aiming drills. + (d) Deflection and elevation correction drills. + (e) Gallery practice. + (f) Estimating distance drill. + (g) Individual known-distance firing, instruction practice. + (h) Individual known-distance firing, record practice. + (i) Long-distance practice. + (j) Practice with telescopic sights. + (k) Instruction combat practice. + (l) Combat practice. + (m) Proficiency test. + +The regulations governing these are found in Small Arms Firing +Manual, 1913. There should be several copies of this manual in +every company. + + +SECTION 12. TARGETS. + +The accompanying plates show the details and size of the targets: + +[Illustration: TARGET A.] + +[Illustration: TARGET B.] + +[Illustration: TARGET C.] + +[Illustration: TARGET D.] + + +SECTION 13. PISTOL AND REVOLVER PRACTICE.[8] + +[Footnote 8: Whenever in these regulations the word "pistol" +appears the regulation applies with equal force to the revolver, +if applicable to that weapon.] + +135.[9] NOMENCLATURE AND CARE OF THE WEAPON; HANDLING AND PRECAUTIONS +AGAINST ACCIDENTS.--The soldier will first be taught the nomenclature +of those parts of the weapon necessary to an understanding of +its action and use and the proper measures for its care and +preservation. Ordnance pamphlets Nos. 1866 (description of the +Colt's automatic pistol), 1919, and 1927 (description of the +Colt's revolver, calibers .38 and .45, respectively) contain full +information on this subject, and are furnished to organizations +armed with these weapons. + +[Footnote 9: The number refer to paragraphs in the Small Arms +Firing Manual, 1918.] + +Careless handling of the pistol or revolver is the cause of many +accidents and results in broken parts of the mechanism. The following +rules will, if followed, prevent much trouble of this character: + +(a) On taking the PISTOL from the armrack or holster, +take out the magazine and see that it is empty before replacing +it; then draw back the slide and make sure that the piece is +unloaded. Observe the same precaution after practice on the target +range, and again before replacing the pistol in the holster or +in the armrack. When taking the REVOLVER from the armrack or +holster and before returning it to the same, open the cylinder +and eject empty shells and cartridges. Before beginning a drill +and upon arriving on the range observe the same precaution. + +(b) Neither load nor cock the weapon until the moment of +firing, nor until a run in the mounted course is started. + +(c) Always keep the pistol or revolver in the position +of "Raise pistol" (par. 146, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916), +except when it is pointed at the target. (The position of "Lower +pistol" is authorized for mounted firing only.) + +(d) Do not place the weapon on the ground where sand or +earth can enter the bore or mechanism. + +(e) Before loading the PISTOL, draw back the slide and +look through the bore to see that it is free from obstruction. +Before loading the REVOLVER, open the cylinder and look through +the bore to see that it is free from obstruction. When loading[10] +the pistol for target practice place five cartridges in the magazine +and insert the magazine in the handle; draw back the slide and +insert the first cartridge in the chamber and carefully lower[11] +the hammer fully down. + +[Footnote 10: TO LOAD PISTOL: Being at raise pistol (right hand +grasping stock at the height of and 6 inches in front of the +point of the right shoulder, forefinger alongside barrel, barrel +to the rear and inclined forward about 30°). + +Without deranging position of the hand, rotate the pistol so +the sights move to the left, the barrel pointing to the right +front and up. + +With the thumb and forefinger of the left hand (thumb to the +right) grasp the slide and pull it toward the body until it stops, +and then release it. The pistol is thus loaded, and the hammer +at full cock. + +If the pistol is to be kept in the hand and not to be fired at +once, engage the safety lock with the thumb of the right hand. + +If the pistol is to be carried in the holster, remove safety lock, +if on, and lower the hammer fully down.] + +[Footnote 11: TO LOWER THE HAMMER: Being at the loading position +at full cock. + +I. Firmly seat thumb of right hand on the hammer: insert forefinger +inside trigger guard. + +II. With thumb of left hand exert a momentary pressure on the +grip-safety to release hammer from sear. + +III. At the same instant exert pressure or the trigger and carefully +and slowly lower the hammer fully down. + +IV. Remove finger from trigger. + +V. Insert pistol in holster. + +CAUTION.--The pistol must never be placed in the holster until +hammer is fully down.] + +In loading the REVOLVER place five cartridges in the cylinder +and let the hammer down on the EMPTY CHAMBER. + +(f) Whenever the pistol is being LOADED or UNLOADED, the +muzzle must be kept up. + +(g) Do not point the weapon in any direction where an +accidental discharge might do harm. + +(h) After loading do not cock the pistol or the revolver +until ready to fire. + +(i) Keep the working parts properly lubricated. + +136. POSITION, DISMOUNTED.--Stand firmly on both feet, body perfectly +balanced and erect and turned at such an angle as is most comfortable +when the arm is extended toward the target; the feet far enough +apart to insure firmness and steadiness or position (about 8 to +10 inches); weight of body borne equally upon both feet; right +arm fully extended, left arm hanging naturally. + +REMARKS.--The right arm may be slightly bent, although the difficulty +of holding the pistol uniformly and of keeping it as well as the +forearm in the same vertical plane makes this objectionable. + +137. THE GRIP.--Grasp the stock as high as possible with the +thumb and last three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger +guard, the thumb extended along the stock. The barrel, hand, and +forearm should be as nearly in one line as possible when the +weapon is pointed toward the target. The grasp should not be so +tight as to cause tremors of the hand or arm to be communicated +to the weapon, but should be firm enough to avoid losing the grip +when the recoil takes place. + +REMARKS.--The force of recoil of the pistol or revolver is exerted +in a line above the hand which grasps the stock. The lower the +stock is grasped the greater will be the movement or "jump" of +the muzzle caused by the recoil. This not only results in a severe +strain upon the wrist, but in loss of accuracy. + +If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side of the +stock, the recoil will cause a rotary movement of the weapon +toward the opposite side. + +The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement of the muzzle, +generally to the left. The position of the thumb along the stock +overcomes much of this movement. The soldier should be encouraged +to practice this method of holding until it becomes natural. + +To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly the +same grip for each shot. Not only must the hand grasp the stock +at the same point for each shot, but the tension of the grip +must be uniform. + +138. (a) THE TRIGGER SQUEEZE.--The trigger must be squeezed +in the same manner as in rifle dring. (See Chapter VIII, section +6.) The pressure of the forefinger on the trigger should be steadily +increased and should be straight back, not sideways. The pressure +should continue to that point beyond which the slightest movement +will release the sear. Then, when the aim is true, the additional +pressure is applied and the pistol fired. + +Only by much practice can the soldier become familiar with the +trigger squeeze. This is essential to accurate shooting. It is the +most important detail to master in pistol or revolver shooting. + +(b) SELF-COCKING ACTION.--The force required to squeeze +the trigger of the revolver when the self-cocking device is used +is considerably greater than with the single action. To accustom +a soldier to the use of the self-cocking mechanism, and also to +strengthen and develop the muscles of the hand, a few minutes +practice daily in holding the unloaded revolver on a mark and +snapping it, using the self-cocking mechanism, is recommended. +The use of the self-cocking device in firing is not recommended +except in emergency. By practice in cocking the revolver the +soldier can become sufficiently expert to fire very rapidly, +using single action, while his accuracy will be greater than when +using double action. + +139. AIMING.--Except when delivering rapid or quick fire, the +rear and front sights of the pistol are used in the same manner +as the rifle sights. The normal sight is habitually used (see +Pl. VI), and the line of sight is directed upon a point just +under the bull's-eye at "6 o'clock." The front sight must be +seen through the middle of the rear-sight notch, the top being +on a line with the top of the notch. Care must be taken not to +cant the pistol to either side.[12] + +[Footnote 12: The instructor should take cognizance of the fact +that the proper aiming point is often affected by the personal +and fixed peculiarities of the firer, and if unable to correct +such abnormalities, permit firer to direct sight at such point +as promises effective results.] + +If the principles of aiming have not been taught, the soldier's +instruction will begin with sighting drills as prescribed for +the rifle so far as they may be applicable. The sighting bar +with open sight will be used to teach the normal sight and to +demonstrate errors likely to be committed. + +To construct a sighting rest for the pistol (see Pl. VI) take +a piece of wood about 10 inches long, 1-1/4 inches wide, and +9/16 inch thick. Shape one end so that it will fit snugly in +the handle of the pistol when the magazine has been removed. +Screw or nail this stick to the top of a post or other object +at such an angle that the pistol when placed on the stick will +be approximately horizontal. A suitable sighting rest for the +revolver may be easily improvised. + +[Illustration: Plate VI.] + +140. (a) HOW TO COCK THE PISTOL.--The pistol should be +cocked by the thumb of the right hand and with the least possible +derangement of the grip. The forefinger should be clear of the +trigger when cocking the pistol. Some men have difficulty at +first in cocking the pistol with the right thumb. This can be +overcome by a little practice. Jerking the pistol forward while +holding the thumb on the hammer will not be permitted. + +(b) HOW TO COCK THE REVOLVER.--The revolver should be +cocked by putting the thumb on the hammer at as nearly a right +angle to the hammer as possible, and by the action of the thumb +muscles alone bringing the hammer back to the position of full +cock. Some men with large hands are able to cock the revolver +with the thumb while holding it in the position of aim or raise +pistol. Where the soldier's hand is small this can not be done, +and in this case it assists the operation to give the revolver +a slight tilt to the right and upward (to the right). Particular +care should be taken that the forefinger is clear of the trigger +or the cylinder will not revolve. Jerking the revolver forward +while holding the thumb on the hammer will not be permitted. + +141. POSITION AND AIMING DRILLS, DISMOUNTED.--For this instruction +the squad will be formed with an interval of 1 pace between files. +Black pasters to simulate bull's-eyes will be pasted opposite +each man on the barrack or other wall, from which the squad is +10 paces distant. + +The squad being formed as described above, the instructor gives +the command: 1. _Raise_, 2. _Pistol_ (par. 156, Cavalry +Drill Regulations), and cautions, "Position and aiming drill, +dismounted." The men take the positions described in paragraph +136, except that the pistol is held at "Raise pistol." + +The instructor cautions, "Trigger squeeze exercise." At the command +READY, cock the weapon as described in paragraph 140. At the +command, 1. _Squad_, 2. FIRE, slowly extend the arm till +it is nearly horizontal, the pistol directed at a point about 6 +inches below the bull's-eye. At the same time put the forefinger +inside the trigger guard and gradually "feel" the trigger. Inhale +enough air to comfortably fill the lungs and gradually raise +the piece until the line of sight is directed at the point of +aim, i. e., just below the bull's-eye at 6 o'clock. While the +sights are directed upon the mark, gradually increase the pressure +on the trigger until it reaches that point where the slightest +additional pressure will release the sear. Then, when the aim +is true, the additional pressure necessary to fire the piece is +given so smoothly as not to derange the alignment of the sights. +The weapon will be held on the mark for an instant after the +hammer falls and the soldier will observe what effect, if any, +the squeezing of the trigger has had on his aim. + +It is impossible to hold the arm perfectly still, but each time the +line of sight is directed on the point of aim a slight additional +pressure is applied to the trigger until the piece is finally +discharged at one of the moments when the sights are correctly +aligned upon the mark. + +When the soldier has become proficient in taking the proper position, +the trigger squeeze should be executed at will. The instructor +prefaces the preparatory command by "At will" and gives the command +HALT at the conclusion of the exercise, when the soldier will +return to the position of "Raise pistol." + +At first this exercise should be executed with deliberation, but +gradually the soldier will be taught to catch the aim quickly +and to lose no time in beginning the trigger squeeze and bringing +it to the point where the slightest additional pressure will +release the sear. + +REMARKS.--In service few opportunities will be offered for slow +aimed fire with the pistol or revolver, although use will be +made of the weapon under circumstances when accurate pointing +and rapid manipulation are of vital importance. + +In delivering a rapid fire, the soldier must keep his eyes fixed +upon the mark and, after each shot, begin a steadily increasing +pressure on the trigger, trying at the same time to get the sights +as nearly on the mark as possible before the hammer again falls. +The great difficulty in quick firing with the pistol lies in +the fact that when the front sight is brought upon the mark, +the rear sight is often found to be outside the line joining the +eye with the mark. This tendency to hold the pistol obliquely +can be overcome only by a uniform manner of holding and pointing. +This uniformity is to be attained only by acquiring a grip which +can be taken with certainty each time the weapon is fired. It +is this circumstance which makes the position and aiming drills +so important. The soldier should constantly practice pointing +the pistol until he acquires the ability to direct it on the +mark in the briefest interval of time and practically without +the aid of sights. + +The soldier then repeats the exercises with the pistol in the +left hand, the left side being turned toward the target. + +142. TO DRAW AND FIRE QUICKLY--SNAP SHOOTING.--With the squad +formed as described in paragraph 141 except that the pistol is +in the holster and the flap, if any, buttoned, the instructor +cautions "Quick-fire exercise." And gives the command, 1. SQUAD; +2. Fire. At this command each soldier, keeping his eye on the +target, quickly draws his pistol, cocks it as in paragraph 140, +thrusts it toward the target, squeezes the trigger, and at the +instant the weapon is brought in line with the eye and the objective +increases the pressure, releasing the sear. To enable the soldier +to note errors in pointing, the weapon will be momentarily held +in position after the fall of the hammer. Efforts at deliberate +aiming in this exercise must be discouraged. + +Remarks under paragraph 141 are specially applicable also to +this type of fire. When the soldier has become proficient in +the details of this exercise, it should be repeated at will; +the instructor cautions, "At will; quick fire exercise." The +exercise should be practiced until the mind, the eye, and trigger +finger act in unison. + +To simulate this type of fire mounted, the instructor places +the squad so that the simulated bull's-eyes are in turn, to the +RIGHT, to the LEFT, to the RIGHT FRONT, to the LEFT FRONT, to +the RIGHT REAR. With the squad in one of these positions, the +instructor cautions, "Position and aiming drill, mounted." At +this caution the right foot is carried 20 inches to the right and +the left hand to the position of the bridle hand (par. 246, Cavalry +Drill Regulations). The exercise is carried out as described for +the exercise dismounted, using the commands and means laid down in +paragraphs 161 to 168, inclusive, Cavalry Drill Regulations, for +firing in the several directions. The exercise is to be executed +at will when the squad has been sufficiently well instructed in +detail. + +When firing to the left the pistol hand will be about opposite +the left shoulder and the shoulders turned about 45° to the left; +when firing to the right rear the shoulders are turned about +45° to the right. + +When the soldier is proficient in these exercises with the pistol +in the right hand, they are repeated with the pistol in the left +hand. + +REVOLVER OR PISTOL RANGE PRACTICE.--The courses in range practice +are given in paragraphs 147 to 199, Small Arms Firing Manual, +1913. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +EXTRACTS FROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY. + +UNITED STATES ARMY, 1914. + +[The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Manual.] + + +SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION. + +1. Guards may be divided into four classes: Exterior guards, interior +guards, military police, and provost guards. + +2. Exterior guards are used only in time of war. They belong to +the domain of tactics and are treated of in the Field Service +Regulations and in the drill regulations of the different arms +of the service, + +The purpose of exterior guards is to prevent surprise, to delay +attack, and otherwise to provide for the security of the main +body. + +On the march they take the form of advance guards, rear guards, +and flank guards. At a halt they consist of outposts. + +3. Interior guards are used in camp or garrison to preserve order, +protect property, and to enforce police regulations. In time +of war such sentinels of an interior guard as may be necessary +are placed close in or about a camp, and normally there is an +exterior guard further out consisting of outposts. In time of +peace the interior guard is the only guard in a camp or garrison. + +4. Military police differ somewhat from either of these classes. +(See Field Service Regulations.) They are used in time of war +to guard prisoners, to arrest stragglers and deserters, and to +maintain order and enforce police regulations in the rear of +armies, along lines of communication, and in the vicinity of large +camps. + +5. Provost guards are used in the absence of military police, +generally in conjunction with the civil authorities at or near +large posts or encampments, to preserve order among soldiers +beyond the interior guard. + + +SECTION 2. CLASSIFICATION OF INTERIOR GUARDS. + +6. The various elements of an interior guard classified according +to their particular purpose and the manner in which they perform +their duties are as follows: + +(a) The main guard. + +(b) Special guards: Stable guards, park guards, prisoner +guards, herd guards, train guards, boat guards, watchmen, etc. + + +SECTION 3. DETAILS AND ROSTERS. + +7. At every military post, and in every regiment or separate +command in the field, an interior guard will be detailed and duly +mounted. + +It will consist of such number of officers and enlisted men as +the commanding officer may deem necessary, and will be commanded +by the senior officer or noncommissioned officer therewith, under +the supervision of the officer of the day or other officer detailed +by the commanding officer. + +8. The system of sentinels on fixed posts is of value in discipline +and training because of the direct individual responsibility +which is imposed and required to be discharged in a definite +and precise manner. While the desirability of this type of duty +is recognized, it should only be put in practice to an extent +sufficient to insure thorough instruction in this method of +performing guard duty and should not be the routine method of its +performance. The usual guard duty will be performed by watchmen, +patrols, or such method as, in the opinion of the commanding +officer, may best secure results under the particular local +conditions. + +9. At posts where there are less than three companies the main +guard and special guards may all be furnished by one company +or by details from each company. It is directed that whenever +possible such guards shall be furnished by a single company, for +the reason that if guard details are taken from each organization +at a post of two companies, troops, or batteries it will result +in both being so reduced as to seriously interfere with drill +and instruction, whereas if details are taken from only one, +the other is available for instruction at full strength. + +Where there are three or more companies, the main guard will, +if practicable, be furnished by a single company, and, as far +as practicable, the same organization will supply all details +for that day for special guard, overseer, and fatigue duty. In +this case the officer of the day and the officers of the guard, +if there are any, will, if practicable, be from the company +furnishing the guard. + +10. At a post or camp where the headquarters of more than one +regiment are stationed, or in the case of a small brigade in +the field, if but one guard be necessary for the whole command, +the details will be made from the headquarters of the command. + +If formal guard mounting is to be held, the adjutant, sergeant +major, and band to attend guard mounting will be designated by +the commanding officer. + +11. When a single organization furnishes the guard, a roster +of organizations will be kept by the sergeant major under the +supervision of the adjutant. (See Appendix B.) + +12. When the guard is detailed from several organizations, rosters +will be kept by the adjutant, of officers of the day and officers +of the guard by name; by the sergeant major under the supervision +of the adjutant, of sergeants, corporals, musicians, and privates +of the guard by number per organization; and by first sergeants, +of sergeants, corporals, musicians, and privates by name. (See +Appendix A.) + +13. When organizations furnish their own stable, or stable and +park guards, credit will be given each for the number of enlisted +men so furnished as though they had been detailed for main guard. + +14. Special guards, other than stable or park guards, will be +credited the same as for main guard, credited with fatigue duty, +carried on special duty, or credited as the commanding officer +may direct. (Pars. 6, 221, 247, and 300.) + +15. Captains will supervise the keeping of company rosters and see +that all duties performed are duly credited. (See pars. 355-364, +A. R., for rules governing rosters, and Form 342, A. G. O., for +instructions as to how rosters should be kept.) + +16. There will be an officer of the day with each guard, unless +in the opinion of the commanding officer the guard is so small +that his services are not needed. In this case an officer will +be detailed to supervise the command and instruction of the guard +for such period as the commanding officer may direct. + +17. When more than one guard is required for a command, a field +officer of the day will be detailed, who will receive his orders +from the brigade or division commander, as the latter may direct. +When necessary captains may be placed on the roster for field +officer of the day. + +18. The detail of officers of the guard will be limited to the +necessities of the service and efficient instruction; inexperienced +officers may be detailed as supernumerary officers of the guard +for purposes of instruction. + +19. Officers serving on staff departments are, in the discretion +of the commanding officer, exempt from guard duty. + +20. Guard details will, if practicable, be posted or published +the day preceding the beginning of the tour, and officers notified +personally by a written order at the same time. + +21. The strength of guards and the number of consecutive days for +which an organization furnishes the guard will be so regulated +as to insure privates of the main guard an interval of not less +than five days between tours. + +When this is not otherwise practicable, extra and special duty +men will be detailed for night guard duty, still performing their +daily duties. When so detailed a roster will be kept by the adjutant +showing the duty performed by them. + +22. The members of main guards and stable and park guards will +habitually be relieved every 24 hours. The length of the tour +of enlisted men detailed as special guards, other than stable +or park guards, will be so regulated as to permit of these men +being held accountable for a strict performance of their duty. + +23. Should the officer of the day be notified that men are required +to fill vacancies in the guard, he will cause them to be supplied +from the organization to which the guard belongs. If none are +available in that organization, the adjutant will be notified +and will cause them to be supplied from the organization that +is next for guard. (Par. 68.) + +24. The adjutant will have posted on the bulletin board at his +office all data needed by company commanders in making details +from their companies. + +At first sergeant's call, first sergeants will go to headquarters +and take from the bulletin board all data necessary for making +the details required from their companies; these details will +be made from their company rosters. + +25. In order to give ample notice, first sergeants will, when +practicable, publish at retreat and post on the company bulletin +board all details made from the company for duties to be performed. + +26. Where rosters are required to be kept by this manual, all +details will be made by roster. + + +SECTION 4. COMMANDER OF THE GUARD. + +41. The commander of the guard is responsible for the instruction +and discipline of the guard. He will see that all of its members +are correctly instructed in their orders and duties and that +they understand and properly perform them. He will visit each +relief at least once while it is on post, and at least one of +these visits will be made between 12 o'clock midnight and daylight. + +42. He receives and obeys the orders of the commanding officer +and the officer of the day, and reports to the latter without +delay all orders to the guard not received from the officer of +the day; he transmits to his successor all material instructions +and information relating to his duties. + +43. He is responsible under the officer of the day for the general +safety of the post or camp as soon as the old guard marches away +from the guardhouse. In case of emergency, while both guards +are at the guardhouse, the senior commander of the two guards +will be responsible that the proper action is taken. + +44. Officers of the guard will remain constantly with their guards, +except while visiting patrols or necessarily engaged elsewhere +in the performance of their duties. The commanding officer will +allow a reasonable time for meals. + +45. A commander of a guard leaving his post for any purpose will +inform the next in command of his destination and probable time +of return. + +46. Except in emergencies, the commander of the guard may divide +the night with the next in command, but retains his responsibility; +the one on watch must be constantly on the alert. + +47. When any alarm is raised in camp or garrison, the guard will +be informed immediately. (Par, 234.) If the case be serious, +the proper call will be sounded, and the commander of the guard +will cause the commanding officer and the officer of the day +to be at once notified. + +48. If a sentinel calls: "The guard," the commander of the guard +will at once send a patrol to the sentinel's post. If the danger +be great, in which case the sentinel will discharge his piece, +the patrol will be as strong as possible. + +49. When practicable, there should always be an officer or +noncommissioned officer and two privates of the guard at the +guardhouse in addition to the sentinels there on post. + +50. Between reveille and retreat, when the guard had been turned +out for any person entitled to the compliment (see pars. 222 and +224), the commander of the guard, if an officer, will receive +the report of the sergeant, returning the salute of the latter +with the right hand. He will then draw his saber and place himself +two paces in front of the center of the guard. When the person +for whom the guard has been turned out approaches, he faces his +guard and commands: 1. _Present_, 2. ARMS; faces to the +front and salutes. When his salute is acknowledged, he resumes +the carry, faces about, and commands: 1. _Order_, 2. ARMS; +and faces to the front. + +If it be an officer entitled to inspect the guard, after saluting +and before bringing his guard to an order, the officer of the +guard reports: "Sir, all present or accounted for"; or "Sir, +(so-and-so) is absent"; or if the roll call has been omitted: +"Sir, the guard is formed," except that at guard mounting the +commanders of the guards present their guards and salute without +making any report. + +Between retreat and reveille the commander of the guard salutes +and reports but does not bring the guard to a present. + +51. To those entitled to have the guard turned out but not entitled +to inspect it, no report will be made; nor will a report be made +to any officer unless he halts in front of the guard. + +52. When a guard commanded by a noncommissioned officer is turned +out as a compliment or for inspection, the noncommissioned officer, +standing at a right shoulder on the right of the right guide, +commands: 1. _Present_, 2. ARMS. He then executes the rifle +salute. If a report be also required, he will, after saluting, +and before bringing his guard to an order, report as prescribed +for the officer of the guard. (Par. 50.) + +53. When a guard is in line, not under inspection, and commanded +by an officer, the commander of the guard salutes his regimental, +battalion, and company commander, by bringing the guard to attention +and saluting in person. + +For all other officers, excepting those entitled to the compliment +from a guard (par. 224), the commander of the guard salutes in +person, but does not bring the guard to attention. + +When commanded by a noncommissioned officer, the guard is brought +to attention in either case, and the noncommissioned officer +salutes. + +The commander of a guard exchanges salutes with the commanders +of all other bodies of troops; the guard is brought to attention +during the exchange. + +"Present arms" is executed by a guard only when it has turned +out for inspection or as a compliment, and at the ceremonies +of guard mounting and relieving the old guard. + +54. In marching a guard or a detachment of a guard the principles +of paragraph 53 apply. "Eyes right" is executed only in the +ceremonies of guard mounting and relieving the old guard. + +55. If a person entitled to the compliment, or the regimental, +battalion, or company commander, passes in rear of a guard, neither +the compliment nor the salute is given, but the guard is brought to +attention while such person is opposite the post of the commander. + +After any person has received or declined the compliment, or +received the salute from the commander of the guard, official +recognition of his presence thereafter while he remains in the +vicinity will be taken by bringing the guard to attention. + +56. The commander of the guard will inspect the guard at reveille +and retreat, and at such other times as may be necessary, to +assure himself that the men are in proper condition to perform +their duties and that their arms and equipments are in proper +condition. For inspection by other officers, he prepares the +guard in each case as directed by the inspecting officer. + +57. The guard will not be paraded during ceremonies unless directed +by the commanding officer. + +58. At all formations members of the guard or reliefs will execute +inspection arms as prescribed in the drill regulations of their +arm. + +59. The commander of the guard will see that all sentinels are +habitually relieved every two hours, unless the weather or other +cause makes it necessary that it be done at shorter or longer +intervals, as directed by the commanding officer. + +60. He will question his noncommissioned officers and sentinels +relative to the instructions they may have received from the old +guard; he will see that patrols and visits of inspection are +made as directed by the officer of the day. + +61. He will see that the special orders for each post and member of +the guard, either written or printed, are posted in the guardhouse +and, if practicable, in the sentry box or other sheltered place +to which the member of the guard has constant access. + +62. He will see that the proper calls are sounded at the hours +appointed by the commanding officer. + +63. Should a member of the guard be taken sick, or be arrested, +or desert, or leave his guard, he will at once notify the officer +of the day. ( Par. 23.) + +64. He will, when the countersign is used (pars. 210 to 216), +communicate it to the noncommissioned officers of the guard and +see that it is duly communicated to the sentinels before the hour +for challenging; the countersign will not be given to sentinels +posted at the guardhouse. + +65. He will have the details for hoisting the flag at reveille +and lowering it at retreat, and for firing the reveille and retreat +gun, made in time for the proper performance of these duties. +(See pars. 338, 344, 345, and 346.) He will see that the flags +are kept in the best condition possible, and that they are never +handled except in the proper performance of duty. + +66. He may permit members of the guard while at the guardhouse +to remove their head dress, overcoats, and gloves; if they leave +the guardhouse for any purpose whatever, he will require that +they be properly equipped and armed, according to the character +of the service in which engaged, or as directed by the commanding +officer. + +67. He will enter in the guard report a report of his tour of +duty and, on the completion of his tour, will present it to the +officer of the day. He will transmit with his report all passes +turned in at the post of the guard. + +68. Whenever a prisoner is sent to the guardhouse or guard tent +for confinement, he will cause him to be searched, and will without +unnecessary delay, report the case to the officer of the day. + +69. Under war conditions, if anyone is to be passed out of camp +at night, he will be sent to the commander of the guard who will +have him passed beyond the sentinels. + +70. The commander of the guard will detain at the guardhouse all +suspicious characters, or parties attempting to pass a sentinel's +post without authority, reporting his action to the officer of +the day, to whom persons so arrested will be sent, if necessary. + +71. He will inspect the guardrooms and cells, and the irons of +such prisoners as may be ironed, at least once during his tour, +and at such other times as he may deem necessary. + +72. He will cause the corporals of the old and new reliefs to +verify together, immediately before each relief goes on post, +the number of prisoners who should then properly be at the +guardhouse. + +73. He will see that the sentences of prisoners under his charge +are executed strictly in accordance with the action of the reviewing +authority. + +74. When no special prisoner guard has been detailed (par. 300), +he will, as far as practicable, assign as guards over working +parties of prisoners sentinels from posts guarded at night only. + +75. The commander of the guard will inspect all meals sent to +the guardhouse and see that the quantity and quality of food +are in accordance with regulations. + +76. At guard mounting he will report to the old officer of the +day all cases of prisoners whose terms of sentence expire on +that day, and also all cases of prisoners concerning whom no +statement of charges has been received. (See par. 241.) + +77. The commander of the guard is responsible for the security +of the prisoners under the charge of his guard; he becomes +responsible for them after their number has been verified and +they have been turned over to the custody of his guard by the +old guard or by the prisoner guard or overseers. + +78. The prisoners will be verified and turned over to the new +guard without parading them, unless the commanding officer or +the officer of the day shall direct otherwise. + +79. To receive the prisoners at the guardhouse when they have +been paraded and after they have been verified by the officers +of the day, the commander of the new guard directs his sergeant +to form his guard with an interval, and commands: 1. Prisoners, 2. +_Right_, 3. FACE, 4. _Forward_, 5. MARCH. The prisoner's +having arrived opposite the interval in the new guard, he commands: +1. Prisoners, 2. HALT, 3. _Left_, 4. FACE, 5. _Right_(or_left)_, +6. DRESS. 7. FRONT. + +The prisoners dress on the line of the new guard. + + +SECTION 5. SERGEANT OF THE GUARD. + +80. The senior noncommissioned officer of the guard always acts +as sergeant of the guard, and if there be no officer of the guard, +will perform the duties prescribed for the commander of the guard. + +81. The sergeant of the guard has general supervision over the +other noncommissioned officers and the musicians and privates +of the guard, and must be thoroughly familiar with all of their +orders and duties. + +82. He is directly responsible for the property under charge +of the guard, and will see that it is properly cared for. He +will make lists of articles taken out by working parties and see +that all such articles are duly returned. If they are not, he +will immediately report the fact to the commander of the guard. + +83. Immediately after guard mounting he will prepare duplicate +lists of the names of all noncommissioned officers, musicians, and +privates of the guard, showing the relief and post or duties of +each. One list will be handed as soon as possible to the commander +of the guard; the other will be retained by the sergeant. + +84. He will see that all reliefs are turned out at the proper +time, and that the corporals thoroughly understand, and are prompt +and efficient in, the discharge of their duties. + +85. During the temporary absence from the guardhouse of the sergeant +of the guard, the next in rank of the noncommissioned officers +will perform his duties. + +86. Should the corporal whose relief is on post be called away +from the guardhouse, the sergeant of the guard will designate +a noncommissioned officer to take the corporal's place until +his return. + +87. The sergeant of the guard is responsible at all times for +the proper police of the guardhouse or guard tent, including +the ground about them and the prison cells. + +88. At first sergeant's call he will proceed to the adjutant's +office and obtain the guard report book. + +89. When the national or regimental colors are taken from the +stacks of the color line, the color bearer and guard, or the +sergeant of the guard, unarmed, and two armed privates as a guard, +will escort the colors to the colonel's quarters, as prescribed +for the color guard in the drill regulations of the arm of the +service to which the guard belongs. + +90. He will report to the commander of the guard any suspicious +or unusual occurrence that comes under his notice, will warn +him of the approach of any armed body, and will send to him all +persons arrested by the guard. + +91. When the guard is turned out its formation will be as follows: +The senior noncommissioned officer, if commander of the guard, is +on the right of the right guide; if not commander of the guard, +he is in the line of file closers, in rear of the right four +of the guard; the next in rank is right guide; the next left +guide: the others in the line of file closers, usually each in +rear of his relief; the field music, with its left three paces +to the right of the right guide. The reliefs form in the same +order as when the guard was first divided, except that if the +guard consists of dismounted cavalry and infantry, the cavalry +forms on the left. + +92. The sergeant forms the guard, calls the roll, and, if not +in command of the guard, reports to the commander of the guard +as prescribed in drill regulations for a first sergeant forming +a troop or company; the guard is not divided into platoons or +sections, and, except when the whole guard is formed prior to +marching off, fours are not counted. + +93. The sergeant reports as follows: "Sir, all present or accounted +for," or "Sir, (so-and-so) is absent"; or if the roll call has +been omitted, "Sir, the guard is formed." Only men absent without +proper authority are reported absent. He then takes his place, +without command. + +94. At night the roll may be called by reliefs and numbers instead +of names; thus, the first relief being on post: Second relief: +No. 1; No. 2, etc.; Third relief, Corporal; No. 1, etc. + +95. Calling the roll will be dispensed with in forming the guard +when it is turned out as a compliment, on the approach of an +armed body, or in any sudden emergency; but in such cases the +roll may be called before dismissing the guard. If the guard +be turned out for an officer entitled to inspect it, the roll +will, unless he directs otherwise, always be called before a +report is made. + +96. The sergeant of the guard has direct charge of the prisoners, +except during such time us they may be under the charge of the +prisoner guard or overseers, and is responsible to the commander +of the guard for their security. + +97. He will carry the keys of the guardroom and cells, and will +not suffer them to leave his personal possession while he is +at the guardhouse, except as hereinafter provided. (Par. 99.) +Should he leave the guardhouse for any purpose he will turn the +keys over to the noncommissioned officer who takes his place. +(Par. 85.) + +98. He will count the knives, forks, etc., given to the prisoners +with their food, and see that none of these articles remain in +their possession. He will see that no forbidden articles of any +kind are conveyed to the prisoners. + +99. Prisoners when paraded with the guard are placed in line, in +its center. The sergeant, immediately before forming the guard, +will turn over his keys to the noncommissioned officer at the +guardhouse. Having formed the guard, he will divide it into two +nearly equal parts. Indicating the point of division with his +hand, he commands: 1. _Right_(or_left)_, 2. FACE, 3. +_Forward_, 4. MARCH, 5. _Guard_, 6. HALT, 7. _Left_ +_(or_right)_, 8. FACE. + +If the first command be RIGHT FACE, the right half of the guard +only will execute the movements; if LEFT FACE, the left half only +will execute them. The command HALT is given when sufficient +interval is obtained to admit the prisoners. The doors of the +guardroom and cells are then opened by the noncommissioned officer +having the keys. The prisoners will file out under the supervision +of the sergeant, the noncommissioned officer, and sentinel on +duty at the guardhouse, and such other sentinels all may be +necessary; they will form in line in the interval between the +two parts of the guard. + +100. To return the prisoners to the guardroom and cells, the +sergeant commands; 1. _Prisoners_, 2. _Right_(or_left)_,_ +3. FACE, 4. _Column_right_(or_left)_, 5. MARCH. + +The prisoners, under the same supervision as before, return to +their proper rooms or cells. + +101. To close the guard. the sergeant commands: 1. _Left_(or_ +_right)_, 2. FACE, 3. _Forward_, 4. MARCH, 5. _Guard_, +6. HALT, 7. _Right_(or_left)_, 8. FACE. + +The left or right half only of the guard, as indicated, executes +the movement. + +102. If there be but few prisoners, the sergeant may indicate +the point of division as above, and form the necessary interval +by the commands: 1. _Right_(or_left)_step_, 2. MARCH: 3. +_Guard_, 4. HALT, and close the intervals by the commands: +1. _Left_(or_right)_step_, 2. MARCH, 3. _Guard_, 4. +HALT. + +103. If sentinels are numerous, reliefs may, at the discretion of +the commanding officer, be posted in detachments, and sergeants, +as well as corporals, required to relieve and post them. + + +SECTION 6. CORPORAL OF THE GUARD. + +104. A corporal of the guard receives and obeys orders from none +but noncommissioned officers of the guard senior to himself, the +officers of the guard, the officer of the day, and the commanding +officer. + +105. It is the duty of the corporal of the guard to post and +relieve sentinels and to instruct the members of his relief in +their orders and duties. + +106. Immediately after the division of the guard into reliefs +the corporals will assign the members of their respective reliefs +to posts by number, and a soldier so assigned to his post will +not be changed to another during the same tour of guard duty, +unless by direction of the commander of the guard or higher +authority. Usually, experienced soldiers are placed over the arms +of the guard, and at remote and responsible posts. + +107. Each corporal will then make a list of the members of his +relief, including himself. This list will contain the number of +the relief, the name, the company, and the regiment of every +member thereof, and the post to which each is assigned. The list +will be made in duplicate, one copy to be given to the sergeant +of the guard as soon as completed, the other to be retained by +the corporal. + +108. When directed by the commander of the guard, the corporal +of the first relief forms his relief, and then commands: CALL +OFF. + +Commencing on the right, the men call off alternately rear and +front rank, "one," "two," "three," "four," and so on; it in single +rank, they call off from right to left. The corporal then commands: +1. _Right_, 2. FACE, 3. _Forward_, 4. MARCH. + +The corporal marches on the left, and near the rear file, in +order to observe the march. The corporal of the old guard marches +on the right of the leading file, and takes command when the +last one of the old sentinels is relieved, changing places with +the corporal of the new guard. + +109. When the relief arrives at six paces from a sentinel (see +par. 168), the corporal halts it and commands, according to the +number of the post: No. (----.) + +Both sentinels execute port arms or saber; the new sentinel +approaches the old, halting about one pace from him. (See par. +172.) + +110. The corporals advance and place themselves, facing each other, +a little in advance of the new sentinel, the old corporal on his +right, the new corporal on his left, both at right shoulder, and +observe that the old sentinel transmits correctly his instructions. + +The following diagram will illustrate the positions taken: + + A + R - + | | | | | C| |D + | | | | - + B + +R is the relief; A, the new corporal; B, the old; C, the new +sentinel; D, the old. + +111. The instructions relative to the post having been communicated, +the new corporal commands. Post: both sentinels then resume the +right shoulder, face toward the new corporal and step back so as +to allow the relief to pass in front of them. The new corporal +then commands: "1. _Forward_, 2. March"; the old sentinel +takes his place in rear of the relief as it passes him, his piece +in the same position as those of the relief. The new sentinel +stands fast at a right shoulder until the relief has passed six +paces beyond him, when he walks his post. The corporals take +their places as the relief passes them. + +112. Mounted sentinels are posted and relieved in accordance with +the same principles. + +113. On the return of the old relief, the corporal of the new +guard falls out when the relief halts; the corporal of the old +guard forms his relief on the left of the old guard, salutes, +and reports to the commander of his guard: "Sir, the relief is +present"; or "Sir, (so and so) is absent," and takes his place +in the guard. + +114. To post a relief other than that which is posted when the +old guard is relieved, its corporal commands: + +1. _(Such)_relief_, 2. FALL IN; and if arms are stacked, +they are taken at the proper commands. + +The relief is formed facing to the front, with arms at an order, +the men place themselves according to the numbers of their respective +posts, viz, two, four, six, and so on, in the front rank, and +one, three, five, and so on, in the rear rank. The corporal, +standing about two paces in front of the center of his relief, +then commands: CALL OFF. + +The men call off as prescribed. The corporal then commands: 1. +_Inspection_, 2. ARMS, 3. _Order_, 4. ARMS; faces the +commander of the guard, executes the rifle salute, reports: "Sir, +the relief is present "; or "Sir, (so and so) is absent"; he +then takes his place on the right at order arms. + +115. When the commander of the guard directs the corporal, POST +YOUR RELIEF, the corporal salutes and posts his relief as prescribed +(Pars. 108 to 111); the corporal of the relief on post does not +go with the new relief, except when necessary to show the way. + +116. To dismiss the old relief, it is halted and faced to the +front at the guardhouse by the corporal of the new relief, who +then falls out; the corporal of the old relief then steps in +front of the relief and dismisses it by the proper commands. + +117. Should the pieces have been loaded before the relief was +posted, the corporal will, before dismissing the relief, see +that no cartridges are left in the chambers or magazines. The +same rule applies to sentinels over prisoners. + +118. Each corporal will thoroughly acquaint himself with all +the special orders of every sentinel on his relief, and see that +each understands and correctly transmits such order in detail +to his successor. + +119. There should be at least one noncommissioned officer constantly +on the alert at the guardhouse, usually the corporal whose relief +is on post. This noncommissioned officer takes post near the +entrance of the guardhouse, and does not fall in with the guard +when it is formed. He will have his rifle constantly with him. + +120. Whenever it becomes necessary for the corporal to leave +his post near the entrance of the guardhouse, he will notify +the sergeant of the guard, who will at once take his place, or +designate another noncommissioned officer to do so. + +121. He will see that no person enters the guardhouse or guard +tent, or crosses the posts of the sentinels there posted without +proper authority. + +122. Should any sentinel call for the corporal of the guard, +the corporal will, in every case, at once and quickly proceed to +such sentinel. He will notify the sergeant of the guard before +leaving the guardhouse. + +123. He will at once report to the commander of the guard any +violation of regulations or any unusual occurrence which is reported +to him by a sentinel, or which comes to his notice in any other +way. + +124. Should a sentinel call "The Guard," the corporal will promptly +notify the commander of the guard. + +125. Should a sentinel call "Relief," the corporal will at once +proceed to the post of such sentinel, taking with him the man +next for duty on that post. If the sentinel is relieved for a +short time only, the corporal will again post him as soon as +the necessity for his relief ceases. + +126. When the countersign is used, the corporal at the posting +of the relief during whose tour challenging is to begin gives +the countersign to the members of the relief, excepting those +posted at the guardhouse. + +127. He will wake the corporal whose relief is next on post in +time for the latter to verify the prisoners, form his relief, +and post it at the proper hour. + +128. Should the guard be turned out, each corporal will call his +own relief, and cause its members to fall in promptly. + +129. Tents or bunks in the same vicinity will be designated for the +reliefs so that all the members of each relief may, if necessary, +be found and turned out by the corporal in the least time and +with the least confusion. + +130. When challenged by a sentinel while posting his relief, the +corporal commands: 1. _Relief_, 2. HALT; to the sentinel's +challenge he answers "Relief," and at the order of the sentinel +he advances alone to give the countersign, or to be recognized. +When the sentinel says, "Advance relief," the corporal commands: +1. _Forward_, 2. MARCH. + +If to be relieved, the sentinel is then relieved as prescribed. + +131. Between retreat and reveille, the corporal of the guard +will challenge all suspicious looking persons or parties he may +observe, first halting his patrol or relief, if either be with +him. He will advance them in the same manner that sentinels on +post advance like parties (pars. 191 to 197), but if the route +of a patrol is on a continuous chain of sentinels, he should +not challenge persons coming near him unless he has reason to +believe that they have eluded the vigilance of sentinels. + +132. Between retreat and reveille, whenever so ordered by an +officer entitled to inspect the guard, the corporal will call: +"Turn out the guard," announcing the title of the officer, and +then, if not otherwise ordered, he will salute and return to +his post. + +133. As a general rule he will advance parties approaching the +guard at night in the same manner that sentinels on post advance +like parties. Thus, the sentinel at the guardhouse challenges +and repeats the answer to the corporal, as prescribed hereafter +(par. 200); the corporal, advancing at port arms, says: "Advance +(so and so) with the countersign," or "to be recognized," if +there be no countersign used; the countersign being correctly +given, or the party being duly recognized, the corporal says: +"Advance (so and so)," repeating the answer to the challenge +of the sentinel. + +134. When officers of different rank approach the guardhouse +from different directions at the same time, the senior will be +advanced first, and will not be made to wait for his junior. + +135. Out of ranks and under arms, the corporal salutes with the +rifle salute. He will salute all officers, whether by day or +night. + +136. The corporal will examine parties halted and detained by +sentinels, and, if he have reason to believe the parties have +no authority to cross sentinel's posts, will conduct them to +the commander of the guard. + +137. The corporal of the guard will arrest all suspicious looking +characters prowling about the post or camp, all persons of a +disorderly character disturbing the peace, and all persons taken +in the act of committing crime against the Government on a military +reservation or post. All persons arrested by corporals of the +guard or by sentinels will at once be conducted to the commander +of the guard by the corporal. + + +SECTION 7. MUSICIANS OF THE GUARD. + +138. The musicians of the guard will sound calls as prescribed +by the commanding officer. + +139. Should the guard be turned out for national or regimental +colors or standards, uncased, the field music of the guard will, +when the guard present arms, sound, "To the color" or "To the +standard"; or, if for any person entitled thereto, the march, +flourishes, or ruffles, prescribed in paragraphs 375, 376, and +377, A. R. + + +SECTION 8. ORDERLIES AND COLOR SENTINELS. + +140. When so directed by the commanding officer, the officer +who inspects the guard at guard mounting will select from the +members of the new guard an orderly for the commanding officer +and such number of other orderlies and color sentinels as may +be required. + +141. For these positions the soldiers will be chosen who are +most correct in the performance of duty and in military bearing, +neatest in person and clothing, and whose arms and accouterments +are in the best condition. Clothing, arms, and equipments must +conform to regulations. If there is any doubt as to the relative +qualifications of two or more soldiers, the inspecting officer +will cause them to fall out at the guardhouse and to form in +line in single rank. He will then, by testing them in drill +regulations, select the most proficient. The commander of the +guard will be notified of the selection. + +142. When directed by the commander of the guard to fall out +and report an orderly will give his name, company, and regiment +to the sergeant of the guard, and, leaving his rifle in the arm +rack in his company quarters, will proceed at once to the officer +to whom he is assigned, reporting: "Sir, Private ----, Company +----, reports all orderly." + +143. If the orderly selected be a cavalryman, he will leave his +rifle in the arm rack of his troop quarters, and report with +his belt on, but without side arms unless specially otherwise +ordered. + +144. Orderlies, while on duty as such, are subject only to the +orders of the commanding officer and of the officers to whom +they are ordered to report. + +145. When an orderly is ordered to carry a message, he will be +careful to deliver it exactly as it was given to him. + +146. His tour of duty ends when he is relieved by the orderly +selected from the guard relieving his own. + +147. Orderlies are members of the guard, and their name, company, +and regiment are entered on the guard report and lists of the +guard. + +148. If a color line is established, sufficient sentinels are +placed on the color line to guard the colors and stacks. + +149. Color sentinels are posted only so long as the stacks are +formed. The commander of the guard will divide the time equally +among them. + +150. When stacks are broken, the color sentinels may be permitted +to return to their respective companies. They are required to +report in person to the commander of the guard at reveille and +retreat. They will fall in with the guard, under arms, at guard +mounting. + +151. Color sentinels are not placed on the regular reliefs, nor +are their posts numbered. In calling for the corporal of the +guard, they call: "Corporal of the guard. Color line." + +152. Officers or enlisted men passing the uncased colors will +render the prescribed salute. If the colors are on the stacks, +the salute will be made on crossing the color line or on passing +the colors. + +153. A sentinel placed over the colors will not permit them to be +moved except in the presence of an armed escort. Unless otherwise +ordered by the commanding officer, he will allow no one to touch +them but the color bearer. + +He will not permit any soldier to take arms from the stacks or +to touch them except by order of an officer or noncommissioned +officer of the guard. + +If any person passing the colors or crossing the color line falls +to salute the colors, the sentinel will caution him to do so, +and if the caution be not heeded he will call the corporal of +the guard and report the facts. + + +SECTION 9. PRIVATES OF THE GUARD. + +154. Privates are assigned to reliefs by the commander or the +guard, and to posts usually by the corporal of their relief. +They will not change from one relief or post to another during +the same tour of guard duty unless by proper authority. + + +SECTION 10. ORDERS FOR SENTINELS. + +155. Orders for sentinels are of two classes: General orders and +special orders. General orders apply to all sentinels. Special +orders relate to particular posts and duties. + +156. Sentinels will be required to memorize the following: + +My general orders are: + +1. To take charge of this post and all Government property in +view. + +2. To walk my post in a military manner keeping always on the +alert and observing everything that takes place within sight +or hearing. + +3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce. + +4. To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guard +house than my own. + +5. To quit my post only when properly relieved. + +6. To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves +me all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, +and officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard only. + +7. To talk to no one except in line of duty. + +8. In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm. + +9. To allow no one to commit a nuisance on or near my post. + +10. In any case not covered by instructions to call the corporal +of the guard. + +11. To salute all officers, and all colors and standards not cased. + +12. To be especially watchful at night and during the time for +challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post and +to allow no one to pass without proper authority. + + +REGULATIONS RELATING TO THE GENERAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS. + + +No. 1: To take charge of this post and all Government property +in view. + +157. All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are required +to observe respect toward sentinels and members of the guard +when such are in the performance of their duties. + +158. A sentinel will at once report to the corporal of the guard +every unusual or suspicious occurrence noted. + +159. He will arrest suspicious persons prowling about the post +or camp at any time, all parties to a disorder occurring on or +near his post, and all, except authorized persons, who attempt +to enter the camp at night, and will turn over ro the corporal +of the guard all persons arrested. + +160. The number, limits, and extent of his post will invariably +constitute part of the special orders of a sentinel on post. +The limits of his post should be so defined as to include every +place to which he is required to go in the performance of his +duties. + + +No. 2: To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always on +the alert and observing everything that takes place within sight +or hearing. + +161. A sentinel is not required to halt and change the position +of his rifle on arriving at the end of his post, nor to execute TO +THE REAR, MARCH, precisely as prescribed in the drill regulations, +but faces about while walking in the manner most convenient to +him and at any part of his post as may be best suited to the +proper performance of his duties. He carries his rifle on either +shoulder, and in wet or severe weather, when not in a sentry +box, may carry it at a secure. + +162. Sentinels when in sentry boxes stand at ease. Sentry boxes +will be used in wet weather only, or at other times when specially +authorized by the commanding officer. + +163. In very hot weather, sentinels may be authorized to stand +at ease on their posts, provided they can effectively discharge +their duties in this position; but they will take advantage of +this privilege only on the express authority of the officer of +the day or the commander of the guard. + +164. A mounted sentinel may dismount occasionally and lead his +horse, but will not relax his vigilance. + + +No. 3: To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce. + +165. A sentinel will ordinarily report a violation of orders +when he is inspected or relieved, but if the case be urgent, +he will call the corporal of the guard, and also, if necessary, +will arrest the offender. + + +No. 4: To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the +guardhouse than my own. + +166. To call the corporal of the guard for any purpose other +than relief, fire, or disorder (pars. 167 and 178), a sentinel +will call, "Corporal of the guard, No. (----)," adding the number +of his post. In no case will any sentinel call, "Never mind the +corporal"; nor will the corporal heed such call if given. + + +No. 5: To quit my post only when properly relieved. + +167. If relief becomes necessary, by reason of sickness or other +cause, a sentinel will call, "Corporal of the guard, No. (----), +Relief," giving the number of his post. + +168. Whenever a sentinel is to be relieved, he will halt, and +with arms at a right shoulder, will face toward the relief, when +it is 30 paces from him. He will come to a port arms with the +new sentinel, and in a low tone will transmit to him all the +special orders relating to the post and any other information +which will assist him to better perform his duties. + + +No. 6: To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves +me, all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, +and officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard only. + +169. During his tour of duty a soldier is subject to the orders +of the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers and +noncommissioned officers of the guard only; but any officer is +competent to investigate apparent violations of regulations by +members of the guard. + +170. A sentinel will quit his piece on an explicit order from +any person from whom he lawfully receives orders while on post; +under no circumstances will he yield it to any other person. Unless +necessity therefor exists, no person will require a sentinel to +quit his piece, even to allow it to be inspected. + +171. A sentinel will not divulge the countersign (pars. 209 to +217) to anyone except the sentinel who relieves him, or to a +person from whom he properly receives orders, on such person's +verbal order given personally. Privates of the guard will not +use the countersign except in the performance of their duties +while posted as sentinels. + + +No. 7: To talk to no one except in line of duty. + +172. When calling for any purpose, challenging, or holding +communication with any person a dismounted sentinel armed with +a rifle or saber will take the position of port arms or saber. +At night a dismounted sentinel armed with a pistol takes the +position of raised pistol in challenging or holding communication. +A mounted sentinel does not ordinarily draw his weapon in the +daytime when challenging or holding conversation; but if drawn, he +holds it at advance rifle, raise pistol, or port saber, according +as he is armed with a rifle, pistol, or saber. At night in +challenging and holding conversation his weapon is drawn and +held as just prescribed, depending on whether he is armed with +a rifle, pistol, or saber. + + +No. 8: In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm. + +173. In case of fire, a sentinel will call, "Fire, No. (----)," +adding the number of his post; if possible, he will extinguish +the fire himself. In case of disorder he will call, "The Guard, +No. (----)," adding the number of his post. If the danger be +great, he will in either case discharge his piece before calling. + + +No. 11: To salute all officers and all colors and standards not +cased. + +174. When not engaged in the performance of a specific duty, +the proper execution of which would prevent it, a member of the +guard will salute all officers who pass him. This rule applies +at all hours of the day or night, except in the case of mounted +sentinels armed with a rifle or pistol, or dismounted sentinels +armed with a pistol, after challenging. (See par. 181.) + +175. Sentinels will salute as follows: A dismounted sentinel armed +with a rifle or saber, salutes by presenting arms; if otherwise +armed, he salutes with the right hand. + +A mounted sentinel, if armed with a saber and the saber be drawn, +salutes by presenting saber; otherwise he salutes in all cases +with the right hand. + +176. To salute, a dismounted sentinel, with piece at a right +shoulder or saber at a carry, halts and faces toward the person +to be saluted when the latter arrives within 30 paces. + +The limit within which individuals and insignia of rank can be +readily recognized is assumed to be about 30 paces, and therefore +at this distance cognizance is taken of the person or party to +be saluted. + +177. The salute is rendered at six paces; if the person to be +saluted does not arrive within that distance, then when he is +nearest. + +178. A sentinel in a sentry box, armed with a rifle, stands at +attention in the doorway on the approach of a person or party +entitled to salute, and salutes by presenting arms according +to the foregoing rules. + +If armed with a saber, he stands at a carry and salutes as before. + +179. A mounted sentinel on a regular post, halts, faces, and +salutes in accordance with the foregoing rules. If doing patrol +duty, he salutes, but does not halt unless spoken to. + +180. Sentinels salute, in accordance with the foregoing rules, +all persons and parties entitled to compliments from the guards +(pars. 224, 227, and 228); officers of the Army, Navy, and Marine +Corps; military and naval officers of foreign powers; officers +of volunteers and militia officers when in uniform. + +181. A sentinel salutes as just prescribed when an officer comes +on his post; if the officer holds communication with the sentinel, +the sentinel again salutes when the officer leaves him. + +During the hours when challenging is prescribed, the first salute +is given as soon as the officer has been duly recognized and +advanced. A mounted sentinel armed with a rifle or pistol, or a +dismounted sentinel armed with a pistol, does not salute after +challenging. + +He stands at advance rifle or raise pistol until the officer passes. + +182. In case of the approach of an armed party of the guard, the +sentinel will halt when it is about 30 paces from him, facing +toward the party with his piece at the right shoulder. If not +himself relieved, he will, as the party passes, place himself +so that the party will pass in front of him; he resumes walking +his post when the party has reached six paces beyond him. + +183. An officer is entitled to the compliments prescribed, whether +in uniform or not. + +184. A sentinel in communication with an officer will not interrupt +the conversation to salute. In the case of seniors the officer +will salute, whereupon the sentinel will salute. + +185. When the flag is being lowered at retreat, a sentinel on +post and in view of the flag will face the flag, and, at the +first note of the Star Spangled Banner or to the color will come +to a present arms. At the sounding of the last note he will resume +walking his post. + + +No. 12: To be especially watchful at night and during the time +for challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post, +and to allow no one to pass without proper authority. + +186. During challenging hours, it a sentinel sees any person +or party on or near his post, he will advance rapidly along his +post toward such person or party and when within about 30 yards +will challenge sharply, "Halt, Who is there!" He will place himself +in the best possible position to receive or, if necessary, to +arrest the person or party. + +187. In case a mounted party be challenged, the sentinel will +call, "Halt, Dismount. Who is there?" + +188. The sentinel will permit only one of any party to approach +him for the purpose of giving the countersign (pars. 209 to 217), +or, if no countersign be used, of being duly recognized. When +this is done the whole party is advanced, i. e., allowed to pass. + +189. In all cases the sentinel must satisfy himself beyond a +reasonable doubt that the parties are what they represent themselves +to be and have a right to pass. If he is not satisfied, he must cause +them to stand and call the corporal of the guard. So, likewise, if +he have no authority to pass persons with the countersign, or +when the party has not the countersign, or gives all incorrect +one. + +190. A sentinel will not permit any person to approach so close +as to prevent the proper use of his own weapon before recognizing +the person or receiving the countersign. + +191. When two or more persons approach in one party, the sentinel, +on receiving an answer that indicates that some one in the party +has the countersign, will say, "Advance one with the countersign," +and, if the countersign is given correctly, will then say, "Advance +(so-and-so)," repeating the answer to his challenge. Thus it the +answer be "Relief (friend with the countersign, patrol, etc.)," +the sentinel will say, "Advance one with the countersign"; then +"Advance, relief (friends, patrol, etc.)." + +192. If a person having the countersign approach alone, he advanced +to give the countersign. Thus if the answer be "Friend with the +countersign (or officer of the day, or etc.)." the sentinel will +say, "Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or etc.) with the +countersign"; then "Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or +etc.)." + +193. If two or more persons approach a sentinel's post from different +directions at the same time, all such persons are challenged in +turn and required to halt and to remain halted until advanced. + +The senior is first advanced, in accordance with the foregoing +rules. + +194. If a party is already advanced and in communication with +a sentinel, the latter will challenge any other party that may +approach; if the party challenged be senior to the one already +on his post, the sentinel will advance the new party at once. The +senior may allow him to advance any or all of the other parties; +otherwise the sentinel will not advance any of them until the +senior leaves him. He will then advance the senior only of the +remaining parties, and so on. + +195. The following order of rank will govern a sentinel in advancing +different persons or parties approaching his post: Commanding +officers, officer of the day, officer of the guard, officers, +patrols, reliefs, noncommissioned officers of the guard in order +of rank, friends. + +196. A sentinel will never allow himself to be surprised, nor +permit two parties to advance upon him at the same time. + +197. If no countersign be used, the rules for challenging are the +same. The rules for advancing parties are modified only as follows: +Instead of saying "Advance (so-and-so) with the countersign," +the sentinel will say; "Advance (so-and-so) to be recognized." +Upon recognition he will say, "Advance (so-and-so)." + +198. Answers to a sentinel's challenge intended to confuse or +mislead him are prohibited, but the use of such an answer as +"Friends with the countersign," is not to be understood as +misleading, but as the usual answer made by officers, patrol, +etc., when the purpose of their visit makes it desirable that +their official capacity should not be announced. + + +SPECIAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS AT THE POST OF THE GUARD. + +199. Sentinels posted at the guard will be required to memorize +the following: + +Between reveille and retreat to turn out the guard for all persons +designated by the commanding officer, for all colors or standards +not cased, and in time of war for all armed parties approaching +my post, except troops at drill and reliefs and detachments of +the guard. + +At night after challenging any person or party, to advance no +one but call the corporal of the guard, repeating the answer +to the challenge. + +200. After receiving an answer to his challenge, the sentinel +calls, "Corporal of the guard (so and so)," repeating the answer +to the challenge. + +He does not in such cases repeat the number of his post. + +201. He remains in the position assumed in challenging until +the corporal has recognized or advanced the person or party +challenged, when he resumes walking his post, or, if the person +or party he entitled thereto, he salutes and, as soon as the +salute has been acknowledged, resumes walking his post. + +202. The sentinel at the post of the guard will be notified by +direction of the commanding officer of the presence in camp or +garrison of persons entitled to the compliment. (Par. 224.) + +203. The following examples illustrate the manner in which the +sentinel at the post of the guard will turn out the guard upon the +approach of persons or parties entitled to the compliment (pars. +224, 227, and 228), "Turn out the guard, commanding officer"; "Turn +out the guard, governor of a Territory"; "Turn out the guard, +national colors"; "Turn out the guard, armed party"; etc. + +At the approach of the new guard at guard mounting the sentinel +will call, "Turn out the guard, armed party." + +204. Should the person named by the sentinel not desire the guard +formed, he will salute, whereupon the sentinel will call "Never +mind the guard." + +205. After having culled "Turn out the guard," the sentinel will +never call "Never mind the guard," on the approach of an armed +party. + +206. Though the guard be already formed he will not fail to call, +"Turn out the guard," as required in his special orders, except +that the guard will not be turned out for any person while his +senior is at or coming to the post of the guard. + +207. The sentinels at the post of the guard will warn the commander +of the approach of any armed body and of the presence in the +vicinity of all suspicious or disorderly persons. + +208. In case of fire or disorder in sight or hearing, the sentinel +at the guardhouse will call the corporal of the guard and report +the facts to him. + + +SECTION 11. COUNTERSIGNS AND PAROLES. + +209. _Seventy-seventh_article_of_war_.--Any person subject +to military law who makes known the parole or countersign to any +person not entitled to receive it according to the rules and +discipline of war, or gives a parole or countersign different +from that which he received, shall, if the offense be committed +in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct. (See par. 171.) + +210. The COUNTERSIGN is a word given daily from the principal +headquarters of a command to aid guards and sentinels in identifying +persons who may be authorized to pass at night. + +It is given to such persons as may be authorized to pass and +repass sentinels' posts during the night, and to officers, +noncommissioned officers, and sentinels of the guard. + +211. The PAROLE is a word used as a check on the countersign +in order to obtain more accurate identification of persons. It +is imparted only to those who are entitled to inspect guards +and to commanders of guards. + +The parole or countersign, or both, are sent sealed in the form +of an order to those entitled to them. + +212. When the commander of the guard demands the parole, he will +advance and receive it as the corporal receives the countersign. +(See par. 133.) + +213. As the communications containing the parole and countersign +must at times be distributed by many orderlies, the parole intrusted +to many officers, and the countersign and parole to many officers +and sentinels, and as both the countersign and parole must, for +large commands, be prepared several days in advance, there is +always danger of their being lost or becoming known to persons +who would make improper use of them; moreover, a sentinel is +too apt to take it for granted that any person who gives the +right countersign is what he represents himself to be; hence for +outpost duty there is greater security in omitting the use of +the countersign and parole, or in using them with great caution. +The chief reliance should be upon personal recognition or +identification of all persons claiming authority to pass. + +Persons whose sole means of identification is the countersign, or +concerning whose authority to pass there is a reasonable doubt, +should not be allowed to pass without the authority of the corporal +of the guard after proper investigation; the corporal will take +to his next superior any person about whom he is not competent +to decide. + +214. The COUNTERSIGN is usually the name of a battle; the PAROLE, +that of a general or other distinguished person. + +215. When they can not be communicated daily, a series of words +for some days in advance may be sent to posts or detachments that +are to use the same parole or countersign as the main body. + +216. If the countersign be lost, or if a member of the guard +deserts with it, the commander on the spot will substitute another +for it and report the case at once to headquarters. + +217. In addition to the countersign, use may be made of pre-concerted +signals, such as striking the rifle with the hand or striking the +hands together a certain number of times as agreed upon. Such +signals may be used only by guards that occupy exposed points. + +They are used before the countersign is given and must not be +communicated to anyone not entitled to know the countersign. +Their use is intended to prevent the surprise of a sentinel. + +In the daytime signals such as raising a cap or a handkerchief +in a prearranged manner may be used by sentinels to communicate +with the guard or with each other. + + +SECTION 12. GUARD PATROLS. + +218. A guard patrol consists of one or more men detailed for the +performance of some special service connected with guard duty. + +219. If the patrol be required to go beyond the chain of sentinels, +the officer or noncommissioned officer in charge will be furnished +with the countersign and the outposts and sentinels warned. + +220. If challenged by a sentinel, the patrol is halted by its +commander, and the noncommissioned officer accompanying it advances +alone and gives the countersign. + + +SECTION 13. WATCHMEN. + +221. Enlisted men may be detailed as watchmen or as overseers +over prisoners, and as such will receive their orders and perform +their duties as the commanding officer may direct. + + +SECTION 14. COMPLIMENTS FROM GUARDS. + +222. The compliment from a guard consists in the guard turning +out and presenting arms. (See par. 50.) No compliments will be paid +between retreat and reveille except as provided in paragraphs 361 +and 362, nor will any person other than those named in paragraph +224 receive the compliment. + +223. Though a guard does not turn out between retreat and reveille +as a matter of compliment it may be turned out for inspection +at any time by a person entitled to inspect it. + +224. Between reveille and retreat, the following persons are +entitled to the compliment: The President; sovereign or chief +magistrate of a foreign country and members of a royal-family; +Vice President: President and President pro tempore of the Senate; +American and foreign ambassadors; members of the Cabinet; Chief +Justice; Speaker of the House of Representatives; committees of +Congress officially visiting a military post; governors within +their respective States and Territories; governors general; Assistant +Secretary of War officially visiting a military post; all general +officers of the Army; general officers of foreign services visiting +a post; naval, marine, volunteer, and militia officers in the +service of the United States and holding the rank of general +officer; American or foreign envoys or ministers; ministers +accredited to the United States; charges d'affaires accredited +to the United States; consuls general accredited to the United +Suites; commanding officer of the post or camp; officer of the +day. + +225. The relative rank between officers of the Army and Navy +is as follows: General with admiral, lieutenant general with +vice admiral, major general with rear admiral, brigadier general +with commodore,[13] colonel with captain, lieutenant colonel +with commander, major with lieutenant commander, captain with +lieutenant, first lieutenant with lieutenant (junior grade), +second lieutenant with ensign. (A. R. 12.) + +[Footnote 13: The grade of commodore ceased to exist as a grade +on the active list of the Navy of the United States on Mar. 3, +1899. By section 7 of the act of Mar. 3. 1899, the nine junior +rear admirals are authorized to receive the pay and allowances +of a brigadier general of the Army.] + +226. Sentinels will not be required to memorize paragraph 224, +and, except in the cases of general officers of the Army, the +commanding officer and the officer of the day will be advised in +each case of the presence in camp or garrison of persons entitled +to the compliment. + +227. Guards will turn out and present arms when the national +or regimental colors or standards, not cased, are carried past +by a guard or an armed party. This rule also applies when the +party carrying the colors is at drill. If the drill is conducted +in the vicinity of the guardhouse, the guard will be turned out +when the colors first pass, and not thereafter. + +228. In ease the remains of a deceased officer or soldier are +carried past, the guard will turn out and present arms. + +229. In time of war all guards will turn out under arms when +armed parties, except troops at drill and reliefs or detachments +of the guard, approach their post. (See par. 53.) + +230. The commander of the guard will be notified of the presence +in camp or garrison of all persons entitled to the compliment +except general officers of the Army, the commanding officer, +and the officer of the day. Members of the guard will salute +all persons entitled to the compliment and all officers in the +military or naval service of foreign powers, officers of the +Army, Navy, and Marine Corps, officers of volunteers, and officers +of militia when in uniform. + + +GENERAL RULES CONCERNING GUARD DUTY. + +232. _Eighty-fifth_article_of_war_.-- Any person subject +to military law, except an officer, who is found drunk on duty +shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + +233. All material instructions given to a member of the guard +by an officer having authority will be promptly communicated +to the commander of the guard by the officer giving them. + +234. Should the guard be formed, soldiers will fall in ranks +under arms. At roll call each man, as his name or number and +relief are called, will answer "Here," and come to an ORDER ARMS. + +235. Whenever the guard or a relief is dismissed, each member +not at once required for duty will place his rifle in the arm +racks, if they be provided, and will not remove it therefrom +unless he requires it in the performance of some duty. + +236. Without permission from the commander of the guard, members +of the main guard, except orderlies, will not leave the immediate +vicinity of the guardhouse. Permission to leave will not be granted +except in cases of necessity. + +237. Members of the main guard, except orderlies, will not remove +their accouterments or clothing without permission from the commander +of the guard. (Par. 66.) + + +SECTION 15. PRISONERS. + +238. Articles of war 69, 70, 71, 72, and 73 have special reference +to the confinement of prisoners and should be carefully borne +in mind. + +239. The commander of the guard will place a civilian in confinement +on an order from higher authority only, unless such civilian is +arrested while in the act of committing some crime within the +limits of the military jurisdiction, in which case the commanding +officer will be immediately notified. + +240. Except as provided in the sixty-eighth article of war, or +when restraint is necessary, no soldier will be confined without +the order of an officer, who shall previously inquire into his +offense. (A. R. 930.) + +241. An officer ordering a soldier into confinement will send, +as soon as practicable, a written statement, signed by himself, +to the commander of the guard, setting forth the name, company, +and regiment of such soldier, and a brief statement of the alleged +offense. It is a sufficient statement of the offense to give the +number and article of war under which the soldier is charged. + +242. A prisoner, after his first day of confinement, and until +his sentence has been duly promulgated, is considered as held +in confinement by the commanding officer. After due promulgation +of his sentence, the prisoner is held in confinement by authority +of the officer who reviews the proceedings of the court awarding +sentence. The commander of the guard will state in his report, in +the proper place, the name of the officer by whom the prisoner +was originally confined. + +243. Enlisted men against whom charges have been preferred will +be designated as "awaiting trial"; enlisted men who have been +tried will, prior to the promulgation of the result, be designated +as "awaiting result of trial"; enlisted men serving sentences +of confinement not involving dishonorable discharge, will be +designated as "garrison prisoners." Persons sentenced to dismissal +or dishonorable discharge and to terms of confinement at military +posts or elsewhere will be designated as "general prisoners." +(A. R. 928.) + +244. The sentences of prisoners will be read to them when the +order promulgating the same is received. The officer of the guard, +or the officer of the day if there be no officer of the guard, will +lead them unless the commanding officer shall direct otherwise. + +245. When the date for the commencement of a term of confinement +imposed by sentence of a court-martial is not expressly fixed +by sentence, the term of confinement begins on the date of the +officer promulgating it. The sentence is continuous until the +term expires, except when the person sentenced is absent without +authority. (A. R. 969.) + +246. When soldiers awaiting trial or the result of trial, or +undergoing sentence commit offenses for which they are tried, +the second sentence will be executed upon the expiration of the +first. + +247. Prisoners awaiting trial by, or undergoing sentence of, a +general court-martial and those confined for serious offenses +will be kept apart, when practicable, from those confined by +sentence of an inferior court or for minor offenses. Enlisted +men in confinement for minor offenses, or awaiting trial or the +result of trial for the same, will ordinarily be sent to work +under charge of unarmed overseers instead of armed sentinels +and will be required attend drills unless the commanding officer +shall direct otherwise. + +248. Prisoners, other than general prisoners, will be furnished +with food from their respective companies or from the organizations +to which they may be temporarily attached. + +The food of prisoners will, when practicable, be sent to their +places of confinement, but post commanders may arrange to send +the prisoners, under proper guard, to their messes for meals. + +When there is no special mess for general prisoners, they will +be attached for rations to companies. + +Enlisted men bringing meals for the prisoners will not be allowed +to enter the prison room. (See par. 289.) + +249. With the exception of those specially designated by the +commanding officer, no prisoners will be allowed to leave the +guardhouse unless under charge of a sentinel and passed by an +officer or noncommissioned officer of the guard. The commanding +officer may authorize certain garrison prisoners and paroled +general prisoners to leave the guardhouse, not under the charge +of a sentinel, for the purpose of working outside under such +surveillance and restrictions as he may impose. + +250. Prisoners reporting themselves sick at sick cull, or at +the time designated by the commanding officer, will be sent to +the hospital under charge of proper guard, with a sick report +kept for the purpose. The recommendation of the surgeon will +be entered in the guard report. + +251. The security of sick prisoners in the hospital devolves +upon the post surgeon, who will, if necessary, apply to the post +commander for a guard. + +252. Prisoners will be paraded with the guard only when directed +by the commanding officer or the officer of the day. + +253. A prisoner under charge of a sentinel will not salute an +officer. + +254. All serviceable clothing which belongs to a prisoner, and +his blankets, will accompany him to the post designated for his +confinement, and will be fully itemized on the clothing list +sent to that post. The guard in charge of the prisoner during +transfer will be furnished with a duplicate of this list, and +will be held responsible for the delivery of all articles itemized +therein with the prisoner. At least one serviceable woolen blanket +will be sent with every such prisoner so transferred. (A.R. 939.) + +255. When mattresses are not supplied, each prisoner in the +guardhouse will be allowed a bed sack and 30 pounds of straw +per month for bedding. So far as practicable iron bunks will be +furnished to all prisoners in post guardhouses and prison room. +(A. R. 1084.) + +256. If the number of prisoners, including general prisoners, +confined at a post justifies it, the commanding officer will +detail a commissioned officer as "officer in charge of prisoners." +At posts where the average number of prisoners continually in +confinement is less than 12, the detail of an officer in charge +of prisoners will not be made. + + +SECTION 16. GUARDING PRISONERS. + +299. The sentinel at the post of the guard has charge of the +prisoners except when they have been turned over to the prisoner +guard or overseers. (Pars. 247 and 300 to 304.) + +(a) He will allow none to escape. + +(b) He will allow none to cross his post leaving the guardhouse +except when passed by an officer or noncommissioned officer of +the guard. + +(c) He will allow no one to communicate with prisoners without +permission from proper authority. + +(d) He will promptly report to the corporal of the guard any +suspicious noise made by the prisoners. + +(e) He will be prepared to tell, whenever asked, how many prisoners +are in the guardhouse and how many are out at work or elsewhere. + +Whenever prisoners are brought to his post returning from work +or elsewhere, he will halt them and call the corporal of the +guard, notifying him of the number of prisoners returning. Thus: +"Corporal of the guard, (so many). Prisoners." + +He will not allow prisoners to pass into the guardhouse until +the corporal of the guard has responded to the call and ordered +him to do so. + +300. Whenever practicable, special guards will be detailed for +the particular duty of guarding working parties composed of such +prisoners as can not be placed under overseers. (Par. 247.) + +301. The prisoner guard and overseers will be commanded by the +police officer; if there be no police officer, then by the officer +of the day. + +302. The provost sergeant is sergeant of the prisoner guard and +overseers, and as such receives orders from the commanding officer +and the commander of the prisoner guard only. + +303. Details for prisoner guard are marched to the guardhouse and +mounted by being inspected by the commander of the main guard, +who determines whether all of the men are in proper condition +to perform their duties and whether their arms and equipments +are in proper condition, and rejects any men found unfit. + +304. When prisoners have been turned over to the prisoner guard +or overseers, such guards or overseers are responsible for them +under their commander, and all responsibility and control of the +main guard ceases until they are returned to the main guard. +(Par. 306.) + +305. It a prisoner attempts to escape, the sentinel will call +"Halt." If he fails to halt when the sentinel has once repeated +his call, and if there be no other possible means of preventing +his escape, the sentinel will fire upon him. + +The following will more fully explain the important duties of +a sentinel in this connection: + +(Circular.) WAR DEPARTMENT. + ADJUTANT GENERAL'S OFFICE, + _Washington,_November_1,_1887._ + +By direction of the Secretary of War, the following is published +for the information of the Army: + +UNITED STATES CIRCUIT COURT, EASTERN DISTRICT OF MICHIGAN, AUGUST +1, 1887. + +THE UNITED STATES V. JAMES CLARK. + +The circuit court has jurisdiction of a homicide committed by +one soldier upon another within a military reservation of the +United States. + +If a homicide be committed by a military guard without malice +and in the performance of his supposed duty as a soldier, such +homicide is excusable, unless it was manifestly beyond the scope +of his authority or was such that a man of ordinary sense and +understanding would know that it was illegal. + +It seems that the sergeant of the guard has a right to shoot a +military convict if there be no other possible means of preventing +his escape. + +The common-law distinction between felonies and misdemeanors has +no application to military offenses. + +While the finding of a court of inquiry acquitting the prisoner +of all blame is not a legal bar to a prosecution, it is entitled +to weight as an expression of the views of the military court +of the necessity of using a musket to prevent the escape of the +deceased. + + * * * * * + +By order of the Secretary of War: + R. C. DRUM, _Adjutant_General._ + +The following is taken from Circular No. 3, of 1883, from +Headquarters Department of the Columbia: + + VANCOUVER BARRACKS, W. T., _April_20,_1883_. + +To the ASSISTANT ADJUTANT GENERAL, + _Department_of_the_Columbia._ + +SIR: + + * * * * * + +A sentinel is placed as guard over prisoners to prevent their +escape, and, for this purpose, he is furnished a musket, with +ammunition. To prevent escape is his first and most important +duty. + + * * * * * + +I suppose the law to be this: That a sentinel shall not use more +force or violence to prevent the escape of a prisoner than is +necessary to effect that object, but if the prisoner, after being +ordered to halt, continues his flight the sentinel may maim or +even kill him, and it is his duty to do so. + +A sentinel who allows a prisoner to escape without firing upon +him, and firing to hit him, is, in my judgment, guilty of a most +serious military offense, for which he should and would be severely +punished by a general court-martial. + + * * * * * + + (Signed) HENRY A. MORROW, + _Colonel_Twenty-first_Infantry,_Commanding_Post._ + +[Third indorsement.] + + OFFICE JUDGE ADVOCATE, + MILITARY DIVISION OF THE PACIFIC, + _May_11,_1883._ + +Respectfully returned to the assistant adjutant general, Military +Division of the Pacific, concurring fully in the views expressed +by Col. Morrow. I was not aware that such a view had ever been +questioned. That the period is a time of peace does not affect +the authority and duty of the sentinel or guard to fire upon the +escaping prisoner, if this escape can not otherwise be prevented. +He should, of course, attempt to stop the prisoner before firing +by ordering him to halt, and will properly warn him by the words +"Halt, or I fire," or words to such effect. + + W. WINTHROP, _Judge_Advocate_. + +[Fourth indorsement.] + + HEADQUARTERS MILITARY DIVISION OF THE PACIFIC, + _May_11,_1883._ + +Respectfully returned to the commanding general, Department of +the Columbia, approving the opinion of the commanding officer, +Twenty-first Infantry, and of the judge advocate of the division, +in respect to the duty of and method to be adopted by sentinels +in preventing prisoners from escaping. + + * * * * * + +By command of Maj. Gen. Schofield: + J. C. KELTON, + _Assistant_Adjutant_General._ + +See also Circular No. 53, A. G. O., December 22, 1900. + +306. On approaching the post of the sentinel at the guardhouse, +a sentinel of the prisoner guard or an overseer in charge of +prisoners will halt them and call, "No. 1, (so many) prisoners." +He will not allow them to cross the post of the sentinel until +so directed by the corporal of the guard. + +307. Members of the prisoner guard and overseers placed over +prisoners for work will receive specific and explicit instructions +covering the required work; they will be held strictly responsible +that the prisoners under their care properly and satisfactorily +perform the designated work. + + +SECTION 17. FLAGS. + +337. The garrison, post, and storm flags are national flags and +shall be of bunting. The union of such is as described in paragraph +216, Army Regulations, and shall be of the following proportions: +Width, seven-thirteenths of the hoist of the flag; length, +seventy-six one-hundredths of the hoist of the flag. + +The garrison flag will have 38 feet fly and 20 feet hoist. It +will be furnished only to posts designated in orders from time +to time from the War Department, and will be hoisted only on +holidays and important occasions. + +The post flag will have 19 feet fly and 10 feet hoist. It will be +furnished for all garrison posts and will be hoisted in pleasant +weather. + +The storm flag will have 9 feet 6 inches fly and 5 feet hoist. +It will be furnished for all occupied posts for use in stormy and +windy weather. It will also be furnished to national cemeteries. +(A. R. 223.) + +338. At every military post or station the flag will be hoisted +at the sounding of the first note of the reveille, or of the first +note of the march, if a march be played before the reveille. The +flag will be lowered at the sounding of the last note of the +retreat, and while the flag is being lowered the band will play +"The Star Spangled Banner," or, if there be no band present, +the field music will sound "to the color." When "to the color" +is sounded by the field music while the flag is being lowered +the same respect will be observed as when "The Star-Spangled +Banner" is played by the band, and in either case officers and +enlisted men out of ranks will face toward the flag, stand at +attention, and render the prescribed salute at the last note +of the music. (A: R. 437.) + +The lowering of the flag will be so regulated as to be completed +at the last note of "The Star-Spangled Banner" or "to the color." + +339. The national flag will be displayed at a seacoast or lake +fort at the beginning of and during an action in which a fort +may be engaged, whether by day or by night. (A. R. 437.) + +340. The national flag will always be displayed at the time of +firing a salute. (A. R. 397.) + +341. The flag of a military post will not be dipped by way of +salute or compliment. (A. R. 405.) + +342. On the death of an officer at a military post the flag is +displayed at halfstaff and so remains between reveille and retreat +until the last salvo or volley is fired over the grave; or if +the remains are not interred at the post until they are removed +therefrom. (A. R. 422.) + +343. During the funeral of all enlisted man at a military post +the flag is displayed at halfstaff. It is hoisted to the top +after the final volley or gun is fired or after the remains are +taken from the post. The same honors are paid on the occasion +of the funeral of a retired enlisted man. (A. R. 423.) + +344. When practicable, a detail consisting of a noncommissioned +officer and two privates of the guard will raise or lower the +flag. This detail wears side arms or if the special equipments +do not include side arms then belts only. + +The noncommissioned officer, carrying the flag, forms the detail +in line, takes his post in the center and marches it to the staff. +The flag is then securely attached to the halyards and rapidly +hoisted. The halyards are then securely fastened to the cleat +on the staff and the detail marched to the guardhouse. + +345. When the flag is to be lowered, the halyards are loosened +from the staff and made perfectly free. At retreat the flag is +lowered at the last note of retreat. It is then neatly folded +and the halyards made fast. The detail is then re-formed and +marched to the guardhouse, where the flag is turned over to the +commander of the guard. + +The flag should never be allowed to touch the ground and should +always be hoisted or lowered from the leeward side of the staff, +the halyards being held by two persons. + + +SECTION 18. REVEILLE AND RETREAT GUN. + +346. The morning and evening gun will be fired by a detachment +of the guard, consisting, when practicable, of a corporal and two +privates. The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, +or, if marches be played before the reveille, it is fired at the +beginning of the first march. The retreat gun is fired at the +last note of retreat. + +The corporal marches the detachment to and from the piece, which +is fired, sponged out, find secured under his direction. + + +SECTION 19. GUARD MOUNTING. + +347. Guard mounting will be formal or informal as the commanding +officer may direct. It will be held as prescribed in the drill +regulations of the arm of the service to which the guard belongs. +If none is prescribed, then as for infantry. In case the guard +is composed wholly of mounted organizations, guard mounting may +be held mounted. + +348. When infantry and mounted troops dismounted are united for +guard mounting, all details form as prescribed for infantry. + + +SECTION 20. FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING FOR INFANTRY. + +349. Formal guard mounting will ordinarily be held only in posts +or camps where a band is present. + +350. At the assembly, the men designated for the guard fall in +on their company parade grounds as prescribed in paragraph 106, +I. D. R. The first sergeant then verifies the detail, inspects +it, replaces any man unfit to go on guard, turns the detail over +to the senior noncommissioned officer, and retires. The band +takes its place on the parade ground so that the left of its +front rank shall be 12 paces to the right of the front rank of +the guard when the latter is formed. + +351. At adjutant's call, the adjutant, dismounted and the sergeant +major on his left, marches to the parade ground. The adjutant +halts and takes post so as to be 12 paces in front of and facing +the center of the guard when formed; the sergeant major continues +on, moves by the left flank and takes post facing to the left, +12 paces to the left of the front rank of the hand; the band +plays in quick or double time; the details are marched to the +parade ground by the senior noncommissioned officers; the detail +that arrives first is marched to the line so that, upon halting, +the breast of the front rank men shall be near to and opposite +the left arm of the sergeant major; the commander of the detail +halts his detail, places himself in front of and facing the sergeant +major, at a distance equal to or a little greater than the front +of his detail, and commands: 1. _Right_, 2. DRESS. The detail +dresses up to the line of the sergeant major and its commander, +the right front rank man placing his breast against the left arm +of the sergeant major; the noncommissioned officers take post +two paces in rear of the rear rank of the detail. The detail +aligned, the commander of the detail commands: FRONT, salutes, and +then reports; "The detail is correct," or "(So many) sergeants, +corporals, or privates are absent"; the sergeant major returns +the salute with the right hand after the report is made. The +commander then passes by the right of the guard and takes post +in the line of noncommissioned officers in rear of the right +file of his detail. + +Should there be more than one detail, it is formed in like manner +on the left of the one preceding. The privates, noncommissioned +officers, and commander of each detail dress on those of the +preceding details in the same rank or line. Each detail commander +closes the rear rank to the right and fills blank files as far +as practicable with the men from his front rank. + +Should the guard from a company not include a noncommissioned +officer, one will be detailed to perform the duties of commander +of the detail. In this case the commander of the detail, after +reporting to the sergeant major, passes around the right flank +between the guard and the band and retires. + +352. When the last detail has formed, the sergeant major takes a +side step to the right, draws sword, verifies the detail, takes +post two paces to the right and two paces to the front of the +guard, facing to the left, causes the guard to count off, completes +the left squad, if necessary, as in the School of the Company, +and if there be more than three squads, divides the guard into +two platoons, again takes post as described above and commands: +1. _Open_ranks_, 2. MARCH. + +At the command march, the rear rank and file closers march backward +four steps, halt, and dress to the right. The sergeant major aligns +the ranks and file closers and again taking post as described +above, commands: FRONT, moves parallel to the front rank until +opposite the center, turns to the right, halts midway to the +adjutant, salutes and reports: "Sir, the details are correct," +or "Sir, (so many) sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent"; +the adjutant returns the salute, directs the sergeant major: +Take your post, and then draws saber; the sergeant major faces +about, approaches to within two paces of the center of the front +rank, turns to the right, moves three paces beyond the left of +the front rank, turns to the left, halts on the line of the front +rank, faces about, and brings his sword to the order. When the +sergeant major has reported the officer of the guard takes post, +facing to the front three paces in front of the center of the +guard, and draws saber. + +The adjutant then commands: 1. _Officer_(or_officer)_and_ +_noncommissioned_officers_, 2. _Front_and_center_, 3. MARCH. + +At the command center, the officers carry saber. At the command +MARCH, the officer advances and halts three paces from the adjutant, +remaining at the carry; the noncommissioned officers pass by the +flanks, along the front, and form in order of rank from right to +left, three paces in rear of the officer, remaining at the right +shoulder; if there is no officer of the guard the noncommissioned +officers halt on a line three paces from the adjutant; the adjutant +then assigns the officers and noncommissioned officers according +to rank, as follows: Commander of the guard, leader of first +platoon, leader of second platoon, right guide of first platoon, +left guide of second platoon, left guide of first platoon, right +guide of second platoon, and file closers, or, if the guard is +not divided into platoons: Commander of the guard, right guide, +left guide, and file closers. + +The adjutant then commands: 1. _Officer_(or_officers)_and_ +_noncommissioned_officers_, 2. POSTS, 3. MARCH. + +At the command posts, all, except the officer commanding the +guard, face about. At the command MARCH, they take the posts +presented in the school of the company with open ranks. The adjutant +directs: Inspect your guard, sir; at which the officer commanding +the guard faces about, commands: Prepare for inspection, returns +saber and inspects the guard. + +During the inspection the band plays; the adjutant returns saber, +observes the general condition of the guard, and falls out any +man who is unfit for guard duty or does not present a creditable +appearance. Substitutes will report to the commander of the guard +at the guardhouse. + +353. The adjutant, when so directed, selects orderlies and color +sentinels, as prescribed in paragraphs 140 and 141, and notifies +the commander of the guard of his selection. + +354. If there be a junior officer of the guard he takes post at +the same time as the senior, facing to the front, three paces +in front of the center of the first platoon; in going to the +front and center he follows and takes position on the left of +the senior and is assigned as lender of the first platoon; he may +be directed by the commander of the guard to assist in inspecting +the guard. + +If there be no officer of the guard, the adjutant inspects the +guard. A noncommissioned officer commanding the guard takes post +on the right of the right guide when the guard is in line, and +takes the post of the officer of the guard when in column or +passing in review. + +355. The inspection ended, the adjutant faces himself about thirty +paces in front of and facing the center of the guard and draws +saber; the new officer of the day takes post in front of and +facing the guard, about thirty paces from the adjutant; the old +officer of the day takes post three paces to the right of and +one pace to the rear of the new officer of the day; the officer +of the guard takes post three paces in front of its center, draws +saber with the adjutant, and comes to the order; thereafter he +takes the same relative position as a captain of a company. + +The adjutant then commands: 1. _Parade_, 2. REST, 3. SOUND +OFF, and comes to the order and parade rest. + +The band, playing, passes in front of the officer of the guard +to the left of the line and back to its post on the right, when +it ceases playing. + +The adjutant then comes to attention, carries saber and commands: +1. _Guard_, 2. ATTENTION, 3. _Close_ranks_, 4. MARCH. + +The ranks are opened and closed as in paragraph 745, I. D. R. + +The adjutant then commands: 1. _Present_, 2. ARMS, faces +toward the new officer of the day, salutes, and then reports: +Sir, the guard is formed. The new officer of the day, after the +adjutant has reported, returns the salute with the hand and directs +the adjutant: March the guard in review, sir. + +The adjutant caries saber, faces about, brings the guard to an +order, and commands: 1. _At_trail,_platoons_(or_guard)_right_, +2. MARCH, 3. _Guard_, 4. HALT. + +The platoons execute the movement; the band turns to the right +and places itself 12 paces in front of the first platoon. + +The adjutant places himself six paces from the flank and abreast +of the commander of the guard; the sergeant major six paces from +the left flank of the second platoon. + +The adjutant then commands: 1. _Pass_in_review_, 2. FORWARD, +3. MARCH. + +The guard marches in quick time past the officer of the day, +according to the principles of review, and is brought to eyes right +at the proper time by the commander of the guard; the adjutant, +commander of the guard, leaders of platoons, sergeant major, and +drum major salute. + +The band, having passed the officer of the day, turns to the +left of the column, places itself opposite and facing him, and +continues to play until the guard leaves the parade ground. The +field music detaches itself from the band when the latter turns +out of the column, and, remaining in front of the guard, commences +to play when the band ceases. + +Having passed 12 paces beyond the officer of the day, the adjutant +halts; the sergeant major halts abreast of the adjutant and 1 +pace to his left; they then return saber, salute, and retire; +the commander of the guard then commands: 1. _Platoons,_right_ +_by_squads_, 2. MARCH, and marches the guard to its post. + +The officers of the day face toward each other and salute; the +old officer of the day turns over the orders to the new officer +of the day. + +While the band is sounding off, and while the guard is marching +in review, the officers of the day stand at parade rest with +arms folded. They take this position when the adjutant comes +to parade rest, resume the attention with him, again take the +parade rest at the first note of the march in review, and resume +attention as the head of the column approaches. + +The new officer of the day returns the salute of the commander +of the guard and the adjutant, making one salute with the hand. + +356. If the guard be not divided into platoons, the adjutant +commands: 1. _At_trail,_guard_right_, 2. MARCH, 3. _Guard_, +4. HALT, and it passes in review as above; the commander of the +guard is 3 paces in front of its center; the adjutant places +himself 6 paces front the left flank and abreast of the commander +of the guard; the sergeant covers the adjutant on a line with +the front rank. + + +SECTION 21. INFORMAL GUARD MOUNTING FOR INFANTRY. + +357. Informal guard mounting will be held on the parade ground +of the organization from which the guard is detailed. If it is +detailed from more than one organization, then at such place +as the commanding officer may direct. + +358. At assembly, the detail for guard falls in on the company +parade ground. The first sergeant verifies the detail, inspects +their dress and general appearance, and replaces any man unfit +to march on guard. He then turns the detail over to the commander +of the guard and retires. + +359. At adjutant's call, the officer of the day takes his place +15 paces in front of the center of the guard and commands: 1. +_Officer_(or_officers)_and_noncommissioned_officers_, 2. +_Front_and_center_, 3. MARCH; whereupon the officers and +noncommissioned officers take their positions, are assigned and +sent to their posts as prescribed in formal guard mounting. (Par. +352.) + +The officer of the day will then inspect the guard with especial +reference for its fitness for the duty for which it is detailed +and will select, as prescribed in paragraphs 140 and 141, the +necessary orderlies and color sentinels. The men found unfit +for guard will be returned to quarters and will be replaced by +others found to be suitable, if available in the company. If +none are available in the company the fact will be reported to +the adjutant immediately after guard mounting. + +When the inspection shall have been completed the officer of +the day resumes his position and directs the commander of the +guard to march the guard to its post. + + +SECTION 22. RELIEVING THE OLD GUARD. + +360. As the new guard approaches the guardhouse, the old guard +is formed in line, with its field music three paces to its right; +and, when the field music at the head of the new guard arrives +opposite its left, the commander of the new guard commands: 1. +_Eyes_, 2. RIGHT; the commander of the old guard commands: +1. _Present_, 2. ARMS; commanders of both guards salute. +The new guard marches in quick time past the old guard. + +When the commander of the new guard is opposite the field music +of the old guard, he commands: FRONT; the commander of the old +guard commands: 1. _Order_, 2. ARMS, as soon as the new +guard shall have cleared the old guard. + +The field music having marched three paces beyond the field music +of the old guard, changes direction to the right, and, followed +by the guard, changes direction to the left when on a line with +the old guard; the changes of direction are without command. +The commander of the guard halts on the line of the front rank +of the old guard, allows his guard to march past him, and, when +its rear approaches, forms it in line to the left, establishes +the left guide three paces to the right of the field music of the +old guard, and on a line with the front rank, and then dresses +his guard to the left; the field music of the new guard is three +paces to the right of its front rank. + +361. The new guard being dressed the commander of each guard, +in front of and facing its center, commands: 1. _Present_, +2. ARMS, resumes his front, salutes, carries saber, faces his +guard, and commands: 1. _Order_, 2. ARMS. + +Should a guard be commanded by a noncommissioned officer, he +stands on the right or left of the front rank, according as he +commands the old or new guard, and executes the rifle salute. + +362. After the new guard arrives at its post and has saluted the +old guard, each guard is presented by its commander to its officer +of the day; if there be but one officer of the day present, or +if one officer acts in the capacity of old and new officer of +the day, each guard is presented to him by its commander. + +363. If other persons entitled to a salute approach, each commander +of the guard will bring his own guard to attention if not already +at attention. The senior commander of the two guards will then +command: "1. Old and new guards, 2. Present, 3. Arms." + +The junior will salute at the command "Present Arms" given by +the senior. After the salute has been acknowledged, the senior +brings both guards to the order. + +364. After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers of +the day, each guard is brought to an order by its commander; the +commander of the new guard then directs the orderly or orderlies +to fall out and report and causes bayonets to be fixed if so +ordered by the commanding officer; bayonets will not then be +unfixed during the tour except in route marches while the guard +is actually marching or when specially directed by the commanding +officer. + +The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the +guard for detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper +noncommissioned officers, divides the guard into three reliefs, +first, second, and third, from right to left, and directs a list +of the guard to be made by reliefs. When the guard consists of +troops of different arms combined, the men are assigned to reliefs +so as to insure a fair division of duty under rules prescribed +by the commanding officer. + +365. The sentinels and detachments of the old guard are at once +relieved by members of the new guard, the two guards standing at +ease or at rest while these changes are being made. The commander +of the old transmits to the commander of the new guard all his +orders, instructions, and information concerning the guard and +its duties. The commander of the new guard then takes possession +of the guardhouse and verifies the articles in charge of the +guard. + +366. If considerable time is required to bring in that portion +of the old guard still on post, the commanding officer may direct +that as soon as the orders and property are turned over to the +new guard the portion of the old guard at the guardhouse may be +marched off and dismissed. In such a case the remaining detachment +or detachments of the old guard will be inspected by the commander +of the new guard when they reach the guardhouse. He will direct the +senior noncommissioned officer present to march these detachments +off and dismiss them in the prescribed manner. + +367. In bad weather, at night, after long marches, or when the +guard is very small, the field music may be dispensed with. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +MAP READING AND SKETCHING. + + +SECTION 1. MILITARY MAP READING. + +When you pick up a map, the first question is, Where is the north? +This can usually be told by an arrow (see fig. 1, section 1) +which will be found in one of the corners of the map, and which +points to the true north--the north of the north star. + +On some maps no arrow is to be found. The chances are a hundred +to one that the north is at the top of the map, as it is on almost +all printed maps. But you can only assure yourself of that fact +by checking the map with the ground it represents. For instance, +if you ascertain that the city of Philadelphia is due east of +the city of Columbus, then the Philadelphia-Columbus line on +the map is a due east-and-west line, and establishes at once all +the other map directions. + +Now, the map represents the ground as nearly as it can be represented +on a flat piece of paper. If you are standing up. facing the +north, your right hand will be in the east, your left in the +west, and your back to the south. It is the same with a map; +if you look across it in the direction of the arrow--that is, +toward its north--your right hand will be toward what is east +on the map; your left hand to the west; the south will be at +the bottom of the map. + +There is another kind of an arrow that sometimes appears on a +map. It is like the one in figure 2, section 1, and points not +to the true north but to the magnetic north, which is the north +of the compass. Though the compass needle, and therefore the arrow +that represents it on the map, does not point exactly north, the +deviation is, from a military point of view, slight, and appreciable +error will rarely result through the use of the magnetic instead +of the true north in the solution of any military problems. + +[Illustration: Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. Fig. 4. Fig. 5.] + +Should you be curious to know the exact deviation, consult your +local surveyor or any civil engineer. + +Both arrows may appear on your map. In that case disregard the +magnetic arrow unless you are using the map in connection with +a compass. + +If a map is being used on the ground, the first thing to be done +is to put the lines of the map parallel to the real outlines of +the ground forms, and roads, fences, railroads, etc., that the +map shows; for the making of a map is no more than the drawing +on paper of lines parallel to and proportional in length to real +directions and distances on the ground. + +For instance, the road between two places runs due north and south. +Then on the map a line representing the road will be parallel to +the arrow showing the north and will be proportional in length +to the real road. In this way a map is a picture, or, better, a +bare outline sketch; and, as we can make out a picture, though +it be upside down, or crooked on the wall, so we call use a map +that is upside down or not parallel to the real ground forms. +But it is easier to make out both the picture and the map if +their lines are parallel to what they represent. So in using a +map on the ground we always put the lines parallel to the actual +features they show. This is easy if the map has an arrow. + +If the map has no arrow, you must locate objects or features on +the ground, and on the map, their representations. Draw on the +map a line connecting any two of the features; place this line +parallel to all imaginary line through the two actual features +located, and your map will be correctly placed. Look to it that +you do not reverse on the map the positions of the two objects +or features, or your map will be exactly upside down. + +When the map has been turned into the proper position--that is +to say, "oriented"--the next thing is to locate on the map your +position. If you are in the village of Easton and there is a +place on the map labeled Easton, the answer is apparent. But +if you are out in the country, at an unlabeled point that looks +like any one of a dozen other similar points, the task is more +complicated. In this latter case you must locate and identify, +both on the map and on the ground, other points--hills, villages, +peculiar bends in rivers, forests--any ground features that have +some easily recognizable peculiarity and that you can see from +your position. + +Suppose, for instance, you were near Leavenworth and wanted to +locate your exact position, of which you are uncertain. You have +the map shown in this manual, and, looking about, you see southwest +from where you stand the United States Penitentiary; also, halfway +between the south and the southeast--south-southeast a sailor would +say--the reservoir (rectangle west of "O" in "Missouri"). Having +oriented your map, draw on it a line from the map position of the +reservoir toward its actual position on the ground. Similarly +draw a line from the map position of penitentiary toward its +actual position. Prolong the two lines until they intersect. +The intersection of the lines will mark the place where you +stand--south Merritt Hill. + +This method consists merely in drawing on the map lines that +represent the lines of sight to known and visible places. The +lines pass through the map position of the places you see and +are parallel to the actual lines of sight; therefore they are the +map representations of the lines of sight, and their intersection +is the map position of the eye of the observer. + +After this orientation and location of position, one can deduce +from the map everything there is to know in regard to directions. +In this respect, study of the ground itself will show no more +than will study of the map. + +After "What direction?" comes "How far?" To answer this, one +must understand that the map distance between any two points +shown bears a fixed and definite relation or proportion to the +real distance between the two points. + +For instance: We measure on a map and find the distance between +two points to be 1 inch. Then we measure the real distance on +the ground and find it to be 10,000 inches; hence the relation +between the map distance and the real distance is 1 to 10,000, +or 1/10000. Now, if the map is properly drawn, the same relation +will hold good for all distances, and we can obtain any ground +distance by multiplying by 10,000 the corresponding map distance. + +This relation need not be 1/10000, but may be anything from 1/100 +that an architect might use in making a map or plan of a house up +to one over a billion and a half, which is about the proportion +between map and real distances in a pocket-atlas representation of +the whole world on a 6-inch page. Map makers call this relation +the "scale" of the map and put it down in a corner in one of +three ways. + +First. 1 inch equals 100. + +Second. 1/100. + +Third. As shown in figure 3 (section 1). + +These expressions mean one and the same thing. A variation of +the first method on a map of different scale might be: 1 inch +equals 1 mile. Since a mile contains 63,360 inches, then the +real distance between any two points shown on the map is 63,360 +times the map distance. + +To find the ground distance by the third kind of scale, copy it +on the edge of a slip of paper, apply the slip directly to the +map, and read off the distance; and so we answer the question, +"How far?" + +After direction and distance comes the interpretation of the +signs, symbols, and abbreviations on the map. Those authorized +are given in section 2 (a reprint of Appendix 4, Field Service +Regulations, 1914); but there are a good many other conventional +signs in common use. A key to them is published by the War +Department, and is called "Conventional Signs, United States +Army." From these you read at once the natural and artificial +features of the country shown on your map. It should be borne in +mind that these conventional signs are not necessarily drawn to +scale, as are the distances. They show the position and outline +of the features rather than the size. This, for the reason that +many of the features shown, if drawn to scale, would be so small +that one could not make them out except with a magnifying glass. +If the exact dimensions are of any importance, they will be written +in figures on the map. For instances, bridges. + +In addition to te above conventional signs, we have CONTOURS +to show the elevations, depressions, slope, and shape of the +ground. Abroad, HACHURES are much used, but they serve only to +indicate elevation, and, as compared to contours, are of little +value. Contours resemble the lines shown in figure 4 (section +1) + +Hachures are shown in figure 5 (section 1), and may be found on +any European map. They simply show slopes, and, when carefully +drawn, show steeper slopes by heavier shading and gentler slopes +by the fainter hachures. The crest of the mountain is within +the hachures. (See fig. 5, section 1.) + +_Contours_.--A certain student, when asked by his instructor +to define "space," said: "I have it, sir, in my head, but can +not put it into words." The Instructor replied: "I suppose that +under those circumstances, Mr. ----, the definition really would +not help much." And so it is with contours--the definition does +not help much if you know a contour when you meet it on a map. For +examples of contours, turn to the map in section 2 and, starting +at the United States penitentiary, note the smooth, flowing, +irregular curved lines marked 880, 860, 840, 840, 860, etc. + +The only other lines on the map that at all resemble contours +are stream lines, like "Corral Creek," but the stream lines are +readily distinguished from contours by the fact that they cross the +contours squarely, while the contours run approximately parallel +to each other. Note the stream line just to the west of South +Merritt Hill. + +The contours represent lines on the ground that are horizontal +and whose meanderings follow the surface, just as the edge of +a flood would follow the irregularities of the hills about it. +Those lines that contours stand for are just as level as the +water's edge of a lake, but horizontally they wander back and +forth to just as great a degree. + +The line marked 880, at the penitentiary, passes through on that +particular piece of ground every point that is 880 feet above +sea level. Should the Missouri River rise in flood to 880 feet, +the penitentiary would be on an island, the edge of which is +marked by the 880 contour. + +Contours show several things; among them the height of the ground +they cross. Usually the contour has labeled on it in figures the +height above some starting point, called the DATUM PLANE--generally +sea level. If, with a surveying instrument, you put in on a piece +of ground a lot of stakes, each one of which is exactly the same +height above sea level--that is, run a line of levels--then make +a map showing the locution of the stakes, a line drawn on the +map through all the stake positions is a contour and shows the +position of all points of that particular height. + +On any given map all contours are equally spaced in a vertical +direction, and the map shows the location of a great number of +points at certain fixed levels. If you know the vertical interval +between any two adjacent contours, you know the vertical interval +for all the contours on that map, for these intervals on a given +map are all the same. + +With reference to a point through which no contour passes, we +can only say that the point in question is not higher than the +next contour up the hill, nor lower than the next one down the +hill. For the purposes of any problem, it is usual to assume +that the ground slopes evenly between the two adjacent contours +and that the vertical height of the point above the lower contour +is proportional to its horizontal distance from the contour, as +compared to the whole distance between the two contours. For +instance, on the map, find the height of point A. The horizontal +measurements are as shown on the map. The vertical distance between +the contours is 20 feet. A is about one-quarter of the distance +between the 800 and the 820 contours, and we assume its height +to be one-quarter of 20 feet (5 feet) higher than 800 feet. So +the height of A is 805 feet. + +The vertical interval is usually indicated in the corner of the +map by the letters "V. I." For instance: V. I.=20 feet. + +On maps of very small pieces of ground, the V. I. is usually +small--perhaps as small as 1 foot; on maps of large areas on a +small scale it may be very great--even 1,000 feet. + +Contours also show SLOPES. It has already been explained that +from any contour to the next one above it the ground rises a +fixed number of feet, according to the vertical interval of that +map. From the scale of distances on the map the horizontal +distance between any two contours can be found. For example: +On the map the horizontal distance between D and E is 90 +yards, or 270 feet. The vertical distance is 20 feet the V. I. of +the map. The slope then is 20/270 = 1/13.5 = 7-1/2% = 4-1/2°, in all of +which different ways the slope can be expressed, + +[Illustration] + +On a good many contoured maps a figure like this will be found +in one of the corners: + +[Illustration] + +On that particular map contours separated by the distance + +[Illustration] + +on the vertical scale show a slope of 1°: if separated by the +distance + +[Illustration] + +they show a 2° slope. etc. A slope of 1° is a rise of 1 foot in +57. To use this scale of slopes copy it on the edge of a piece +of paper just as you did the scale of distances and apply it +directly to the map. + +You will notice that where the contours lie closest the slope +is steepest; where they are farthest apart the ground is most +nearly flat, + +It has already been set forth how contours show height and slope; +in addition to this they show the shape of the ground, or GROUND +FORMS. Each single contour shows the shape at its particular level +of the hill or valley it outlines; for instance, the 880 contour +about the penitentiary shows that the hill at that level has a +shape somewhat like a horse's head. Similarly, every contour +on the map gives us the form of the ground at its particular +level, and knowing these ground forms for many levels we can form +a fair conception of what the whole surface is like. + +A round contour like the letter O outlines a round ground feature; +a long narrow one indicates a long narrow ground feature. + +Different hills and depressions have different shapes. A good +many of them have one shape at one level and another shape at +another level, all of which information will be given you by +the contours on the map. + +One of the ways to see how contours show the shape of the ground +is to pour half a bucket of water into a small depression in +the ground. The water's edge will be exactly level, and if the +depression is approximately round the water's edge will also be +approximately round. The outline will look something like figure +6. + +Draw roughly on a piece of paper a figure of the same shape and +you will have a contour showing the shape of the bit of ground +where you poured your water. + +Next, with your heel gouge out on one edge of your little pond +a small round bay. The water will rush in and the water-mark +on the soil will now be shaped something like figure 7. + +Alter your drawing accordingly, and the new contour will show +the new ground shape. + +Again do violence to the face of nature by digging with a stick a +narrow inlet opening out of your miniature ocean, and the watermark +will now look something like figure 8. + +Alter your drawing once more and your contour shows again the +new ground form. Drop into your main pond a round clod and you +will have a new watermark, like figure 9, to add to your drawing. +This new contour, of the same level with the one showing the +limit of the depression, shows on the drawing the round island. + +Drop in a second clod, this time long and narrow, the watermark +will be like figure 10, and the drawing of it, properly placed, +will show another island of another shape. Your drawing now will +look like figure 11. + +It shows a depression approximately round, off which open a round +bay and a long narrow bay. There is also a round elevation and a +long, narrow one; a long, narrow ridge, jutting out between the +two bays, and a short, broad one across the neck of the round +bay. + +[Illustration: Fig. 6. Fig. 7. Fig 8. Fig. 9. Fig 10. Fig. 11.] + +Now flood your lake deeply enough to cover up the features you +have introduced. The new water line, about as shown by the dotted +line in figure 11, shows the oblong shape of the depression at a +higher level; the solid lines show the shape farther down; the +horizontal distance between the two contours at different points +shows where the bank is steep and where the slope is gentler. + +Put together the information that each of these contours gives +you, and you will see how contours show the shape of the ground. +On the little map you have drawn you have introduced all the +varieties of ground forms there are; therefore all the contour +forms. + +The contours on an ordinary map seem much more complicated, but +this is due only to the number of them, their length, and many +turns before they finally close on themselves. Or they may close +off the paper. But trace each one out, and it will resolve itself +into one of the forms shown in figure 11. + +Just as the high-tide line round the continents of North and +South America runs a long and tortuous course, but finally closes +back on itself, so will every contour do likewise. And just as +truly as every bend in that high-tide mark turns out around a +promontory, or in around a bay, so will every bend in a contour +stand for a hill or a valley, pointing to the lowlands if it +be a hill, and to the height if it mark a valley. + +If the map embrace a whole continent or an island, all the contours +will be of closed form, as in figure 11, but if it embrace only +it part of the continent or island, some of the contours will be +chopped off at the edge of the map, and we have the open form +of contours, as we would have if figure 11 were cut into two +parts. + +The closed form may indicate a hill or a basin; the open form, +a ridge or a valley; sometimes a casual glance does not indicate +which. + +Take up, first, the contour of the open type. If the map shows +a stream running down the inside of the contour, there is no +difficulty in saying at once that the ground feature is a valley; +for instance, V, V, V, and the valley of Corral Creek on the +map. But if there is no stream line, does the contour bend show +a valley or a ridge? + +First of all, there is a radical difference between the bend +of a contour round the head of a valley and its bend round the +nose of a ridge, + +Compare on the map the valleys V and the ridges R. The bend of +the contour round the head of the valley is much sharper than +the bend of the contour round the nose of the ridge. This is a +general truth, not only in regard to maps, but also in regard +to ground forms. Study any piece of open ground and note how +much wider are the ridges than the valleys. Where you find a +"hog back" or "devil's backbone," you have an exception to the +rule, but the exceptions are not frequent enough to worry over. + +To tell whether a given point is on a ridge or in a valley, start +from the nearest stream shown on the map and work across the +map to the undetermined point, keeping in mind that in a real +trip across the country you start from the stream, go up the +hill to the top of a ridge, down the other side of the hill to a +water-course, then up a hill to the top of a ridge, down again, +up again, etc. That is all traveling is--valley, hill, valley, +hill, valley, etc., though you wander till the crack o' doom. +And so your map travels must go--valley, hill, valley, hill--till +you run off the map or come back to the starting point. + +On the map, follow the R-V line, V indicating valley and R ridge +or hill. Note first the difference in sharpness in the contour +bends; also how the valley contours point to the highland and +the ridge contours to the lowland. + +The contours go thus: + +[Illustration] + +The streams flow down the valleys, and the sharp angle of the +contour points always _up_ stream. Note also how the junction +of a stream and its tributary usually makes an angle that points +_down_ stream. + +"Which way does this stream run?" + +Water flows down hill. If you are in the bed of a stream, contours +representing higher ground must be to your right and to your +left. Get the elevations of these contours. Generally the nearest +contour to the bank of the stream will cross the stream and there +will be an angle or sharp turn in the contour at this crossing. +If the point of the angle or sharp turn is toward you, you are +going downstream; if away from you, you are going upstream. + +If the contours are numbered, you have only to look at the numbers +to say where the low and where the high places are; but to read a +map with any speed one must be quite independent of these numbers. +In ordinary map reading look, first of all, for the stream lines. +The streams are the skeleton upon which the whole map is hung. +Then pick out the hilltops and ridges and you have a body to +clothe with ail the details that will be revealed by a close and +careful study of what the map maker has recorded. + +As to closed contours, they may outline a depression or a hill. +On the map, "881" or "885" might be hills or ponds, as far as +their shape is concerned. But, clearly, they are hills, for on +either side are small streams running _away_ from them. If +they were ponds, the stream lines would run _toward_ the +closed contours. The rest of "hill, valley, hill," will always +solve the problem when there are not enough stream lines shown +to make evident at once whether a closed contour marks a pond or +a hill. Look in the beginning for the stream lines and valleys, +and, by contrast, if for no other reason, the hills and ridges +at once loom up. + +To illustrate the subject of contours to aid those who have +difficulty in reading contoured maps the following is suggested: + +1. Secure modeling clay and build a mound. + +2. Use wire and slice this mound horizontally at equal vertical +intervals into zones; then insert vertical dowels through the +mound of clay. + +3. Remove the top zone, place on paper, and draw outline of the +bottom edge. Trim your paper roughly to the outline drawn. Indicate +where the holes made by the dowels pierce the paper. + +4. Do the above with each zone of your mound. + +5. Place these papers in proper order on dowels similarly placed +to ones in original mound at, say, 1 inch vertical interval apart. +A skeleton mound results. + +6. Replace the zones of the clay mound and form the original clay +mound along the side of skeleton mound. + +7. New force all the paper sheets down the dowels onto the bottom +sheet, and we have a map of clay mound with contours. + +NOTE.--One-inch or 2-inch planks can be made into any desired +form by the use of dowels and similar procedure followed. + +People frequently ask, "What should I see when I read a map?" +and the answer is given, "The ground as it is." This is not true +any more than it is true that the words, "The valley of the Meuse," +bring to your mind vine-clad hills, a noble river, and green +fields where cattle graze. Nor can any picture ever put into +your thought what the Grand Canyon really is. What printed word +or painted picture can not do, a map will not. A map says to you, +"Here stands a hill," "Here is a valley," "This stream runs so," +and gives you a good many facts in regard to them. But you do not +have to "see" anything, any more than you have to visualize Liege +in order to learn the facts of its geography. A map sets forth +cold facts in an alphabet all its own, but an easy alphabet, and +one that tells with a few curving lines more than many thousand +words could tell. + + +SECTION 2. SKETCHING. + +Noncommissioned officers and selected privates should be able +to make simple route sketches. This is particularly useful in +patrolling as thereby a patrol leader is able to give his commander +a good idea of the country his patrol has traversed. Sketches +should be made on a certain scale, which should be indicated +on the sketch, such as 3 inches on the sketch equals 1 mile on +the ground. The north should be indicated on the sketch by means +of an arrow pointing in that direction. Any piece of paper may +be used to make the sketch on. The back of the field-message +blank is ruled and prepared for this purpose. The abbreviations +and conventional signs shown on the following pages should be +used in making such simple sketches. + + +Field Maps and Sketches. + +The following abbreviations and signs are authorized for use on +field maps and sketches. For more elaborate map work the authorized +conventional signs as given in the manual of "Conventional Signs, +United States Army Maps," are used. + +Abbreviations other than those given should not be used. + +ABBREVIATIONS. + + A. Arroyo. L. S. S. Life-Saving Station. + abut. Abutment. L. H. Lighthouse + Ar. Arch. Long. Longitude. + b. Brick. Mt. Mountain. + B. S. Blacksmith Shop. Mts. Mountains. + bot. Bottom. N. North. + Br. Branch. n. f. Not fordable. + br. Bridge. P. Pier. + C. Cape. pk. Plank. + cem. Cemetery. P. O. Post Office + con. Concrete. Pt. Point. + cov. Covered. q.p Queen-post + Cr. Creek. R. River. + d. Deep. R. H. Roundhouse. + cul. Culvert. R. R. Railroad. + D. S. Drug Store. S. South. + E. East. s. Steel. + Est. Estuary. S. H. Schoolhouse. + f. Fordable. S. M. Sawmill. + Ft. Fort. Sta. Station. + G. S General Store. st. Stone. + gir. Girder. str. Stream. + G. M. Gristmill. T. G. Tollgate. + I. Iron. Tres. Trestle. + I. Island. tr. Truss. + Jc. Junction. W. T. Water Tank. + k.p. King-post. W. W. Water Works. + L. Lake. W. West. + Lat. Latitude. w. Wood. + Ldg. Landing. wd. Wide. + +[Illustration: SIGNS--FIELD MAPS AND SKETCHES] + +[Illustration] + + +MESSAGE BLANKS + +[Illustration] + +The heading "From" is filled in with the _name_ of the +detachment sending the information: as "Officer's Patrol, 7th +Cav." Messages sent on the same day from the same source to the +same person are numbered consecutively. The address is written +briefly, thus: "Commanding officer, Outpost, 1st Brigade," In +the signature the writer's surname only and rank are given. + +This blank is four and a half by six and three quarters-inches, +including the margin on the left for binding. The back is ruled +in squares, the side of each square representing 100 yards on a +scale of 3 inches to one mile, for use in making simple sketches +explanatory of the message. It is issued by the Signal Corps in +blocks of forty with duplicating sheets. The regulation envelope +is three by five and one-fourth inches and is printed as follows: + + UNITED STATES ARMY FIELD MESSAGE. + + _To_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._No_ . . . . + (For signal operator only.) + _When_sent_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._No_ . . . . + _Rate_of_speed_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + _Name_of_messenger_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + _When_and_by_whom_rec'd_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + This Envelope will be Returned to Bearer. + +[Illustration] + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +SIGNALS AND CODES. + +(Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army, 1916.) + + +General Instructions for Army Signaling. + +1. Each signal station will have its call, consisting of one or +two letters, as Washington, "W"; and each operator or signalist +will also have his personal signal of one or two letters, as +Jones, "Jo." These being once adopted will not be changed without +due authority. + +2. To lessen liability of error, numerals which occur in the body +of a message should be spelled out. + +3. In receiving a message the man at the telescope should call +out each letter as received, and not wait for the completion +of a word. + +4. A record of the date and time of the receipt or transmission +of every message must be kept. + +5. The duplicate manuscript of messages received at, or the original +sent from, a station should be carefully filed. + +6. In receiving messages nothing should be taken for granted, +and nothing considered as seen until it has been positively and +clearly in view. Do not anticipate what will follow from signals +already given. Watch the communicating station until the last +signals are made, and be very certain that the signal for the +end of the message has been given. + +7. Every address must contain at least two words and should be +sufficient to secure delivery. + +8. All that the sender writes for transmission after the word +"To" is counted. + +9. Whenever more than one signature is attached to a message count +all initials and names as a part of the message. + +10. Dictionary words, initial letters, surnames of persons, names +of cities, towns, villages, States, and Territories, or names of +the Canadian Provinces will be counted each as one word: _e._g._, +New York, District of Columbia, East St. Louis should each be +counted as one word. The abbreviation of the names of cities, +towns, villages, States, Territories, and provinces will be +counted the same as if written in full. + +11. Abbreviations of weights and measures in common use, figures, +decimal points, bars of division, and in ordinal numbers the +affixes "st," "d," "nd," "rd," and "th" will be each counted +as one word. Letters and groups of letters, when such groups do +not form dictionary words and are not combinations of dictionary +words, will be counted at the rate of five letters or fraction +of five letters to a word. When such groups are made up of +combinations of dictionary words, each dictionary word so used +will be counted. + +12. The following are exceptions to paragraph 55, and are counted +as shown: + + A. M. 1 word + P. M. 1 word + O. K. 1 word + Per cent 1 word + +13. No message will be considered sent until its receipt has been +acknowledged by the receiving station. + + +The International Morse or General Service Code. + +18. The International Morse Code is the General Service Code +and is prescribed for use by the Army of the United States and +between the Army and the Navy of the United States. It will be +used on radio systems, submarine cables using siphon recorders, +and with the heliograph, flash-lantern, and all visual signaling +apparatus using the wigwag. + + _Alphabet_. + + A . - N - . + B - . . . O - - - + C - . - . P . - - . + D - . . Q - - . - + E . R . - . + F . . - . S . . . + G - - . T - + H . . . . U . . - + I . . V . . . - + J . - - - W . - - + K - . - X - . . - + L . - . . Y - . - - + M - - Z - - . . + + _Numerals_. + + 1 . - - - - 6 - . . . . + 2 . . - - - 7 - - . . . + 3 . . . - - 8 - - - . . + 4 . . . . - 9 - - - - . + 5 . . . . . 0 - - - - - + + _Punctuation_. + + Period . . . . . . + Comma . - . - . - + Interrogation . . - - . . + Hyphen or dash - . . . . - + Parentheses (before and after the words) - . - - . - + Quotation mark (beginning and ending) . - . . - . + Exclamation - - . . - - + Apostrophe . - - - - . + Semicolon - . - . - . + Colon - - - . . . + Bar indicating fraction - . . - . + Underline (before and after the word or + words it is wished to underline) . . - - . - + Double dash (between preamble and address, + between address and body of message, + between body of message and signature, + and immediately before a fraction) - . . . - + Cross . - . - . + + +Visual Signaling in General. + +21. Methods of visual signaling are divided as follows: + +(a) By flag, torch, hand lantern, or beam of searchlight (without +shutter). (General Service Code). + +(b) By heliograph, flash lantern, or searchlight (with shutter). +(General Service Code). + +(c) By Ardois. (General Service Code). + +(d) By hand flags or by stationary semaphore. (Two-arm semaphore +Code.) + +(e) By preconcerted signals with Coston lights, rockets, bombs, +Very pistols, small arms, guns, etc. + +(f) By flag signals by permanent hoists. (International Code.) + +22. The following conventional signals, with exceptions noted, +will be used in the first four classes. + + _Exceptions_ + Ardois and semaphore. + End of word. Interval. + End of sentence. Double interval. + End of message. Triple interval. + Signal separating + preamble from + address; address + from text; text + from signature. - . . . - Double interval, + signature preceded + also by "Sig." + Interval. + Acknowledgement. R. + Error. . . . . . . . . A. + Negative. K. + Preparatory. L. + Annulling. N. + Affirmative. P. + Interrogatory. . . - - . . O. + Repeat after word. Interrogatory. A + (word). + Repeat last message. Interrogatory + three times + Send faster. QRQ + Send slower. QRS + Cease sending QRT + Wait a moment . - . . . None. + Execute. IX, IX + Move to your right. MR + Move to your left. ML + Move up. MU + Move down. MD + Finished . . . - . - None. + + +Visual Signaling: By Flag (Wig-Wag), Torch, Hand Lantern, or Beam +or Searchlight (Without Shutter). + +GENERAL SERVICE CODE. + +23. For the flag used with the General Service Code there are +three motions and one position. The position is with the flag +held vertically, the signalman facing directly toward the station +with which it is desired to communicate. The first motion (the +dot) is to the right of the sender, and will embrace an arc of +90°, starting with the vertical and returning to it, and will +be made in a plane at right angles to the line connecting the +two stations. The second motion (the dash) is a similar motion +to the left of the sender. The third motion (front) is downward +directly in front of the sender and instantly returned upward +to the first position. Front is used to indicate an interval. + +24. The beam of the searchlight, though ordinarily used with +the shutter like the heliograph, may be used for long-distance +signaling, when no shutter is suitable or available, in a similar +manner to the flag or torch, the first position being a vertical +one. A movement of the beam 90° to the right of the sender indicates +a dot, a similar movement to the left indicates a dash; the beam +is lowered vertically for front. + +25. To use the torch or hand lantern, a foot light must be employed +as a point of reference to the motion. The lantern is most +conveniently swung out upward to the right of the footlight for +a dot, to the left for a dash, and raised vertically for front. + +NOTE.--To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, +at intervals giving the call or signal of the calling station. +If the call letter of a station is unknown, wave flag until +acknowledged. In using the searchlight without shutter throw +the beam in a vertical position and move it through an arc of +180° in a plane at right angles to the line connecting the two +stations until acknowledged. To acknowledge a call, signal +"Acknowledgment" followed by the call letter of the acknowledging +station. + + +Signaling with Heliograph, Flash Lantern, and Searchlight (With +Shutter). + +GENERAL SERVICE CODE. + +26. The first position is to turn a steady flash on the receiving +station. The signals are made by short and long flashes. Use a +short flash for dot and a long steady flash for dash. The elements +of a letter should be slightly longer than in sound signals. + +27. To call a station, make its call letter until acknowledged. + +28. If the call letter of a station be unknown, signal A until +acknowledged. Each station will then turn on a steady flash and +adjust. When adjustment is satisfactory to the called station, +it will cut off its flash and the calling station will proceed +with its message. + +29. If the receiver sees that the sender's mirror or light needs +adjustment, he will turn on a steady flash until answered, by a +steady flash. When the adjustment is satisfactory the receiver +will cut off his flash and the sender will resume his message. + +[Illustration: THE TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE.] + +[Illustration: THE TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE.] + +30. To break the sending station for other purposes, turn on a +steady flash. + + +SOUND SIGNALS. + +56. Sound signals made by the whistle, foghorn, bugle, trumpet, +and drum may well be used in a fog, mist, falling snow, or at +night. They may be used with the dot and dash code. + +In applying the General Service Code to whistle, foghorn, bugle, +or trumpet, one short blast indicates a dot and one long blast +a dash. With the drum, one tap indicates a dot and two taps in +rapid succession a dash. Although these signals can be used with +a dot and dash code, they should be so used in connection with +a preconcerted or conventional code. + + +Signaling by Two-Arm Semaphore. + +HAND FLAGS. + +43. Signaling by the two-arm semaphore is the most rapid method +of sending spelled-out messages. It is, however, very liable to +error if the motions are slurred over or run together in an attempt +to make speed. Both arms should move rapidly and simultaneously, +but there should be a perceptible pause at the end of each letter +before making the movements for the next letter. Rapidity is +secondary to accuracy. For alphabet see pages following. + +NOTE.--In making the interval the flags are crossed downward in +front of the body (just above the knees); the double interval +is the "chop-chop" signal made twice; the triple interval is +"chop-chop" signal made three times. In calling a station face +it squarely and make its call. If there is no immediate reply +wave the flags over the head to attract attention, making the call +at frequent intervals. When the sender makes "end of message" the +receiver, if message is understood, extends the flags horizontally +and waves them until the sender does the same, when both leave +their stations. Care must be taken with hand flags to hold the +staffs so as to form a prolongation of the arms. + + +LETTER CODES. + +INFANTRY. + +47. For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags. + + ------------------------------------------------------------- + Letter of | If signaled from | If signaled from + alphabet | the rear to the | the firing line + | firing line. | to the rear. + ------------|------------------------|----------------------- + AM | Ammunition going | Ammunition required. + | forward. | + CCC | Charge (mandatory | Am about to charge + | at all times). | if no instructions + | | to the contrary. + CF | Cease firing. | Cease firing. + DT | Double time or "rush." | Double time or "rush." + F | Commence firing. | + FB | Fix bayonet. | + FL | Artillery fire is | + | causing us losses. | + G | Move forward. | Preparing to move + | | forward. + HHH | Halt. | + K | Negative. | Negative. + LT | Left. | Left. + O | What is the (R. N., | What is the (R. N., + (Ardois and | etc.)? Interrogatory. | etc.)? Interrogatory. + Semaphore | | + only.) | | + . . - - . . | What is the (R. N., | What is the (R. N., + (All methods| etc.)? Interrogatory. | etc.)? Interrogatory. + but ardois | | + and | | + semaphore.) | | + P | Affirmative. | Affirmative. + RN | Range. | Range. + RT | Right. | Right. + SSS | Support going forward. | Support needed. + SUF | Suspend firing. | Suspend firing. + T | Target. | Target. + ------------------------------------------------------------- + + +CAVALRY. + +48. For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags. + + AM--Ammunition going forward (if signaled from the + rear to the front). + Ammunition required (If signaled from the front). + CCC--Charge (if signaled rear the rear to the front). + About to charge if no instructions to the + contrary (if signaled from the front). + CF--Cease firing. + DT--Double time, rush, or hurry. + F--Commence firing. + FL--Artillery fire is causing us losses. + G--Move forward (if signaled from the rear to + the front). Preparing to move forward (if + signaled from the front). + HHH--Halt. + K--Negative. + LT--Left. + M--Bring up the horses (if signaled from front + to rear). Horses going forward (if signaled + from rear to front). + O--What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. + (Ardois and semaphore only.) + . . - - . .--What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. + (All methods but ardois and semaphore.) + P--Affirmative. + R--Acknowledgment. + RN--Range. + RT--Right. + SSS--Support going forward (if signaled from the + rear to the front). Support needed (if + signaled from the front). + SUF--Suspend firing. + T--Target. + + +FIELD ARTILLERY. + +49. For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags. + +. . . . . . . .--Error. (All methods but ardois and semaphore.) + A--Error. (Ardois and semaphore only.) + AD--Additional. + AKT--Draw ammunition from combat tram. + AL--Draw ammunition from limbers. + AM--Ammunition going forward. + AMC--At my command. + AP--Aiming point. + B (numerals)--Battery (so many) rounds. + BS (numerals)--(Such.) Battalion station. + BL--Battery from the left. + BR--Battery from the right. + CCC--Charge (mandatory at all times). Am about to + charge if not instructed to contrary. + CF--Cease firing. + CS--Close station. + CT--Change target. + D--Down. + DF--Deflection. + DT--Double time. Rush. Hurry. + F--Commence firing. + FCL (numerals)--On 1st piece close by (so much). + FL--Artillery fire is causing us losses. + FOP (numerals)--On 1st piece open by (so much). + G--Move forward. Preparing to move forward. + HHH--Halt. Action suspended. + IX--Execute. Go ahead. Transmit. + JI--Report firing data. + K--Negative. No. + KR--Corrector. + L--Preparatory. Attention. + LCL (numerals)--On 4th piece close by (so much). + LOP (numerals)--On 4th piece open by (so much). + LT--Left. + LL--Left from the left. + LR--Left from the right. + LE (numerals)--Left (so much). + MD--Move down. + ML--Move to your left. + MR--Move to your right. + MU--Move up. + MO (numerals)--Move (so much). + N--Annul, cancel. + O--What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. + (Ardois and semaphore only.) + . . - - . .--What is the (R. N.. etc.)? Interrogatory. + (All methods but ardois and semaphore.) + P--Affirmative. Yes. + PS--Percussion. Shrapnel. + QRQ--Send faster. + QRS--Send slower. + QRT--Cease sending. + R--Acknowledgment. Received. + RS--Regimental station. + RL--Right from the left. + RR--Right from the right. + RN--Range. + RT--Right. + S--Subtract. + SCL (numerals)--On 2d piece close by (so much). + SOP (numerals)--On 2d piece open by (so much). + SH--Shell. + SI--Site. + SSS--Support needed. + T--Target. + TCL (numerals)--On 3d piece close by (so much). + TOP (numerals)--On 3d piece open by (so much). + U--Up. + Y (letter)--Such battery station. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +FIRST AID RULES. + +The bandages and dressings contained in the first-aid packet +have been so treated as to destroy any germs thereon. Therefore, +when dressing a wound, be careful not to touch or handle that +part of the dressing which is to be applied to the wound. + +A sick or injured person should always be made to lie down on his +back, if practicable, as this is the most comfortable position, +and all muscles may be relaxed. + +All tight articles of clothing and equipment should be loosened, +so as not to interfere with breathing or the circulation of the +blood. Belts, collars, and the trousers at the waist should be +opened. + +[Illustration: FIG. 1.] + +Don't let mere onlookers crowd about the patient. They prevent +him from getting fresh air and also make him nervous and excited. + +In case of injury the heart action is generally weak from shock, +and the body, therefore, grows somewhat cold. So don't remove +any more clothing than is necessary to expose the injury. + +Cut or rip the clothing, but don't pull it. Try to disturb the +patient as little as possible. + +Don't touch a wound with your fingers or a handkerchief, or with +anything else but the first-aid dressing. Don't wash the wound +with water, as you may infect it. + +Don't administer stimulants (whisky, brandy, wine, etc.) unless +ordered to do so by a doctor. While in a few cases stimulants +are of benefit, in a great many cases they do positive harm, +especially where there has been any bleeding. + +The heart may be considered as a pump and the arteries as a rubber +hose, which carry the blood from the heart to every part of the +body. The veins are the hose which carry the blood back to the +heart. Every wound bleeds some, but, unless a large artery or +a large vein is cut, the bleeding will stop after a short while +if the patient is kept quiet and the first-aid dressing is bound +over the wound so as to make pressure on it. + +[Illustration: FIG. 2.] + +When a large artery is cut the blood gushes out in spurts every +time the heart beats. In this case it is necessary to stop the +flow of blood by pressing upon the hose somewhere between the +heart and the leak. + +If the leak is in the arm or hand, apply pressure as in figure +1. + +If the leak is in the leg, apply pressure as in figure 2. + +If the leak is in the shoulder or armpit, apply pressure as in +figure 3. + +The reason for this is that at the places indicated the arteries +may be pressed against a bone more easily than at any other places. + +Another way of applying pressure (by means of a tourniquet) is +shown in figure 4. Place a pad of tightly rolled cloth or paper, +or any suitable object, over the artery. Tie a bandage loosely +about the limb and then insert your bayonet, or a stick, and +twist up the bandage until the pressure of the pad on the artery +stops the leak. Twist the bandage slowly and stop as soon as +the blood ceases to flow, in order not to bruise the flesh or +muscles unnecessarily. + +[Illustration: FIG. 3.] + +A tourniquet may cause pain and swelling of the limb, and it +left on too long may cause the limb to die. Therefore, about +every half hour or so, loosen the bandage very carefully, but if +the bleeding continues pressure must be applied again. In this +case apply the pressure with the thumb for five or ten minutes, +as this cuts off only the main artery and leaves some of the +smaller arteries and the veins free to restore some of the +circulation. When a tourniquet is painful, it is too tight and +should be carefully loosened a little. + +It the leg or arm is held upright, this also helps to reduce +the bleeding in these parts, because the heart then has to pump +the blood uphill. + +A broken bone is called a fracture. The great danger in the case +of a fracture is that the sharp, jagged edges of the bones may +stick through the flesh and skin, or tear and bruise the arteries, +veins, and muscles. If the skin is not broken, a fracture is +not so serious, as no germs can get in. Therefore never move a +person with a broken bone until the fracture has been so fixed +that the broken ends of the bone can not move. + +[Illustration: FIG. 4.--Improvised tourniquet.] + +If the leg or arm is broken, straighten the limb gently and if +necessary pull upon the end firmly to get the bones in place. +Then bind the limb firmly to a splint to hold it in place. A +splint may be made of any straight, stiff material--a shingle +or piece of board, a bayonet, a rifle, a straight branch of a +tree, etc. Whatever material you use must be well padded on the +side next to the limb. Be careful never to place the bandages +over the fracture, but always above and below. (Figs. 5, 6, 7, +8.) + +Many surgeons think that the method of binding a broken leg to +the well one, and of binding the arm to the body, is the best +plan in the field as being the quickest and one that serves the +immediate purpose. + +[Illustration: FIG. 5.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 6.] + +With wounds about the body the chest and abdomen you must not +meddle except to protect them when possible without much handling +with the materials of the packet. + + +FAINTING, SHOCK, HEAT EXHAUSTION. + +The symptoms of fainting, shock, and heat exhaustion are very +similar. The face is pale, the skin cool and moist, the pulse is +weak, and generally the patient is unconscious. Keep the patient +quiet, resting on his back, with his head low. Loosen the clothing, +but keep the patient warm, and give stimulants (whisky, hot coffee, +tea, etc.). + + +SUNSTROKE. + +In the case of sunstroke the face is flushed, the skin is dry +and very hot, and the pulse is full and strong. In this case +place the patient in a cool spot, remove the clothing, and make +every effort to lessen the heat in the body by cold applications +to the head and surface generally. Do not, under any circumstances, +give any stimulants or hot drinks. + +[Illustration: FIG. 7.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 8.] + + +FREEZING AND FROSTBITE. + +The part frozen, which looks white or bluish white, and is cold, +should be very slowly raised in temperature by brisk but careful +rubbing in a cool place and never near a fire. Stimulants are to +be given cautiously when the patient can swallow, and followed by +small amounts of warm liquid nourishment. The object is to restore +the circulation of the blood and the natural warmth gradually and +not violently. Care and patience are necessary to do this. + + +RESUSITATION OF THE APPARENTLY DROWNED. + +In the instruction of the Army in First Aid the method of +resuscitation of the apparently drowned, as described by "Schaefer," +will be taught instead of the "Sylvester Method," heretofore +used. The Schaefer method of artificial respiration is also +applicable in cases of electric shock, asphyxiation by gas, and +of the failure of respiration following concussion of the brain. + +Being under water for four of five minutes is generally fatal, +but an effort to revive the apparently drowned should always +be made, unless it is known that the body has been under water +for a very long time. The attempt to revive the patient should +not be delayed for the purpose of removing his clothes or placing +him in the ambulance. Begin the procedure as soon as he is out +of the water, on the shore or in the boat. The first and most +important thing is to start artificial respiration without delay. + +The Schaefer method is preferred because it can be carried out +by one person without assistance, and because its procedure is +not exhausting to the operator, thus permitting him, if required, +to continue it for one or two hours. When it is known that a +person has been under water for but a few minutes continue the +artificial respiration for at least one and a half to two hours +before considering the case hopeless. Once the patient has begun to +breathe watch carefully to see that he does not stop again. Should +the breathing be very faint, or should he stop breathing, assist +him again with artificial respiration. After he starts breathing +do not lift him nor permit him to stand until the breathing has +become full and regular. + +As soon as the patient is removed from the water, turn him face +to the ground, clasp your hands under his waist, and raise the +body so any water may drain out of the air passages while the +head remains low. (Figure 9.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 9.--Schaefer method of artificial respiration. +Inspiration.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 10.--Schaefer method of artificial respiration. +Expiration.] + +The patient is laid on his stomach, arms extended from his body +beyond his head, face turned to one side so that the mouth and +nose do not touch the ground. This position causes the tongue to +fall forward of its own weight and so prevents its falling back +into the air passages. Turning the head to one side prevents the +face coming into contact with mud or water during the operation. +This position also facilitates the removal from the mouth of +foreign bodies, such as tobacco, chewing gum, false teeth, etc., +and favors the expulsion of mucus, blood, vomitus, serum, or +any liquid that may be in the air passages. + +The operator kneels, straddles one or both of the patient's thighs, +and faces his head. Locating the lowest rib, the operator, with +his thumbs nearly parallel to his fingers, places his hands so +that the little finger curls over the twelfth rib. If the hands +are on the pelvic bones the object of the work is defeated; hence +the bones of the pelvis are first located in order to avoid them. +The hands must be free from the pelvis and resting on the lowest +rib. By operating on the bare back it is easier to locate the +lower ribs and avoid the pelvis. The nearer the ends of the ribs +the hands are placed without sliding off the better. The hands +are thus removed from the spine, the fingers being nearly out +of sight. + +The fingers help some, but the chief pressure is exerted by the +heels (thenar and hypothenar eminences) of the hands, with the +weight coming straight from the shoulders. It is a waste of energy +to bend the arms at the elbows and shove in from the sides, because +the muscles of the back are stronger than the muscles of the +arms. + +The operator's arms are held straight, and his weight is brought +from his shoulders by bringing his body and shoulders forward. +This weight is gradually increased until at the end of the three +seconds of vertical pressure upon the lower ribs of the patient +the force is felt to be heavy enough to compress the parts; then +the weight is suddenly removed. If there is danger of not returning +the hands to the right position again, they can remain lightly +in place; but it is usually better to remove the hands entirely. +If the operator is light and the patient an overweight adult, +he can utilize over 80 per cent of his weight by raising his +knees from the ground and supporting himself entirely on his +toes and the heels of his hands, the latter properly placed on +the ends of the floating ribs of the patient. In this manner +he can work as effectively as a heavy man. + +A light feather or a piece of absorbent cotton drawn out thin +and held near the nose by some one will indicate by its movements +whether or not there is a current of air going and coming with +each forced expiration and spontaneous inspiration. + +The natural rate of breathing is 12 to 15 times per minute. The +rate of operation should not exceed this. The lungs must be +thoroughly emptied by three seconds of pressure, then refilling +takes care of itself. Pressure and release of pressure--one complete +respiration--occupies about five seconds. If the operator is +alone, he can be guided in each act by his own deep, regular +respiration or by counting or by his watch lying by his side. +If comrades are present, he can be advised by them. + +The duration of the efforts as artificial respiration should +ordinarily exceed an hour; indefinitely longer if there are any +evidences of returning animation, by way of breathing, speaking, +or movements. There are liable to be evidences of life within 25 +minutes in patients who will recover from electric shock, but +where there is doubt the patient should be given the benefit +of the doubt. In drowning, especially, recoveries are on record +after two hours or more of unconsciousness; hence, the Schaefer +method, being easy of operation, is more likely to be persisted +in. + +Aromatic spirits of ammonia may be poured on a handkerchief and +held continuously within 3 inches of the face and nose. If other +ammonia preparations are used, they should be diluted or held +farther away. Try it on your own nose first. + +When the operator is a heavy man it is necessary to caution him +not to bring force too violently upon the ribs, as one of them +might be broken. + +Do not attempt to give liquids of any kind to the patient while +unconscious. Apply warm blankets and hot-water bottles as soon +as they can be obtained. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +LAWS AND REGULATIONS. + + +SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS. + +The Army of the United States is governed by certain laws called +"The Articles of War" and certain regulations called "Army +Regulations." + +The following list includes the offenses most often committed +by soldiers, generally through ignorance or carelessness rather +than viciousness. Violations of any rule or regulation should +be carefully guarded against, since they not only subject the +offender to punishment, but also bring discredit on his comrades, +his organization, and on the military profession: + +1. Selling, pawning, or, through neglect, losing or spoiling +any Government property, such as uniforms, blankets, equipment, +ammunition, etc. + +2. Disobedience of the orders of any officer or noncommissioned +officer. + +3. Disrespect to an officer or noncommissioned officer. + +4. Absence from camp without leave. + +5. Absence from any drill, formation, or other duty without +authority. + +6. Drunkenness on duty or off duty, whether in camp or when absent +either with or without leave. + +7. Bringing liquor into camp. + +8. Noisy or disorderly conduct in camp or when absent either with +or without leave. + +9. Entering on private property, generally for the purpose of +stealing fruit, etc. + +10. Negligence or carelessness at drill or on other duty, +particularly while on guard or as a sentinel over prisoners. + +11. Wearing an unauthorized uniform or wearing the uniform in +an improper manner. + +12. Urinating in or around camp. + +13. Falling to salute properly. + +14. Disrespect or affront to a sentinel. + +15. Abuse or neglect of his horse. + +"The basic principles of the combat tactics of the different arms +are set forth in the Drill Regulations of those arms for units as +high as brigades," (_Preface,_Field_Service_Regulations_.) + +"The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide +the principles for training and for increasing the probability +of success in battle. In the interpretation of the regulations +the spirit must be sought. Quibbling over the minutæ of form is +indicative of failure to grasp the spirit," (_Paragraph_4,_ +_Infantry_Drill_Regulations._) + +Field Service Regulations govern all arms of the Army of the United +States." + + +SECTION 2. THE ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES. + +The Army of the United States shall consist of the Regular Army, +the Volunteer Army, the Officers' Reserve Corps, the Enlisted +Reserve Corps, the National Guard while in the service of the United +States, and such other land forces as are now or may hereafter +be authorized by law. (Sec. 1, act of June 3, 1916.) + + +SECTION 3. RANK AND PRECEDENCE OF OFFICERS AND NONCOMMISSIONED +OFFICERS. + +The following are the grades of rank of officers and noncommissioned +officers: + + 1. Lieutenant general. + 2. Major general. + 3. Brigadier general. + 4. Colonel. + 5. Lieutenant colonel. + 6. Major. + 7. Captain. + 8. First lieutenant. + 9. Second lieutenant. + 10. Aviator, Signal Corps. + 11. Cadet. + 12. (a) Sergeant major, regimental; sergeant major, senior + grade, Coast Artillery Corps; (b) quartermaster sergeant, + senior grade, Quartermaster Corps; master hospital sergeant, + Medical Department; master engineer, senior grade, Corps of + Engineers; master electrician, Coast Artillery Corps; master + signal electrician; band lender; (c) hospital sergeant, Medical + Department; master engineer, junior grade, Corps of Engineers; + engineer, Coast Artillery Corps. + 13. Ordnance sergeant; quartermaster sergeant, Quartermaster + Corps; supply sergeant, regimental. + 14. Sergeant-major, squadron and battalion; sergeant major, + junior grade, Coast Artillery Corps; supply sergeant, battalion, + Corps of Engineers. + 15. (a) First sergeant; (b) sergeant, first class, Medical + Department; sergeant, first class, Quartermaster Corps; sergeant, + first class, Corps of Engineers; sergeant, first class, Signal + Corps; electrician sergeant, first class, Coast Artillery Corps; + electrician sergeant, Artillery Detachment, United States + Military Academy; assistant engineer, Coast Artillery Corps; + (c) master gunner, Coast Artillery Corps; master gunner, + Artillery Detachment, United States Military Academy; band + sergeant and assistant leader, United States Military Academy + band; assistant band leader; sergeant bugler; electrician + sergeant, second class, Coast Artillery Corps; electrician + sergeant, second class, Artillery Detachment, United States + Military Academy; radio sergeant. + 16. Color sergeant. + 17. Sergeant; supply sergeant, company; mess sergeant; stable + sergeant; fireman, Coast Artillery Corps. + 18. Corporal. + +In each grade and subgrade date of commission, appointment, or +warrant determines the order of precedence. (Paragraph. 9 Army +Regulations, 1913.) + + +SECTION 4. INSIGNIA OF OFFICERS AND NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS. + +The insignia of rank appearing on the shoulder straps, shoulder +loops, or collar of shirt (when shirt is worn without coat) of +officers are as follows: + + General: Coat of arms and two stars. + Lieutenant general: One large star and two smaller ones. + Major general: Two silver stars. + Brigadier general: One silver star. + Colonel: One silver spread eagle. + Lieutenant colonel: One silver leaf. + Major: One gold leaf. + Captain: Two silver bars. + First lieutenant: One silver bar. + +The grade of noncommissioned officers is indicated by chevrons +worn on the sleeve. + + +SECTION 5. EXTRACTS FROM THE ARTICLES OF WAR. + +(Relating to enlisted men.) + + +CERTAIN ARTICLES TO BE READ AND EXPLAINED. + +ART. 110. Articles 1, 2, and 29, 54 to 96, inclusive, and 104 +to 109, inclusive, shall be read and explained to every soldier +at the time of his enlistment or muster in, or within six days +thereafter, and shall be read and explained once every six months +to the soldiers of every garrison, regiment, or company in the +service of the United States. + + +DEFINITIONS. + +ARTICLE 1. The following words when used in these articles shall +be construed in the sense indicated in this article, unless the +context shows that a different sense is intended, namely: + +(a) The word "officer" shall be construed to refer to a commissioned +officer; + +(b) The word "soldier" shall be construed as including a +noncommissioned officer, a private, or any other enlisted man; + +(c) The word "company" shall be understood as including a troop +or battery; and + +(d) The word "battalion" shall be understood as including a squadron. + + +PERSONS SUBJECT TO MILITARY LAW. + +ART. 2. The following persons are subject to these articles and +shall be understood as included in the term "any person subject +to military law" or "persons subject to military law" whenever +used in these articles: _Provided_, That nothing contained +in this act, except as specifically provided in article 2, +subparagraph (c), shall be construed to apply to any person under +the United States naval jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically +provided by law: + +(a) All officers and soldiers belonging to the Regular Army of +the United States; all volunteers, from the dates of their muster +or acceptance into the military service of the United States; +and all other persons lawfully called, drafted, or ordered into +or to duty or for training in the said service, from the dates +they are required by the terms of the call, draft, or order to +obey the same. + +(b) Cadets. + +(c) Officers and soldiers of the Marine Corps when detached for +service with the armies of the United States by order of the +President: _Provided_, That an officer soldier of the Marine +Corps when so detached may be tried by military court-martial +for an offense committed against the laws for the government of +the naval service prior to his detachment, and for an offense +committed against these articles he may be tried by a naval +court-martial after such detachment ceases. + +(d) All retainers to the camp and all persons accompanying or +serving with the armies of the United States without the territorial +jurisdiction of the United States, and in time of war all such +retainers and persons accompanying or serving with the armies +of the United States in the field, both within and without the +territorial jurisdiction of the United States, though not otherwise +subject to these articles. + +(e) All persons under sentence adjudged by courts-martini. + +(f) All persons admitted into the Regular Army Soldiers' Home +at Washington. D. C. + + +ENLISTMENT WITHOUT DISCHARGE. + +ART. 29. Any soldier who, without having first received a regular +discharge, again enlists in the Army, or in the militia when +in the service of the United States, or in the Navy or Marine +Corps of the United States, or in any foreign army, shall be +deemed to have deserted the service of the United States; and, +where enlistment is in one of the forces of the United States +mentioned above, to have fraudulently enlisted therein. + + +FRAUDULENT ENLISTMENT. + +ART. 54. Any person who shall procure himself to be enlisted in +the military service of the United States by means of willful +misrepresentation or concealment as to his qualifications for +enlistment, and shall receive pay or allowances under such +enlistment, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +OFFICER MAKING UNLAWFUL ENLISTMENT + +ART. 55. Any officer who knowingly enlists or musters into the +military service any person whose enlistment or muster in is +prohibited by law, regulation, or orders shall be dismissed from +the service or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial +may direct. + + +MUSTER ROLLS--FALSE MUSTER. + +ART. 56. At every muster of a regiment, troop, battery, or company +the commanding officer thereof shall give to the mustering officer +certificates, signed by himself, stating how long absent officers +have been absent and the reasons of their absence. And the commanding +officer of every troop, battery, or company shall give like +certificates, stating how long absent noncommissioned officers +and private soldiers have been absent and the reasons of their +absence. Such reasons and time of absence shall be inserted in +the muster rolls opposite the names of the respective absent +officers and soldiers, and the certificates, together with the +muster rolls, shall be transmitted by the mustering officer to +the Department of War as speedily as the distance of the place +and muster will admit. Any officer who knowingly makes a false +muster of man or animal, or who signs or directs or allows the +signing of any muster roll knowing the same to contain false +muster or false statement as to the absence or pay of an officer +or soldier, or who wrongfully takes money or other consideration +on mustering in a regiment, company, or other organization, or +on signing muster rolls, or who knowingly musters as an officer +or soldier a person who is not such officer or soldier, shall +be dismissed from the service and suffer such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct. + + +FALSE RETURNS--OMISSION TO RENDER RETURNS. + +ART. 57. Every officer commanding a regiment, an independent +troop, battery, or company, or a garrison shall, in the beginning +of every month, transmit, through the proper channels, to the +War Department an exact return of the same, specifying the names +of the officers then absent from their posts, with the reasons +for and the time of their absence. Every officer whose duty it +is to render to the War Department or other superior authority +a return of the state of the troops under his command, or of the +arms, ammunition, clothing, funds, or other property thereunto +belonging, who knowingly makes a false return thereof shall be +dismissed from the service and suffer such other punishment as +a court-martial may direct. And any officer who, through neglect +or design, omits to render such return shall be punished as a +court-martial may direct. + + +DESERTION. + +ART. 58. Any person subject to military law who deserts or attempts +to desert the service of the United States shall, if the offense +be committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct, and, if the offense be committed +at any other time, any punishment, excepting death, that a +court-martial may direct. + + +ADVISING OR AIDING ANOTHER TO DESERT. + +ART. 59. Any person subject to military law who advises or persuades +or knowingly assists another to desert the service of the United +States shall, if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer +death, or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct, +and if the offense be committed at any other time any punishment, +excepting death, that a court-martial may direct. + + +ENTERTAINING A DESERTER. + +ART. 60. Any officer who, after having discovered that a soldier +in his command is a deserter from the military or naval service +or from the Marine Corps, retains such deserter in his command +without informing superior authority or the commander of the +organization to which the deserter belongs, shall be punished +as a court-martial may direct. + + +ABSENCE WITHOUT LEAVE. + +ART. 61. Any person subject to military law who fails to repair +at the fixed time to the properly appointed place of duty, or +goes from the same without proper leave, or absents himself from +his command, guard, quarters, station or camp without proper +leave, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +DISRESPECT TOWARD THE PRESIDENT, VICE PRESIDENT, CONGRESS, SECRETARY +OF WAR, GOVERNORS, LEGISLATURES. + +ART. 62. Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespectful words +against the President, Vice President, the Congress of the United +States, the Secretary of War, or the governor or legislature of +any State, Territory, or other possession of the United States +in which he is quartered shall be dismissed from the service +or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. +Any other person subject to military law who so offends shall +be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +DISRESPECT TOWARD SUPERIOR OFFICERS. + +ART. 63. Any person subject to military law who behaves himself +with disrespect toward his superior officer shall be punished +as a court-martial may direct. + + +ASSAULTING OR WILLFULLY DISOBEYING SUPERIOR OFFICER. + +ART. 64. Any person subject to military law who, on any pretense +whatsoever, strikes his superior officer or draws or lifts up any +weapon or offers any violence against him, being in the execution +of his office, or willfully disobeys any lawful command of his +superior officer, shall suffer death or such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct. + + +INSUBORDINATE CONDUCT TOWARD NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER. + +ART. 65. Any soldier who strikes or assaults, or who attempts +or threatens to strike or assault, or willfully disobeys the +lawful order of a noncommissioned officer while in the execution +of his office, or uses threatening or insulting language, or +behaves in an insubordinate or disrespectful manner toward a +noncommissioned officer while in the execution of his office, +shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +MUTINY OR SEDITION. + +ART. 66. Any person subject to military law who attempts to create +or who begins, excites, causes, or joins in any mutiny or sedition +in any company, party, post, camp detachment, guard, or other +command shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct. + + +FAILURE TO SUPPRESS MUTINY OR SEDITION. + +ART. 67. Any officer or soldier who, being present at any mutiny +or sedition, does not use his utmost endeavor to suppress the +same, or knowing or having reason to believe that a mutiny or +sedition is to take place, does not without delay give information +thereof to his commanding officer shall suffer death or such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct. + + +QUARRELS, FRAYS, DISORDERS. + +ART. 68. All officers and noncommissioned officers have power to +part and quell all quarrels, frays, and disorders among persons +subject to military law and to order officers who take part in the +same into arrest, and other persons subject to military law who +take part in the same into arrest or confinement, as circumstances +may require, until their proper superior officer is acquainted +therewith. And whosoever, being so ordered, refuses to obey such +officer or noncommissioned officer or draws a weapon upon or +otherwise threatens or does violence to him shall be punished +as a court-martial may direct. + + +ARREST OR CONFINEMENT OF ACCUSED PERSONS. + +ART. 69. An officer charged with crime or with a serious offense +under these articles shall be placed in arrest by the commanding +officer, and in exceptional cases an officer so charged may be +placed in confinement by the same authority. A soldier charged +with crime or with a serious offense under these articles shall +be placed in confinement, and when charged with a minor offense +he may be placed in arrest. Any other person subject to military +law charged with crime or with a serious offense under these +articles shall be placed in confinement or in arrest, as +circumstances may require; and when charged with a minor offense +such person may be placed in arrest. Any person placed in arrest +under the provisions of this article shall thereby be restricted +to his barracks, quarters, or tent, unless such limits shall be +enlarged by proper authority. Any officer who breaks his arrest +or who escapes from confinement before he is set at liberty by +proper authority shall be dismissed from the service or suffer +such other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and any +other person subject to military law who escapes from confinement +or who breaks his arrest before he is set at liberty by proper +authority shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +INVESTIGATION OF AND ACTION UPON CHARGES. + +ART. 70. No person put in arrest shall be continued in confinement +more than eight days, or until such time as a court-martial can +be assembled. When any person is put in arrest for the purpose of +trial, except at remote military posts or stations, the officer +by whose order he is arrested shall see that a copy of the charges +on which he is to be tried is served upon him within eight days +after his arrest, and that he is brought to trial within 10 days +thereafter, unless the necessities of the service prevent such +trial; and then he shall be brought to trial within 30 days after +the expiration of said 10 days. If a copy of the charges be not +served, or the arrested person be not brought to trial, as herein +required, the arrest shall cease. But persons released from arrest, +under the provisions of this article, may be tried, whenever +the exigencies of the service shall permit, within 12 months +after such release from arrest: _Provided_, That in time +of peace no person shall, against his objection, be brought to +trial before a general court-martial within a period of five +days subsequent to the service of charles upon him. + + +REFUSAL TO RECEIVE AND KEEP PRISONERS. + +ART. 71. No provost marshal or commander of a guard shall refute +to receive or keep any prisoner committed to his charge by an +officer belonging to the forces of the United States, provided +the officer committing shall, at the time, deliver an account +in writing, signed by himself, of the crime or offense charged +against the prisoner. Any officer or soldier so refusing shall +be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +REPORT OF PRISONERS RECEIVED. + +ART. 72. Every commander of a guard to whose charge a prisoner +is committed shall, within 24 hours after such confinement, or +as soon as he is relieved from his guard, report in writing to +the commanding officer the name of such prisoner, the offense +charged against him, and the name of the officer committing him; +and if he fails to make such report he shall be punished as a +court-martial may direct. + + +RELEASING PRISONER WITHOUT PROPER AUTHORITY. + +ART. 73. Any person subject to military law who, without proper +authority, releases any prisoner duly committed to his charge, or +who, through neglect or design, suffers any prisoner so committed +to escape, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +DELIVERY OF OFFENDERS TO CIVIL AUTHORITIES. + +ART. 74. When any person subject to military law, except one +who is held by the military authorities to answer, or who is +awaiting trial or result of trial, or who is undergoing sentence +for a crime or offense punishable under these articles, is accused +of a crime or offense committed within the geographical limits +of the States of the Union and the District of Columbia, and +punishable by the laws of the land, the commanding officer is +required, except in time of war, upon application duly made, +to use his utmost endeavor to deliver over such accused person +to the civil authorities, or to aid the officers, of justice in +apprehending and securing him, in order that he may be brought +to trial. Any commanding officer who upon such application refuses +or willfully neglects, except in time of war, to deliver over such +accused person to the civil authorities or to aid the officers of +justice in apprehending and securing him shall be dismissed from +the service or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial +may direct. + +When under the provisions of this article delivery is made to +the civll authorities of an offender undergoing sentence of a +court-martial, such delivery, if followed by conviction, shall +be held to interrupt the execution of the sentence of the +court-martial, and the offender shall be returned to military +custody, after having answered to the civil authorities for his +offense, for the completion of the said court-martial sentence. + + +MISBEHAVIOR BEFORE THE ENEMY. + +ART. 75. Any officer or soldier who misbehaves himself before +the enemy, runs away, or shamefully abandons or delivers up any +fort, post, camp, guard, or other command which it is his duty +to defend, or speaks words inducing others to do the like, or +casts away his arms or ammunition, or quits his post or colors +to plunder or pillage, or by any means whatsoever occasions false +alarms in camp, garrison, or quarters, shall suffer death or +such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. + + +SUBORDINATES COMPELLING COMMANDER TO SURRENDER. + +ART. 76. If any commander of any garrison, fort, post, camp, +guard, or other command is compelled by the officers or soldiers +under his command to give it up to the enemy or to abandon it, +the officers or soldiers so offending shall suffer death or such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct. + + +IMPROPER USE OF COUNTERSIGN. + +ART. 77. Any person subject to military law who makes known the +parole or countersign to any person not entitled to receive it +according to the rules and discipline of war, or gives a parole +or countersign different from that which he received, shall, if +the offense be committed in time of war, suffer death or such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct. + + +FORCING A SAFEGUARD. + +ART. 78. Any person subject to military law who, in time of war, +forces a safeguard shall suffer death or such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct. + + +CAPTURED PROPERTY TO BE SECURED FOR PUBLIC SERVICE. + +ART. 79. All public property taken from the enemy is the property +of the United States and shall be secured for the service of the +United States, and any person subject to military law who neglects +to secure such property or is guilty of wrongful application +thereof shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +DEALING IN CAPTURED OR ABANDONED PROPERTY. + +ART. 80. Any person subject to military law who buys, sells, +trades, or in any way deals in or disposes of captured or abandoned +property, whereby he shall receive or expect any profit, benefit, or +advantage to himself or to any other person directly or indirectly +connected with himself, or who falls whenever such property comes +into his possession or custody or within his control to give notice +thereof to the proper authority and to turn over such property to +the proper authority without delay, shall, on conviction thereof, +be punished by fine or imprisonment, or by such other punishment as +a court-martial, military commission, or other military tribunal +may adjudge, or by any or all of said penalties. + + +RELIEVING, CORRESPONDING WITH, OR AIDING THE ENEMY. + +ART. 81. Whosoever relieves the enemy with arms, ammunition, +supplies, money, or other thing, or knowingly harbors or protects +or holds correspondence with or gives intelligence to the enemy, +either directly or indirectly, shall suffer death, or such other +punishment as a court-martial or military commission may direct. + + +SPIES. + +ART. 82. Any person who in time of war shall be found lurking +or acting as a spy in or about any of the fortifications, posts, +quarters, or encampments of any of the armies of the United States, +or elsewhere, shall be tried by a general court-martial or by a +military commission, and shall, on conviction thereof, suffer +death. + + +MILITARY PROPERTY--WILLFUL OR NEGLIGENT LOSS, DAMAGE, OR WRONGFUL +DISPOSITION OF. + +ART. 83. Any person subject to military law who willfully or +through neglect suffers to be lost, spoiled, damaged, or wrongfully +disposed of any military property belonging to the United States +shall make good the loss or damage and suffer such punishment +as a court-martial may direct. + + +WASTE OR UNLAWFUL DISPOSITION OF MILITARY PROPERTY ISSUED TO +SOLDIERS. + +ART. 84. Any soldier who sells or wrongfully disposes of or willfully +or through neglect injures or loses any horse, arms, ammunition, +accouterments, equipments, clothing, or other property issued for +use in the military service shall be punished as a court-martial +may direct. + + +DRUNK ON DUTY. + +ART. 85. Any officer who is found drunk on duty shall, if the +offense be committed in time of war, be dismissed from the service +and suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct; +and if the offense be committed in time of peace he shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct. Any person subject to +military law, except un officer, who is found drunk on duty shall +be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +MISBEHAVIOR OF SENTINEL. + +ART. 86. Any sentinel who is found drunk or sleeping upon his +post, or who leaves it before he is regularly relieved, shall, +if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer death or such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and if the offense +be committed in time of pence he shall suffer any punishment, +except death, that a court-martial may direct. + + +PERSONAL INTEREST IN SALE OF PROVISIONS. + +ART. 87. Any officer commanding in any garrison, fort, barracks, +camp, or other place where troops of the United States may be serving +who, for his private advantage, lays any duty or imposition upon +or is interested in the sale of any victuals or other necessaries +of life brought into such garrison, fort, barracks, camp, or +other place for the use of the troops, shall be dismissed from +the service and suffer such other Punishment as a court-martial +may direct. + + +INTIMIDATION OF PERSONS BRINGING PROVISIONS. + +ART. 88. Any person subject to military law who abuses, intimidates, +does violence to, or wrongfully interferes with any person bringing +provisions, supplies, or other necessaries to the camp, garrison, +or quarters of the forces of the United States shall suffer such +punishment as a court-martial may direct. + + +GOOD ORDER TO BE MAINTAINED AND WRONGS REDRESSED. + +ART. 89. All persons subject to military law are to behave themselves +orderly in quarters, garrison, camp, and on the march; and any +person subject to military law who commits any waste or spoil, +or willfully destroys any property whatsoever (unless by order +of his commanding officer), or commits any kind of depredation +or riot, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. Any +commanding officer who, upon complaint made to him, refuses or +omits to see reparation made to the party injured, in so far as +the offender's pay shall go toward such reparation, as provided +for in article 105, shall be dismissed from the service or otherwise +punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +PROVOKING SPEECHES OR GESTURES + +ART. 90. No person subject to military law shall use any reproachful +or provoking speeches or gestures to another; and any person +subject to military law who offends against the provisions of +this article shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +DUELING. + +ART. 91. Any person subject to military law who fights or promotes +or is concerned in or connives at fighting a duel, or who having +knowledge of a challenge sent or about to be sent fails to report +the fact promptly to the proper authority, shall, if an officer, +be dismissed from the service or suffer such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct; and if any other person subject +to military law shall suffer such punishment as a court-martial +may direct. + + +MURDER-RAPE. + +ART. 92. Any person subject to military law who commits murder +or rape shall suffer death or imprisonment for life, as a +court-martial may direct; but no person shall be tried by +court-martial for murder or rape committed within the geographical +limits of the States of the Union and the District of Columbia +in time of peace. + + +VARIOUS CRIMES. + +ART. 93. Any person subject to military law who commits manslaughter, +mayhem, arson, burglary, robbery, larceny, embezzlement, perjury, +assault with intent to commit any felony, or assault with intent +to do bodily harm, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +FRAUDS AGAINST THE GOVERNMENT. + +ART. 94. Any person subject to military law who makes or causes +to be made any claim against the United States or any officer +thereof, knowing such claim to be false or fraudulent; or + +Who presents or causes to be presented to any person in the civil +or military service thereof, for approval or payment, any claim +against the United States or any officer thereof, knowing such +claim to be false or fraudulent; or + +Who enters into any agreement or conspiracy to defraud the United +States by obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the allowance +or payment of any false or fraudulent claim; or + +Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, +the approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the +United States or against any officer thereof, makes or uses, +or procures, or advises the making or use of, any writing or +other paper, knowing the same to contain any false or fraudulent +statements; or + +Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, +the approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the +United States or any officer thereof, makes, or procures, or +advises the making of, any oath to any fact or to any writing +or other paper, knowing such oath to be false; or + +Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, +the approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the +United States or any officer thereof, forges or counterfeits, +or procures, or advises the forging or counterfeiting of any +signature upon any writing or other paper, or uses, or procures, +or advises the use of any such signature, knowing the same to +be forged or counterfeited; or + +Who, having charge, possession, custody, or control of any money +or other property of the United States, furnished or intended +for the military service thereof, knowingly delivers, or causes +to be delivered, to any person having authority to receive the +same, any amount thereof less than that for which he receives +a certificate or receipt; or + +Who, being authorized to make or deliver any paper certifying +the receipt of any property of the United States furnished or +intended for the military service thereof, makes or delivers +to any person such writing, without having full knowledge of +the truth of the statements therein contained and with intent +to defraud the United States; or + +Who steals, embezzles, knowingly and willfully misappropriates, +applies to his own use or benefit, or wrongfully or knowingly +sells or disposes of any ordnance, arms, equipments, ammunition, +clothing, subsistence stores, money, or other property of the +United States furnished or intended for the military service +thereof; or + +Who knowingly purchases or receives in pledge for any obligation +or indebtedness from any soldier, officer, or other person who is +a part of or employed in said forces or service, any ordnance, +arms, equipment, ammunition, clothing, subsistence stores, or +other property of the United States, such soldier, officer, or +other person not having lawful right to sell or pledge the same; + +Shall, on conviction thereof, be punished by fine or imprisonment, +or by such other punishment as a court-martial may adjudge, or +by any or all of said penalties. And if any person, being guilty +of any of the offenses aforesaid while in the military service +of the United States, receives his discharge or is dismissed +from the service, he shall continue to be liable to be arrested +and held for trial and sentence by a court-martial in the same +manner and to the same extent as if he had not received such +discharge nor been dismissed. + + +CONDUCT UNBECOMING AN OFFICER AND GENTLEMAN. + +ART. 95. Any officer or cadet who is convicted of conduct unbecoming +an officer and a gentleman shall be dismissed from the service. + + +GENERAL ARTICLE. + +ART. 96. Though not mentioned in these articles, all disorders and +neglects to the prejudice of good order and military discipline, +all conduct of a nature to bring discredit upon the military +service, and all crimes or offenses not capital of which persons +subject to military law may be guilty shall be taken cognizance +of by a general or special or summary court-martial, according +to the nature and degree of the offense, and punished at the +discretion of such court. + + +DISCIPLINARY POWERS OF COMMANDING OFFICERS. + +ART. 104. Under such regulations as the President may prescribe, +and which he may from time to time revoke, alter, or add to, +the commanding officer of any detachment, company, or higher +command may, for minor offences not denied by the accused, impose +disciplinary punishments upon persons of his command without +the intervention of a court-martial, unless the accused demands +trial by court-martial. + +The disciplinary punishments authorized by this article may include +admonition, reprimand, withholding of privileges, extra fatigue, +and restriction to certain specified limits, but shall not include +forfeiture of pay or confinement under guard. A person punished +under authority fit this article who deems his punishment unjust +or disproportionate to the offense may, through the proper channel, +appeal to the next superior authority, but may in the meantime +be required to undergo the punishment adjudged. The commanding +officer who imposes the punishment, his successor in command, +and superior authority shall have power to mitigate or remit +any unexecuted portion of the punishment. The imposition and +enforcement of disciplinary punishment under authority of this +article for any act or omission shall not be a bar to trial by +court-martial for a crime or offense growing out of the same +act or omission; but the fact that a disciplinary punishment +has been enforced may be shown by the accused upon trial, and +when so shown shall be considered in determining the measure of +punishment to be adjudged in the event of a finding of guilty. + + +REDRESS OF INJURIES TO PERSON OR PROPERTY. + +ART. 105. Whenever complaint is made to any commanding officer +that damage has been done to the property of any person or that +his property has been wrongfully taken by persons subject to +military law, such complaint shall be investigated by a board +consisting of any number of officers from one to three, which +board shall be convened by the commanding officer and shall have, +for the purpose of such investigation, power to summon witnesses +and examine them upon oath or affirmation, to receive depositions +or other documentary evidence, and to assess the damages sustained +against the responsible parties. The assessment of damages made +by such board shall be subject to the approval of the commanding +officer, and in the amount approved by him shall be stopped against +the pay of the offenders. And the order of such commanding officer +directing stoppages herein authorized shall be conclusive on any +disbursing officer for the payment by him to the injured parties +of the stoppages so ordered. + +Where the offenders can not be ascertained but the organization +or detachment to which they belong is known, stoppages to the +amount of damages inflicted may be made and assessed in such +proportion as may be deemed just upon the individual members +thereof who are shown to have been present with such organization +or detachment at the time the damages complained of were inflicted, +as determined by the approved findings of the board. + + +ARREST OF DESERTERS BY CIVIL OFFICIALS. + +ART. 106. It shall be lawful for any civil officer having authority +under the laws of the United States, or of any State, Territory, +District, or possession of the United States, to arrest offenders, +summarily to arrest a deserter from the military service of the +United States and deliver him into the custody of the military +authorities of the United States. + + +SOLDIERS TO MAKE GOOD TIME LOST. + +ART. 107. Every soldier who in an existing or subsequent enlistment +deserts the service of the United States or without proper authority +absents himself from his organization, station, or duty for more +than one day, or who is confined for more than one day under +sentence, or while awaiting trial and disposition of his case, +if the trial results in conviction, or through the intemperate +use of drugs or alcoholic liquor, or through disease or injury +the result at his own misconduct, renders himself unable for more +than one day to perform duty, shall be liable to serve, after +his return to a full-duty status, for such period as shall, with +the time he may have served prior to such desertion, unauthorized +absence, confinement, or inability to perform duty, amount to +the full term of that part of his enlistment period which he is +required to serve with his organization before being furloughed +to the Army Reserve. + + +SOLDIERS--SEPARATION FROM THE SERVICE. + +ART. 108. No enlisted man, lawfully inducted into the military +service of the United States, shall be discharged from said service +without a certificate of discharge, signed by a field officer of +the regiment or other organization to which the enlisted man +belongs or by the commanding officer when no such field officer +is present; and no enlisted man shall be discharged from said +service before his term of service has expired, except by order +of the President, the Secretary of War, the commanding officer +of a department, or by sentence of a general Court-martial. + + +OATH OF ENLISTMENT. + +ART. 109. At the time of his enlistment every soldier shall take +the following oath or affirmation: "I, ----, do solemnly swear +(or affirm) that I will bear true faith and allegiance to the +United States of America; that I will serve them honestly and +faithfully against all their enemies whomsoever; and that I will +obey the orders of the President of the United States and the +orders of the officers appointed over me, according to the Rules +and Articles of War," This oath or affirmation may be taken before +any officer. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY. + + +COMMON WORDS. + +Afternoon (this) . . . . . . Cet après-midi. +Army (an) . . . . . . . . . . Une armée. +Bandage . . . . . . . . . . . Un bandage. +Bath . . . . . . . . . . . . Un bain. +Bayonet . . . . . . . . . . . Une baïonnette. +Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . Un lit. +Blanket . . . . . . . . . . . Une couverture +Boy . . . . . . . . . . . . . Un garçon. +Bullet . . . . . . . . . . . Une balle. + un pruneau (soldier slang). +Camp . . . . . . . . . . . . Un camp. + Un campement. +Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . Une cartouche. +Child . . . . . . . . . . . . Un enfant. + Une enfant. +Cook . . . . . . . . . . . . Un cuisinier. + Un cuistot (slang). + Une Cuisinière (fem.). +Dance . . . . . . . . . . . . Un bal. + Une danse (one dance). +Dark . . . . . . . . . . . . Obscur. +Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . Un jour. +Dead . . . . . . . . . . . . Mort. +Deserter . . . . . . . . . . Un déserteur. +Door . . . . . . . . . . . . Une porte. +Farm . . . . . . . . . . . . Une ferme. +Firearms . . . . . . . . . . Des armes à feu. +Field gun . . . . . . . . . . Une pièce de campagne. +Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . Un drapeau. + Un étendard (standard). +Forest . . . . . . . . . . . Une forêt. + Un bois (woods). + Un boqueteau (clump of trees). +Friend . . . . . . . . . . . Un ami. + Une amie. +Girl . . . . . . . . . . . . Une jeune fille. +Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . Un guide. +Gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . Un fusil. +Halt! . . . . . . . . . . . . Halte! +Hand . . . . . . . . . . . . Une main. +Hat . . . . . . . . . . . . . Un chapeau. + Un képi (cap). + Un casque (helmet). + Un feutre (campaign hat). +Head . . . . . . . . . . . . La tête. +Headquarters . . . . . . . . Le quartier-général. +Horse . . . . . . . . . . . . Un cheval. +Interpreter . . . . . . . . . Un interprète. +Knife . . . . . . . . . . . . Un couteau. +Lake . . . . . . . . . . . . Un lac. +Man . . . . . . . . . . . . . Un homme. +Meat . . . . . . . . . . . . De la viande. +Name . . . . . . . . . . . . Un nom. +Night . . . . . . . . . . . . La nuit. +Noon . . . . . . . . . . . . Midi. +Machine gun . . . . . . . . . Une mitrailleuse. +Mess call . . . . . . . . . . La soupe. +Password . . . . . . . . . . Le mot de passe. +Pay . . . . . . . . . . . . . Le prêt (enlisted men). + La solde (officers). +Prisoner . . . . . . . . . . Un prisonnier. +Recruit . . . . . . . . . . . Une recrue. + Un bleu (slang). + Un bleuet (slang). + Un blanc-bec (slang). +Restaurant . . . . . . . . . Un restaurant. + Un cafe. +Road . . . . . . . . . . . . Un chemin. + Une route. +Retreat . . . . . . . . . . . La retraite. +Reveille . . . . . . . . . . Le réveil. + La diane. +Saber . . . . . . . . . . . . Un sabre. +Saddle . . . . . . . . . . . Une selle. +Shoe . . . . . . . . . . . . Des chaussures (shoes in general). + Des souliers (low shoes). + Des bottines (high shoes). + Des brodequins (marching shoes). +Shotgun . . . . . . . . . . . Un fusil de cirasse +Sick . . . . . . . . . . . . Malade. +Soup . . . . . . . . . . . . Une soup. + Un potage. +Spy . . . . . . . . . . . . . Un espion. +Supper . . . . . . . . . . . Le sourer. +Sword . . . . . . . . . . . . Une épée. +Tent . . . . . . . . . . . . Une tente. +Shelter tent . . . . . . . . Une tente-abri. + + +NUMERALS. + +One . . . . . . . . . . . . . Un, une. +Two . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deux. +Three . . . . . . . . . . . . Trois. +Four . . . . . . . . . . . . Quatre. +Five . . . . . . . . . . . . Cinq(pronounce _sank_). +Six . . . . . . . . . . . . . Six (pronounce _cease_). +Seven . . . . . . . . . . . . Sept (pronounce _set_). +Eight . . . . . . . . . . . . Huit (pronounce _weet_). +Nine . . . . . . . . . . . . Neuf. +Ten . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dix (pronounce _deess_) +Eleven . . . . . . . . . . . Onze. +Twelve . . . . . . . . . . . Douze. +Thirteen . . . . . . . . . . Treize. +Fourteen . . . . . . . . . . Quatorze. +Fifteen . . . . . . . . . . . Quinze. +Sixteen . . . . . . . . . . . Seize. +Seventeen . . . . . . . . . . Dix-sept. +Eighteen . . . . . . . . . . Dix-huit. +Nineteen . . . . . . . . . . Dix-neuf. +Twenty . . . . . . . . . . . Vingt (pronounce _vant_.) +Twenty-one . . . . . . . . . Vingt-et-un. +Thirty . . . . . . . . . . . Trente. +Thirty-one . . . . . . . . . Trente-et-un. +Thirty-two . . . . . . . . . Trente-deux. +Forty . . . . . . . . . . . . Quarante. +Fifty . . . . . . . . . . . . Cinquante. +Sixty . . . . . . . . . . . . Soixante. +Seventy . . . . . . . . . . . Soixante-dix. +Seventy-one . . . . . . . . . Soixante-et-onze. +Seventy-two . . . . . . . . . Soixante-douze. +Eighty . . . . . . . . . . . Quatre-vingt. +Eighty-one . . . . . . . . . Quatre-vingt-un. +Ninety . . . . . . . . . . . Quatre-vingt-dix. +Ninety-one . . . . . . . . . Quatre-vingt-onze. +One hundred . . . . . . . . . Cent. +One hundred and one . . . . . Cent un. +Two hundred . . . . . . . . . Deux cents. +Two hundred and one . . . . . Deux cent un. +One thousand . . . . . . . . Mille. +Two thousand . . . . . . . . Deux mille. +One thousand one hundred . . Mille cent; onze cents. +Thousands of soldiers . . . . Des milliers de soldats. +A million . . . . . . . . . . Un million. +Two million men . . . . . . . Deux millions d'hommes. +A score . . . . . . . . . . . Une vingtaine. +About forty men . . . . . . . Une quarantaine d'hommes. +Hundreds of men . . . . . . . Des centaines d'hommes. + + +CURRENCY, MEASURES, AND WEIGHTS. + +1 cent . . . . . . . . . . . Un sou; cinq centimes. +10 cents . . . . . . . . . . Dix sous; cinquante centimes. +20 cents (about) . . . . . . Un francs. +1 dollar . . . . . . . . . . Cinq francs. + +(The French have gold pieces of 10 francs and 20 francs; bank +notes of 50 francs, 100 francs, and higher. The gold pieces are +probably replaced by bank notes now.) + +1 meter (1.0936 yards) . . . Un mètre. +1 kilometer (0.62138 mile) . Un kilomètre. + +NOTE:--For all ordinary purposes, the "kilomètre" = 5/8 of a mile; +the "centimètre"--4/10 of an inch. + +1 league (2.48552 miles) . . Une lieue. +1 hectare (2.4711 acres) . . Un hectare. +1 gram (15.43239 grains troy) Un gramme. +1 kilogram (2.204621 pounds + avoirdupois) . . . . . . . Un kilogramme. +220.46 pounds avoirdupois . . Un quintal; 100 kilos. +2,204.6 pounds avoirdupois . Une tonne; 1,000 kilos. + +(Coal is sold by the _tonne_; grain and hay by the +_quintal_. Dix quintaux de blé, de foin = 10 quintals of +grain, of hay.) + +1,0567 quart (liquid) . . . . Un litre. +26.417 gallons . . . . . . . Un hectolitre. +0.9081 quart (dry) . . . . . Un litre. +2.8379 bushels . . . . . . . Un hectolitre. + +(The _litre_, which is the principal unit of both fluid +and dry measures, is the contents of 1 cubic _décimètre_ +(décimètre = 1/10 mètre).) + + +DAYS, MONTHS, AND SEASONS. + +Sunday . . . . . . . . . . . Dimanche. +Monday . . . . . . . . . . . Lundi. +Tuesday . . . . . . . . . . . Mardi. +Wednesday . . . . . . . . . . Mercredi. +Thursday . . . . . . . . . . Jeudi. +Friday . . . . . . . . . . . Vendredi. +Saturday . . . . . . . . . . Samedi. +January . . . . . . . . . . . Janvier. +February . . . . . . . . . . Février. +March . . . . . . . . . . . . Mars. +April . . . . . . . . . . . . Avril. +May . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mai. +June . . . . . . . . . . . . Juin. +July . . . . . . . . . . . . Juillet. +August . . . . . . . . . . . Août (pronounce _oo_). +September . . . . . . . . . . Septembre. +October . . . . . . . . . . . Octobre. +November . . . . . . . . . . Novembre. +December . . . . . . . . . . Décembre. +The seasons . . . . . . . . . Les saisons. +Winter . . . . . . . . . . . L'hiver. +Spring . . . . . . . . . . . Le printemps. +Summer . . . . . . . . . . . L'été. +Fall . . . . . . . . . . . . L'automne. +Year . . . . . . . . . . . . Un an; une année. +Month . . . . . . . . . . . . Un mois. +Week . . . . . . . . . . . . Un semaine. +Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . Un jour. +Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . Un heure. +Minute . . . . . . . . . . . Un minute. +Second . . . . . . . . . . . Une seconde. + + +COMMON PHRASES. + +Good morning, sir, madam, \ Bonjour, monsieur, madame, + miss. Good afternoon / mademoiselle. +Good evening, sir . . . . . . Bonsoir, monsieur. +Good night, sir . . . . . . . Bonne nuit, monsieur. +Pardon me . . . . . . . . . . Pardon; je vous demande pardon. +Don't mention it . . . . . . Je vous en prie. +How do you do? . . . . . . . Comment allez-vous? + Comment ça va? + Comment vous portez-voue? +Very well, thank you . . . . Très bien, merci. + Je vais bien, merci. + Ça va bien, merci. + Je me porte bien, merci. +Do not trouble yourself . . . Ne vous gênez pas. + Ne vous dérangez pas. +I am very glad to see you . . Je suis bien aise de vous voir. + Je suis content (heureux) de + vous voir. +What time is it? . . . . . . Quelle heure est-it? +It is 10 o'clock . . . . . . Il est dix heures. +Take care; look out . . . . . Prenez garde +Do not bother me . . . . . . Ne me dérangez pas. +Stop here . . . . . . . . . . Arrêtez-vous ici. +Does Mr. -- live here? . . . M. -- demeure-t-il ici? +Come in . . . . . . . . . . . Entrez. +You are very kind . . . . . . Voue êtes très aimable. +At what time does the first . A quelle heure part le premier + train start? train? +What is the name of this . . Comment s'appelle cette station + station? (gare)? +I want . . . . . . . . . . . Je désire; Je veux (stronger). +I do not want it . . . . . . Je n'en veux pas. +Let me know what I owe you . Dites-moi ce que je vous dois. +Are you not mistaken? . . . . Ne faites-vous pas erreur? + Ne vous trompez-vous pas? +Please give me . . . . . . . Veuillez me donner. +Move on . . . . . . . . . . . Avancez. + Circulez. (Policeman.) +I want something to eat . . . Je désire quelque chose à manger. +Where is it? . . . . . . . . Où est-ce? +Go and look for it . . . . . Allez le chercher. +Take this letter to the . . . Portez cette lettre à la poste. + post office +How much is it? . . . . . . . Combien? + Combien cela coûte-t-il? +It is dear . . . . . . . . . C'est cher. +Thank you . . . . . . . . . . Merci. + Je vous en remercie. +Don't mention it . . . . . . Il n'y a pas de quoi. + De rien. +Allow me to present my . . . Permettez-moi de vous présénter + friend ---- mon ami ----. +I am glad to make your . . . Je suis enchanté de faire votre + acquaintance. connaissance. +How far is it? . . . . . . . A quelle distance est-ce? +What can I do for you? . . . Que puis-je faire pour vous? +Do you speak English? . . . . Parlez-vous anglais? +I do not speak French very . Je ne parle pas très bien le + well. français. +Where do you come from? . . . D'où venez-vous? +How did you come? . . . . . . Comment êtes-vous venu? +On foot, in a carriage, in . A pied, eu voiture, en auto, en + an auto, by rail, by boat, chemin de fer, en bateau, à + on a bicycle, on horseback, bicyclette, à cheval, en + in an aeroplane. aéroplane. + + +MILITARY TITLES, RANKS, AND GRADES. + +General officers . . . . . . Les officers généraux. +General Staff . . . . . . . . L'état-major général. +Field officers . . . . . . . Les officers supérieurs. +Company officers . . . . . . Les officers subalternes. +Enlisted men . . . . . . . . Les hommes de troupe. +Noncommissioned officers . . Les sous-officiers. +Private soldiers . . . . . . Les simples soldats. +Colonel . . . . . . . . . . . Le colonel (addressed[14] as + "Mon colonel "). +Major . . . . . . . . . . . . Le commandant ("Mon commandant"). +Captain . . . . . . . . . . . Le capitaine ("Mon capitaine"). + Le piston (slang). +First lieutenant . . . . . . Le lieutenant (en premier) + ("Mon lieutenant"). +Second Lieutenant . . . . . . Le sous-lieutenant + ("Mon lieutenant"). +A doctor . . . . . . . . . . Un (médecin) major. +A sergeant . . . . . . . . . Un sergent (addressed as + "Sergent"). + Un maréchal des logis (mounted + service). +A corporal . . . . . . . . . Un caporal ("Caporal"). + Un brigadier (mounted service). +A private . . . . . . . . . . Un simple soldat. +A body of troops . . . . . . Une troupe. +French troops . . . . . . . . Des troupes françaises. +A wagoner . . . . . . . . . . Un conducteur. + Un fourgonnier. +A horseshoer . . . . . . . . Un maréchal-ferrant. +A saddler . . . . . . . . . . Un sellier. +A signaler . . . . . . . . . Un signaleur. +A deserter . . . . . . . . . Un déserteur. +A soldier of Infantry . . . . Un fantassin. + Cavalry . . . . Un cavalier. + Artillery . . . Un artilleur. + Engineers . . . Un sapeur-mineur. + Quartermaster Corps . Un homme de l'intendance. + Signal Corps . . Un homme du corps des signaux. + Hospital Corps . Un infirmier. + Line of Communications . Un garde des voies et + communications, G. V. C. +Infantry . . . . . . . . . . L'infanterie. +Cavalry . . . . . . . . . . . La cavalarie. +Artillery . . . . . . . . . . L'artillerie. +Engineers . . . . . . . . . . Le genie. +Signal Corps . . . . . . . . Le corps des signaux. +Hospital Corps . . . . . . . Le corps de santé. + Le service de santé. +Aviation Corps . . . . . . . Le corps d'aviation. + +[Footnote 14: See note at the end of Chapter XV.] + + +MILITARY TERMS. + +The headquarters . . . . . . Le quartier général. +The train . . . . . . . . . . Le train des équipages. +Railway service . . . . . . . Le service des chemins de fer. +Telegraph service . . . . . . Le service des télégraphes. +Rural guards . . . . . . . . La gendarmerie. + Des gendarmes. +A paymaster . . . . . . . . . Un trésorier. +A chaplain . . . . . . . . . Un aumônier. +An army . . . . . . . . . . . Une armée. +General So-and-so's army . . L'armée--(l'armée Foch). +An army corps . . . . . . . . Un corps d'armée. +A division . . . . . . . . . Une division. +A brigade . . . . . . . . . . Une brigade. +A regiment . . . . . . . . . Un régiment. +A battalion . . . . . . . . . Un bataillon. +A company . . . . . . . . . . Une compagnie. +A platoon . . . . . . . . . . Un peloton. +A section . . . . . . . . . . Une section. +A squad . . . . . . . . . . . Une escouade. +A detachment . . . . . . . . Un détachement. +Barracks . . . . . . . . . . Une caserne. +A camp . . . . . . . . . . . Un camp (more or less permanent). + Un campement (temporary). +A cantonment . . . . . . . . Un cantonnement. +Line . . . . . . . . . . . . (Une) ligne. +Column . . . . . . . . . . . (Une) colonne. +As skirmishers . . . . . . . En tirailleurs. +Follow me, as skirmishers . . A moi, en tirailleurs. +Scouts . . . . . . . . . . . Des éclaireurs. +A patrol . . . . . . . . . . Une patrouille. +The advance guard . . . . . . L'avant-garde. +The rear guard . . . . . . . L'arrière-garde. +Flankers . . . . . . . . . . Des flanc-gardes. +The main body . . . . . . . . Le gros (de la colonne). +Combat train . . . . . . . . Le train de combat. +Field train . . . . . . . . . Le train régimentaire. +Outposts . . . . . . . . . . Des avant-postes. +Cossack posts . . . . . . . . Des avant-postes à la cosaque. +A sentinel . . . . . . . . . Une sentinelle. + Un factionnaire. +On post . . . . . . . . . . . En faction. + De faction. +Guard mounting . . . . . . . La garde montante (also _new_ + _guard_). +The sentinel challenges: \ La sentinelle crie: "Halte! + "Halt! Who's there?" / Qui vive?" +The answer is "France" . . . La réponse est: "France". +Advance with the countersign Avance au ralliement. + +(The person challenged gives the _mot_d'ordre_, which is the +name of some general, and the sentinel replies with the _mot_de_ +_ralliement_. which is the name of a battle or a city). + +Go away; you can't pass . . . (Passe) au large. +Halt, or I fire . . . . . . . Halte, ou je fais feu. +Put down your arms . . . . . Déposez vos armes. +Hands up! . . . . . . . . . . Levez les bras. +Face about . . . . . . . . . (Faites) demi-tour. +Come here . . . . . . . . . . Venez ici. +A spy . . . . . . . . . . . . Un espion. +A flag of truce . . . . . . . Un drapeau blanc. + Un drapeau parlementaire. + + +UNIFORM, ARMS, CLOTHING, AND EQUIPMENT. + +Clothing . . . . . . . . . . Les vêtements, l'habillement. +Change your clothes . . . . . Changez de vêtement. +Overcoat (worn by French + infantry) . . . . . . . . . Une capote. +Trouser . . . . . . . . . . . Un pantalon. +Breeches . . . . . . . . . . Une culotte. +Shirt . . . . . . . . . . . . Une chemise. +Blouse . . . . . . . . . . . Un dolman, une vareuse. +Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . Un képi. +Campaign hat (United States) Un (chapeau de) feutre. +Helmet . . . . . . . . . . . Un casque (de tranchée). +Cap without visor worn by + French off duty . . . . . . Un bonnet de police. +Tam-o'-Shanter worn by Alpine + chasseurs . . . . . . . . . Un béret. +Shoes in general . . . . . . Des chaussures. +Service shoes . . . . . . . . Des brodequins. +Leggins . . . . . . . . . . . Des guêtres. +Wrap putties . . . . . . . . Des bandes molletières. +Leather putties . . . . . . . Des houseaux (or housseaux). +Full-dress uniform . . . . . La grande tenue. +Dress uniform . . . . . . . . La petite tenue. +Field uniform . . . . . . . . La tenue de campagne. +Overcoat (mounted men) . . . Un manteau. +Overcoat (officers) . . . . . Un manteau. + Un manteau-capote. +Fatigue coat . . . . . . . . Le bourgeron. +Fatigue trousers (overalls) . Un pantalon de treillis. +Fatigue uniform . . . . . . . La tenue de corvée. +Magazine rifle . . . . . . . Un fusil à répétition. +The barrel . . . . . . . . . Le canon. +The bolt . . . . . . . . . . Le verrou. +The ramrod . . . . . . . . . La baguette. +The butt . . . . . . . . . . La crosse. +The gun sling . . . . . . . . La bretelle. +The trigger . . . . . . . . . La détente. +Rear sight . . . . . . . . . La hausse. +Front sight . . . . . . . . . Le guidon. +A bayonet . . . . . . . . . . Une baïonnette. + Rosalie (slang). +Ball cartridge . . . . . . . Une cartouche à balle. +Blank cartridge . . . . . . . Une cartouche à blanc. +Dummy cartridge . . . . . . . Une fausse cartouche. +Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . Un ceinturon. +Cartridge box . . . . . . . . Une cartouchière. +First-aid packet . . . . . . Un paquet de pansement. +The pack . . . . . . . . . . Le sac. +A haversack . . . . . . . . . Un étui-musette. +Canteen . . . . . . . . . . . Un bidon. +Tin cup . . . . . . . . . . . Un quart. +Mess can . . . . . . . . . . Une gamelle. +Equipment . . . . . . . . . . L'équipement. +Compass . . . . . . . . . . . Une boussole. +Field glasses . . . . . . . . Des jumelles (de campagne). +Whistle . . . . . . . . . . . Un sifflet. +Revolver . . . . . . . . . . Un revolver. + + +QUESTIONS ABOUT THE ROADS, ETC. + +Pardon me, sir, do you speak / Pardon, monsieur, parlez-vous + English? . . . . . . . . . \ anglais? +(German, French, Italian (Allemand, français, italien, + Russian). . . . . . . . . . russe). +All right, then show me, / Très bien, alors indiquez-moi; + please, the road to -- . . \ je vous prie, le chemin de -- +Is it far from here? . . . . Est-ce loin d'ici? +How long does it take to go Combien faut-il de temps pour y + there? . . . . . . . . . . . aller? +How many kilomètres . . . . . Combien de kilomètres? +Is there a short cut? (road) Y a-t-il un chemin de traverse? +Is there a short cut? (trail) Y a-t-il un sentier plus court? +Where does this road go? . . Où mène cette route? +Are we on the right road to / Sommes-nous sur le bon chemin + go to ----? . . . . . . . . \ pour aller à ----? +Does this road go through / Cette route passe-t-elle par + Compiègne? . . . . . . . . \ Compiègne? +Shall we find any villages on / Trouverons-nous des villages + our road? . . . . . . . . . \ sur notre chemin? +Are there any other roads / Y a-t-il d'autres chemins pour + going to ----? . . . . . . \ aller à ----? +Is this road in good + condition? . . . . . . . . Cette route est-elle en bon état? +Are there hills? . . . . . . Y a-t-il des côtes (des coteaux)? +Are they steep? . . . . . . . Sont-elles raides? +Does the road go through La route traverse-t-elle un pays + open or wooded country? . . découvert ou boisé? +Can we get through with Peut-on passer avec de + artillery? . . . . . . . . l'artillerie? +Can we get through with / Peut-on passer avec de grosses + heavily loaded wagons | voitures chargées (avec des + (auto trucks) \ camions-automobiles)? +Is this road practicable for / Cette route est-elle praticable + artillery? . . . . . . . . \ pour l'artillerie? +Can infantry march on the / L'infanterie peut-elle marcher + sides of the roads? . . . . \ sur les côtés de la route? +Is the ground practicable? . Le terrain est-il praticable? +Is the ground marshy? . . . . Le terrain est-il marécageux? +What is the nature of the + ground? . . . . . . . . . Quelle est la nature du sol? +Does the telegraph line / Est-ce que la ligne télégraphique + follow this road as far | (le télégraphe) suit cette + as X \ route jusqu'à X? +Where does your railroad come + from? . . . . . . . . . . . D'où vient votre chemin de fer? +Where does it go to? . . . . Où va-t-il? +Is it single tracked or / Est-il à une voie ou à deux voies + double tracked the whole | sur tout le parcours? + way? . . . . . . . . . . . \ +Where is the station? is it + Far? . . . . . . . . . . . Où est la gare? Est-elle loin d'ici? +How can the river be crossed? Comment peut-on passer la rivière? +Is there a bridge? a ferry? . Y a-t-il un pont? un bac? +Are there fords? . . . . . . Y a-t-il des passages à gué + (des gués)? +Can we get boats? . . . . . . Peut-on trouver des bateaux? +In that wood are there / Dans ce bois, y a-t-il des + clearings, ravines, brooks, | clairières, des ravins, des + marshes, pools? . . . . . . \ ruisseaux, des mares? +Are there any places near / Y a-t-il des endroits près d'ici + here for watering horses? . \ pour abreuver les chevaux? +Is the water good? . . . . . L'eau est-elle bonne? +Is this water drinkable? . . Est-ce de l'eau potable? +Are there watering troughs? . Y a-t-il des abreuvoirs? +Where is there good grass for / Où y a-t-il de bonne herbe pour + animals? . . . . . . . . . \ les animaux? +Can we buy provisions? . . . Peut-on acheter des vivres? +Is there a field where we / Y a-t-il un champ où nous pouvons + can camp? . . . . . . . . . | camper (installer notre + \ campement)? +Can you give me any / Pouvez-vous me donner des + information about the enemy? \ renseignements sur l'ennemi? +Please find me a guide who / Veuillez me trouver un guide qui + knows the country? . . . . \ connaisse le pays. +We are going to follow this + trail (tracks) . . . . . . Nous allons suivre cette piste. +Crossroads . . . . . . . . . Un carrefour. + + +TOWNS. + +Where is the post-office and / Où est le bureau des postes et + telegraph office? . . . . . \ télégraphes? +The postmaster . . . . . . . / Le directeur des postes et + \ télégraphes. +The mail . . . . . . . . . . Le courrier. +When was the last mail / A quelle heure a-t-on fait la + distributed? . . . . . . . \ derrière distribution? +General delivery . . . . . . Poste restante. +Are there any letters for --? Y a-t-il des lettres pour --? +I should like to send a / Je voudrais expédier un + telegram . . . . . . . . . \ télégramme. +Have you received a telegram / Avez-vous reçu un télégramme + for ----? . . . . . . . . . \ (une dépêche) pour ----? +A telegraph instrument . . . Un appareil (télégraphique). +Can you tell me where the / Pourriez-vous me dire où se + mayor's office is? . . . . \ trouve la mairie? +I couldn't tell you; I am a / Je ne saurais vous renseigner; + stranger here . . . . . . . \ je ne connais pas la ville. +Good-morning, sir, are you / Bonjour, Monsieur, êtes-vous + the mayor? . . . . . . . . \ le maire? +No, sir, I am his assistant . Non, Monsieur, je suis son adjoint. +I should like to speak to / Je voudrais parler au maire + the mayor himself . . . . . \ lui-même. +Listen, sir. A detachment / Ecoutez, monsieur; Un détachement + will arrive here to-morrow | arrivera ici demain matin à + morning at 5 o'clock . . . \ cinq heures. +Can you arrange to lodge / Povez-vous prendre de + 2,000 men for two days? . . | dispositions pour loger 2,000 + \ hommes pendant deux jours? +A policeman . . . . . . . . . Un sergent de ville, un agent de + la paix. + + +RAILROADS. + +The station agent . . . . . . Le chef de gare. +The conductor . . . . . . . . Le conducteur. +The engineer . . . . . . . . Le mécanicien. +The fireman . . . . . . . . . Le chauffeur. +The brakeman . . . . . . . . Le serre-freins. +The telegraph operator . . . Le télégraphiste. +An engine . . . . . . . . . . Une locomotive. +Passenger cars . . . . . . . Des wagons (de voyageurs). +Flat cars . . . . . . . . . . Des trucks. +Box cars . . . . . . . . . . Des wagons de marchandises. +Stock cars . . . . . . . . . Des wagons à bestiaux. +An express train . . . . . . Un train express. +A through train . . . . . . . Un train direct. +A local train . . . . . . . . Un train omnibus. +A passenger train . . . . . . Un train de voyageurs. +A freight train . . . . . . . Un train de marchandises. +To entrain the troops . . . . Embarquer les troupes. +To detrain the troops . . . . Débarquer les troupes. +To get on a train . . . . . . Monter dans un train. +To get off a train . . . . . Descendre d'un train. +The railroad track . . . . . La-voie (ferrée). +A side track . . . . . . . . Une voie de garage. +A ticket . . . . . . . . . . Un billet. +A round trip ticket . . . . . Un billet d'aller et retour. +One way only . . . . . . . . Aller seulement. +The ticket window . . . . . . Le guichet. +At what time does the Paris / A quelle heure part le train + train start? . . . . . . . \ pour Paris? +It is late (15 minutes late) Il est en retard (de quinze + minutes). +Do we have to change cars? . Faut-il changer de train? +The train stops . . . . . . . Le train s'arrête. +All aboard! . . . . . . . . . En voiture! +The train starts . . . . . . Le train s'ébranle. + + +RATIONS AND FOOD. + +Provisions (in general) . . . Les vivre. +The ration . . . . . . . . . La ration. +Fresh beef . . . . . . . . . De la viande fraîche. +Bacon . . . . . . . . . . . . Du lard. +Flour . . . . . . . . . . . . De la farine. +Soft bread . . . . . . . . . Du pain frais. +Hard bread (crackers) . . . . Du biscuit. +Field bread . . . . . . . . . Du pain de guerre. +Corn meal . . . . . . . . . . De la farine de maïs. +Coffee . . . . . . . . . . . Du café. +Sugar . . . . . . . . . . . . Du sucre. +Eggs . . . . . . . . . . . . Des oeufs. +Chickens . . . . . . . . . . Des poulets. +Potatoes . . . . . . . . . . Des pommes de terre. +Peas . . . . . . . . . . . . Des pois. +String beans . . . . . . . . Des haricots verts. +Vegetables (in general) . . . Des légumes. +An apple . . . . . . . . . . Une pomme. +A pear . . . . . . . . . . . Une poire. +A cherry . . . . . . . . . . Une cerise. +A peach . . . . . . . . . . . Une pêche. +Cheese . . . . . . . . . . . Du fromage. +Wine . . . . . . . . . . . . Du vin. +Beer . . . . . . . . . . . . De la bière. +A glass of beer . . . . . . . Un bock. +I am hungry . . . . . . . . . J'ai faim. +Bring me something to eat Apportez-moi quelque chose à + please . . . . . . . . . . manger, s'il vous-plaît. +I am thirsty . . . . . . . . J'ai soif. +Please give me a glass of Veuillez me donner un verre + Water . . . . . . . . . . . d'eau. +Waiter, I'll take a beefsteak Garçon, je désire un bifteck. +Some black coffee . . . . . . Du café noir. +Coffee with milk . . . . . . Du café au lait. +Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . Des petits pains. +Crescent rolls . . . . . . . Des croissants. + + +HOSPITALS. + +A field hospital . . . . . . Une ambulance. +A hospital (in general) . . . Un hôpital (plural: des hôpitaux). +A dressing station . . . . . Un poste de secours. +A first-aid dressing . . . . Un pansement sommaire. +Red Cross . . . . . . . . . . La Croix Rouge. +A doctor . . . . . . . . . . Un médecin. + Un docteur. +A surgeon . . . . . . . . . . Un chirurgien. +A military surgeon . . . . . Un (médecin) major. +Assistant surgeon . . . . . . Un aide-major. +A male nurse, hospital corps + man . . . . . . . . . . . . Un infirmier. +A female nurse . . . . . . . Une infirmière. +An ambulance . . . . . . . . Une ambulance. +A stretcher (litter) . . . . Un brancard. +A litter bearer . . . . . . . Un brancardier. +A roll of bandages . . . . . Un rouleau de bandage. +A first-aid packet . . . . . Un paquet de pansement. +A wounded man . . . . . . . . Un blessé. +I am sick . . . . . . . . . . Je suis malade. +I have a fever . . . . . . . J'ai la fièvre. +I have chills and fever . . . J'ai des frissons de fièvre. +I am constipated . . . . . . Je suis constipé. +I have diarrhea . . . . . . . J'ai la diarrhée. + + +POINTS OF THE COMPASS. + +North . . . . . . . . . . . . Le nord. +South . . . . . . . . . . . . Le sud. +East . . . . . . . . . . . . L'est. +West . . . . . . . . . . . . L'ouest. +Northeast . . . . . . . . . . Le nord-est. +Southeast . . . . . . . . . . Le sud-est. +Northwest . . . . . . . . . . Le nord-ouest. +Southwest . . . . . . . . . . Le sud-ouest. + + +TRENCH WARFARE. + +Trench warfare . . . . . . . La guerre des tranchées. + La guerre de position. + La guerre de taupe (_moles_). +Trench . . . . . . . . . . . Une tranchée. +Communication trench . . . . Un boyau (de communication). +The parapet . . . . . . . . . Le parapet. +A loophole . . . . . . . . . Un créneau. + Une meurtrière. +A grenade . . . . . . . . . . Une grenade. +A grenadier, bomber . . . . . Un grenadier. +Barbed wire . . . . . . . . . Du fil de fer barbelé. +Barbed wire entanglement . . Un réseau de fils de fer barbelés. +Trench mortar . . . . . . . . Un mortier. + Un crapouillaud. + _Minenwerfer_ (German). +Bomb . . . . . . . . . . . . Une bombe. +Howitzer . . . . . . . . . . Un obusier. +Machine gun . . . . . . . . . Une mitrailleuse. +Fieldpiece . . . . . . . . . Une pièce de campagne. +75 millimeter field gun . . . Une pièce de soixante-quinze. +Siege gun . . . . . . . . . . Une piece de siège. +120 long . . . . . . . . . . Cent vingt long. +120 short . . . . . . . . . . Cent vingt court. +77 (German) . . . . . . . . . Soixante-dix-sept (allemand). +Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . Un obus. + Une marmite (slang). + Un colis à domicile (slang). +Shrapnel . . . . . . . . . . Un shrapnell. + Un rageur (slang). +Periscope . . . . . . . . . . Un périscope. +Trench knife . . . . . . . . Un couteau de tranchée. +Dugout . . . . . . . . . . . Un abri dans les tranchées. + Un cagibi (slang). + Une cagna (slang). + Un gourbi (slang). + Une guitoune (slang). + +NOTE.--In addressing an officer of grade superior to his own, an +officer must use the possessive adjective; a senior addressing +a junior uses the title of the grade only. Thus: A major to a +colonel says "Mon colonel," but the colonel to the major would +say "Commandant." + + + + +APPENDIX. + +FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT. + +List Will and Testament + +OF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + + +I, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +do make, publish, and declare this my last will and testament. + +I give, devise, and bequeath to[15] . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +And I do give, devise, and bequeath all the rest and residue +of my estate, both real and personal, to . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +heirs and assigns forever[16] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +I hereby appoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . executor of +this my last will and testament, and I desire that . . . . . +shall not be required to give bond for the performance of that +office. + +Witness my hand this[17] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +day of . . . . . . . . . . . . , 191 + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + +Signed, published, and declared by . . . . . . . . . . . . . +. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the +above-named testator, as and for his last will and testament, +in the presence of us, who, at his request and in his presence, +and in the presence of each other, have subscribed our names +as witnesses thereto.[18] + + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + Residence: . . . . . . . . . . . + + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + Residence: . . . . . . . . . . . + + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + Residence: . . . . . . . . . . . + +[Footnote 15: Here insert specific legacies and devises.] + +[Footnote 16: If the residue of the estate is given to several +persons, add here the manner in which it is to be divided, as +"in equal shares as tenants in common."] + +[Footnote 17: If the will is made in Nevada, or if the testator +has real estate in that State, he should affix his seal.] + +[Footnote 18: If the will is made in Louisiana, unless it is +wholly in the handwriting of the testator, there should be seven +witnesses and a notary at the "sealing up." If wholly in his +handwriting no formalities are required.] + + + + +INDEX. + +Abbreviations on maps +Advance guards +Advance party of advance guard +Advice to riflemen +Aiming rifle +Alignments +Ammunition +Arm signals +Arms. (_See_ Field kit.) +Articles of War: + Extracts from + Reading +Assembling Infantry Equipment +Ball cartridges +Battle sight +Bayonet: + Charge + Description of + Fix + Unfix +Bayonet, manual of: + Attacks + Combat + Combined movements + Defenses + Fencing exercises + Foot movements + General rules + Instruction without bayonet + Instruction with rifle + Instruction without rifle + Suggestions for fencing at will +Blank cartridges +Blanket roll +Blanks, message +Blisters +Bugle signals +Calling the shot +Camp: + Making camp + Service and duties +Care of feet +Care of rifle +Cartridges: + Ball + Blank + Dummy + Guard +Cleaning pistol +Cleaning rifle +Close order, company drill +Clothing. (_See_ Uniforms.) +Coast Artillery companies +Codes used in signaling + General service code (International Morse code) + Two-arm semaphore code + Wig-wag code + Letter codes-- + Cavalry + Field Artillery + Infantry +Combat + Exercises +Commander of the guard +Commands, Infantry Drill Regulations +Company inspection +Company, school of: + Close order drill-- + Alignment + At ease and route step + Facing or marching to the rear + Front into line + Movements on fixed pivot + Movements on the moving pivot + On right (left) into line + Rules + To diminish the front of a column of squads + To dismiss company + To form the company + Division of company + Extended order drill-- + Deployments + Rules for deployment + The advance + The company acting alone + The company in support + The fire attack + Fire-- + Classes of firing + Fire control + Fire direction + Fire discipline + General rules + Ranges + The target + Instruction + Position of officers, noncommissioned officers, guides, etc. + Position of platoons and squads +Compliments from guards +Contours +Conventional signs on maps +Cooking, individual +Coordination in firing rifle +Corporal of the guard +Cossack post +Course in small-arms firing +Courtesies in conversation +Courtesy, military +Cover, use of +Datum plane on maps +Definition, Infantry Drill Regulations +Details and rosters, interior guards +Directions on maps +Discipline + Fire discipline +Distances on maps +Drill (_See_ Infantry Drill Regulations): + Close order + Extended order + General rules +Drill regulations, all arms +Dummy cartridges +Engineer companies +English-French vocabularies +Enlistment oath +Equipment: + Assembling + Part of +Extended order drill +Facings +Feet, care of +Field exercises +Field kit +Field message blanks +Field service: + Advance guard + Advance party + Patrols + Point + Reserve + Support + Combat + Flank guards + Outposts-- + Cossack posts + Duties of + Line of observation + Line of resistance + March outpost + Outguards + Patrols + Pickets + Reserves + Sentinels + Sentry squads + Supports + Patrolling + Principles of Infantry training + Rear guards + Rifle trenches +Field Service Regulations +Fire: + Control + Direction + Ranges + Rapid firing + Targets +Firing positions +Firing with rests +First-aid rules +Flag signals +Flank guards +Formations, general rules +Forage ration +Form for last will and testament +French-English vocabulary +General service code +Grain ration +Ground forms on maps +Guard cartridges +Guard duty (extracts from Manual of Interior): + Classification of interior guards + Color sentinels + Commander of the guard + Compliments from guards + Corporal of the guard + Countersigns + Details + Flags + Guard mounting + Formal + Informal + Guard patrols + Guarding prisoners + Introduction + Musician of the guard + Orderlies + Orders for sentinels + Paroles + Prisoners + Privates of the guard + Relieving the old guard + Retreat gun + Reveille gun + Rosters + Sergeant of the guard + Watchmen +Guard mounting + Formal + Informal +Gun sling, use of +Hashures on map +Hygiene, personal +Individual cooking + Recipes +Infantry Drill Regulations, extracts from: + Company inspection + Definitions + General rules for drills and formations + Introduction + Manual of the bayonet + Manual of tent pitching + Orders, commands, and signals + School of the company + School of the soldier + School of the squad +Infantry equipment, assembling +Infantry training principles +Insignia: + Noncommissioned officers + Officers +Inspection: + Company +Interior guard duty, Manual of. (_See_ Guard duty.) +International Morse code +Intrenching tools +Kit. (_See_ Field kit; Service kit; Surplus kit.) +Laws governing Army +Line of observation +Line of resistance +Loading and firings +Loyalty +Making maps +Manual of arms +Manual of the Bayonet. (_See_ Bayonet, Manual of.) +Manual of Interior Guard Duty. (_See_ Guard duty.) +Manual of Tent Pitching. (_See_ Tent Pitching, Manual of.) +Maps: + Abbreviations + Contours + Datum plane + Directions + Distances + Ground forms + Hashures + Making (sketching) + Orienting + Reading + Ridges + Scales + Signs + Slopes + Stream lines + Valleys + Vertical intervals +Marching + Preparation for +Marksmanship, preliminary training +Message blanks +Metal fouling solution for cleaning rifle +Military courtesy +Morse, international code. (_See_ General service code.) +National Anthem +Noncommissioned officers: + Corporal of guard + Insignia + Precedence + Rank + Sergeant of guard +Oath of enlistment +Obedience +Observation, line of. (_See_ Line of observation.) +Officers: + Insignia + Precedence + Rank +Orders: + How obeyed + Infantry Drill Regulations +Orienting maps +Outguards +Outposts +Pack + Close + Open +Patrolling +Patrols: + Advance guards + Outpost +Peep sight +Personal hygiene +Pickets +Point of advance guard +Pistol: + Cleaning + Practice +Pivots: + Turn on fixed + Turn on moving +Position of the soldier +Precedence: + Noncommissioned officers + Officers +Principles of Infantry training +Prisoners +Privates of the guards +Range estimators +Rank: + Noncommissioned officers + Officers +Rapid firing +Rations: + Carried on person + Cooking + Emergency + Forage + Grain + Kinds of +Reading maps +Regulations, Army +Regulations, Drill, all arms +Regulations, Field Service +Regulations Governing Army +Relieving the old guard +Reserve: + Of advance guard + Of outpost +Resistance, line of. (_See_ Line of resistance.) +Rests +Retreat gun +Reveille gun +Revolver practice +Ridges on maps +Rifle: + Aiming + Battle sight + Care of + Cleaning + Coordination in firing + Description of + Plate showing principal parts + Sight adjustment + Trenches +Rosters, interior guards +Rules (_see_ First-aid rules): + General Rules for Drills and Formations + Governing saluting +Salutes: + Hand + Rifle + Saber + Sentinels +Saluting + Rules governing +Scales on maps +School of the company. (_See_ Company, school of.) +School of the soldier. (_See_ Soldier, school of.) +School of the squad. (_See_ Squad, school of.) +Semaphore, two-arm signaling code +Sentinels: + Interior guard, orders for + Of outpost +Sentry squad +Sergeant of the guard +Service kit +Shoes +Sights: + Adjustment + Battle sight + Open sight + Peep sight + Table of sight corrections +Signalling, general instructions +Signal flags +Signals: + Arm + Bugle + Enemy in sight + Firing line and reserve + Flag + Other signals + Sound + Take cover + Two arm semaphore + Whistle + Wig-wag +Sketching +Slopes on maps +Small-arms firing course +Socks +Soda solution for cleaning rifle +Soldier, school of: + Duties of instructor + Eyes right or left + Facings + Instruction without arms + Manual of arms + Position of the soldier on attention + Rifle salute + Salute with the hand + Salute with saber + Steps and marchings + Back step + Change step + Quick time + Side step + The half step + To halt + To march by the flank + To march to the rear + To mark time + The bayonet + The inspection + The rests + To dismiss the squad +Solutions for cleaning rifle +Squad, school of: + Alignments + Instruction + Kneeling and lying down + Loadings and firings + Observation + The assembly + The oblique march + The use of cover + To cease firing + To deploy as skirmishers + To fire at will + To fire by clip + To fire by volley + To follow the corporal + To form squad + To increase or diminish intervals + To load + To set the sight + To stack and take arms + To suspend firing + To take intervals and distance + To turn on fixed pivot + To turn on moving pivot + To unload +Star-Spangled Banner +Steps and marchings +Streams lines on maps +Subsistence. (_See_ Rations.) +Support: + Advance guard + Outpost +Surplus kit +Swabbing solution for cleaning rifle +Target practice: + Advice to riflemen + Aiming rifle + Battle sight + Calling the shot + Coordination + Firing positions + Preliminary training in marksmanship + Sight adjustment + Table of sight corrections + Targets + The course in small-arms firing + Trigger squeeze +Targets +Tent Pitching, Manual of: + Conical wall tent + Folding tents + Pitch all type Army tents (except shelter and conical + wall tents) + Shelter tent + Sleeping bags + Striking tents +Toilet articles +Trenches, rifle +Trigger squeeze +Two-arm semaphore code +Uniforms + Care of + Disposing of + Dress + Full dress + How worn + Service +Use of cover +Valleys on maps +Vertical intervals on maps +Visual signaling (_See_ Signals): + In general + Flag +Vocabulary--English-French +Whistle signals +Wig-wag signaling +Will, form for last will and testament +Windage corrections +Wind gauge + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Manual for Noncommissioned Officers +and Privates of Infantry of the Army of the United States, 1917, by War Department + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 10908 *** |